Home

AionDS User Guide

1. Reten Value External Library 4 Makeany desired modifications to the function and method 5 Saveand close the function and method by selecting O bject C lose AionD S saves and closes the function and method Reult Themethod and attached function execute when the execution conditions for the window occur For example you select the W henInstanceN ameC hosen method for a push button and the function opens another dialog When you click the push button the method and attached function executes and a dialog opens 6 98 User s Guide Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows You can use the Attach push button available in most slots dialogs to attach a parameter slot or message to a window For example you can attach a parameter to a text window to store user input to that text window For more information See the Building GUI Application Reference for details about attaching parameters slots or messages to a specific window Whatto do 1 in thewindow sots dialog if you select the TSL or Attached Object In the window slots dialog if you select the TSL or Attached O bject radio button the Attach push button is highlighted If you select the T SL radio button you can only select the Reload check box in the Attach O bject dialog 2 Click Attach T he Attach O bject dialog displays Attach Object
2. 5 Toreamea bitmap window instance enter anew name in the Instance Name field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new bitmap window instance 6 You can assign a bitmap window instance to another bitmap window subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the O wning C lass field Assigning the bitmap window instance to a different class in the O wning Class field automatically updates parent and child links 7 Inthe Basic Window Styles group specify whether the bitmap window is initially enabled or visible and whether it automatically opens when its parent window opens For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles Working with the Window Editor 6 67 Displaying bitmap windows 6 68 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 In the Bitmap W indow Styles group define the display properties of the bitmap window such as stretching the bitmap to fit the window inverting the colors in the image adding scroll bars that allow the user to scroll the image and so on For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the Image field select the bitmap image instance Link the bitmap image instance to the bitmap image to display in the bitmap window In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the bitmap window For more information Se
3. Window styles Monitor control Read only Y Use menu J Lock cursor i Scrollable Multiple line text _ Reload Y Visible Input processing Yi Auto popup _jUppercase _ Disallow unknown Yi Auto skip YI Trim _ Disallow empty list _ Check length 3 Select the desired options in this dialog Select Screen R efresh Alternative Select File Save Reult The Layout window displays the window with its new attributes A 24 User s Guide Building character based applications Window Attributes T he W indow Attributes dialog contains the following groups of check boxes options W indow Styles M onitor Control and Input processing Window Styles Read only text in the window cannot be modified by the user Scrollable text in the window scrolls Visible user input to the window is printed on the screen M ost windows have this checked H owever a window in which the user enters a password might have this attribute unchecked to hide the password Auto popup window pops up when the cursor enters the window Auto skip only valid on the mainframe T he cursor automatically skips to the next window when the last character is entered Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 25 Building character based applications Monitor control Usemenu answer choices are presented as a menu Lock cursor cursor stays in the window until an answer is entered M ultipleline multiple lines o
4. 6 52 User s Guide Building group boxes To renamea group box instance enter anew namein the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new group box instance name You can assign a group box instance to another group box subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the O wning field AionDS automatically updates parent and child links with the new group box instance name In the Basic W indow Styles group you can specify the group box as part of agroup by clicking on the Group check box You can also specify the T ab Stop styles for the group box by selecting the T ab Stop check box For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the Group Box Styles group define the display properties of a group box such as whether or not a group box has a border or to align the top of the controls within the group box For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the T ext Source group specify the source of the text that displays in the group box at run time If you select the Plain radio button text from the Title field displays in the group box If you select the T SL radio button you can enter TSL text into the Title field If you select the Attached O bject radio button attach an object with the desired text to display in the group box To attach an object
5. Caution Library objects can own other objects in a knowledge base M oving library objects may produce unexpected results in the knowledge bases in which the library objects are included From within a knowledge base you cannot move included library objects To clone press CTRL and the right mouse button 5 22 User s Guide Directly manipulating objects If you select one object to move or clone the object s icon displays in place of the mouse pointer If you select two or more objects to move or clone the selected objects display in the M ove window or Clone window 3 Movetheicon to the object A raised bar indicates the new owner Working with Objects 5 23 Directly manipulating objects 5 24 User s Guide 4 A Movewindow or Clone window displays Selected objects cl Dinner Menu _ l Include subtrees l Open object list Target owner Menu U se this window to confirm the move or clone procedure for the selected objects Usethe list box in this window to select and deselect objects If the knowledge base object or objects are contexts Include subtrees is available T o place the contexts below the selected context in the clipboard check Include subtrees If you check O pen object list AionD S displays a Select O bjects window with the target object in the O wner field You can immediately open a new O bject List window in the context where the object was pasted or cloned For moreinfo
6. Basic Window Styles Disabled Invisible Toolbar Styles Floating Pointer 3 Toreamethe tool bar instance enter anew namein the Insance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new tool bar instance name You can assign a tool bar instance to another tool bar subclass by selecting anew subclass name in the O wning Class field AionDS automatically updates parent and child links with the new tool bar instance name In the Basic W indow Styles group you can specify the tool bar as Disabled or Invisible Disabled You cannot select the tool bar Invisible AionD S temporarily hides the tool bar For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different basic window styles 6 Creating tool bars In the Tool bar Styles group you can specify the position in which the tool bar displays Snap H orizontal T he tool bar displays horizontally across the top of the window The tool bar s width is the same width as the window This is the default Snap V ettical T he tool bar displays vertically along the side of the window T he tool bar s height is the same as the window s height Floating T he tool bar can be moved anywhere on the parent window when creating the object statically The floating tool bar remains stationary at runtime For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details ab
7. Off does not display the button bar Left displays the button bar on the left side of the screen Right displays the button bar on the right side of the screen 10 6 User s Guide Customizing AionDS windows 3 In the M essage bar group click one of the following radio buttons off does not display the message bar Left displays the message bar on the left side of the screen Right displays the message bar on the right side of the screen 4 To hidethe button bar and the message bar when you run a knowledge base check H ideon run 5 Click Se Removingthe To remove the message bar or button bar from the screen with the mouse message and button double click on any part of the message bar or a place on the button bar bars with the mouse where no icons display Customizing AionDS 10 7 Customizing AionDS windows Displaying windows with a 3 dimensional appearance W hat to do You can display windows with a 3 dimensional appearance To display windows with a 3 dimensional appearance 1 Select Settings D isplay The D isplay Settings window displays 2 IntheUse3 D controls group check At runtime to display AionD S windows with a 3 dimensional appearance when running a knowledge base Check At edit time to display AionD S windows with a 3 dimensional appearance when you edit a knowledge base Fa Note All AionD S 2 applications use 3 dimensional controls as Version 2 0 of O S 2 AionD S 2 does not have the check box to enable 3 D control
8. Overview To create windows dialogs and controls use the N ew W indow dialog Controls must reside in the parent top level windows or dialogs W hat to do 1 Select Screen N ew Window The N ew Window dialog displays Class EES e Name TA Parent e Attached Class as 2 In theClass field select the class for the new window dialog or control Thenew window dialog or control is an instance of this class T he class can be a top level window or dialog or a control 6 14 User s Guide 3 N Oo fF 9 Creating windows dialogs and controls To create a new class for the window dialog or control instance click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays Name Top level windows which are standard windows and dialog box windows should reside in subclasses so that the class hierarchy can be seen clearly and objects are separated from the W indowO bject class library You must subclass the standard window and dialog box classes of the WIN LIB before creating instances In the N ame field enter a name for the new class In the O wne field select the parent class of the new class Click N ew to return to the N ew Window dialog In the N ame field type an instance name for the new window dialog or control In the Parent field specify the parent window if you want to make that window a top level window T his creates the window on the D esktop For moreinformation You can also c
9. Overview To indicate the order in which the windows display during a consultation use the Edit C ut and Edit Paste options to paste the windows in the desired order Windows display in the order that they are created M Tip Windows that display later are placed on top of windows that were displayed earlier W hat to do To reorder the windows follow this procedure 1 Select the window to move 2 Cut the window to the clipboard by selecting Edit C ut W indow A 36 User s Guide Building character based applications 3 Paste the window back into the screen by selecting Edit Paste W indow The Paste W indow displays U se the Paste W indow to specify the order in which windows are drawn on the screen Paste Window Please select the display and the window order for the window s to be pasted Displays Hello Hello 4 Select the Display in which the window is to be pasted Select the window that displays immediately after the one to be pasted Do not select a window if you want to paste the window at the end of the window list 6 Click OK Reult The window is pasted into the display in the specified order Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 37 Building character based applications Cutting copying pasting and deleting windows Overview The concepts of cut copy paste and delete discussed in Chapter 5 W orking with O bjects also apply to the D isplay windows in the Layo
10. Trace controls 10 28 User s Guide If you delete a trace file while a knowledge base is running AionD S creates another trace file Trace options TheLeve field specifies the default trace level This option can have one of the following values 0 trace file not available Execution T race in the Run window is set to off When running character based applications in AionD S 2 the explanation facility is not available 1 trace file not available Execution T race in the Run window is set to Explanation only When running character based applications in AionD S 2 the Explanation facility is available 2 3 tracefile available Execution T race in the Run window is set to On W hen running character based applications in AionD S 2 the Explanation facility is available 4 T he trace file displays on screen When running character based applications in AionD S 2 the Explanation facility is available Execution T racein the Run window is set to On This field sets the TRACE LEVEL profile option W idth controls the width of the trace output The default is 76 If the output is greater than the W idth specification it is wrapped onto the next line and indented A Width setting of zero specifies no wrapping You should set the W idth to zero when using the Include T iming Values option T his field sets the TRACE PAGE WIDTH profile option Compatibility Settings Customizing profiles Include T iming Values controls whether ti
11. add asummary of all objects printed to the end of the printout W hen you complete changing the print format attributes click OK to return to the Print window 8 Click Print to print the information of the selected objects or save it to a file For moreinformation See Chapter 3 W orking at the Knowledge Base Level to learn about arranging the print order of the selected objects and the format of the print output Working with Objects 5 51 Making a state the entry state Making a state the entry state Overview The entry state is the state in which a knowledge base begins executing Each knowledge base has one entry state which is named M ain by default M ain is represented by the following icon iain W hat to do To make another state the entry state 1 Select the state 2 Select Object Set entry state 5 52 User s Guide Chapter 6 Working with the Window Editor This chapter shows you how to build a graphical user interface using the Window editor You use the W indow editor to build the main window other new windows dialog boxes controls OLE controls and objects and the DDE system In this chapter Topic Page Overview 6 4 Procedure for building the graphical user interface 6 6 Creating a knowledge base 6 10 O pening the W indow editor 6 12 Creating windows dialogs and controls 6 14 O pening windows and dialogs 6 16 Resizing and moving windows dialogs and controls 6 17 Copying
12. ColumnLB Attachment Configuration Attachment C Reload No Reload Attached Class Recipe Attached Slots UnAttached Slots IngredientsNeeded Delete gt Width as dig units Title Name Alignment Left Center Right 6 42 User s Guide Building multi column list boxes 2 To detach slots from the multi column list box select the slot in the Attached Slots list and click D elete 3 To attach slots select the slot in the Unattached Slots list and click Add Usethe ColumnLB Attachment Configuration dialog to set the order of columns in the multi column list box The top to bottom order of slots in the Attached Slots list determines the left to right order of columnsin the multi column list box Ordering columns 1 M ove all slots from the Attached Slots list to the U nattached Slots list by selecting each slot and clicking D elete M ove the slot that should appear leftmost in the multi column list box to the Attached Slots list by selecting the slot in the U nattached Slots list and clicking Add From the U nattached Slots list move additional slots one at a time in the left to right order that they will appear in the multi column list box to the Attached Slots list AionD S adds each slot to the end of the Attached Slots list Usethe ColumnLB Attachment Configuration dialog to format individual columns Formatting columns 1 Select a column in the Attached Slot
13. Components and The column headings form an optional title bar The column text can be appearance left right or center aligned In the following example all columns are left aligned You can adjust the column widths at runtime AionD S adds scroll bars as needed T he following figure is an example of a multi column list box Slots Status ls SF assigned SF ECD FDA CBO Virginia coo assigned 5CD CDO John scp assigned SCD Sarah SI assigned SI CDA CDU Hank CDH assigned SCO CHA CUH Andrew CDH assigned CHO COA CDH Instances Walter cDA assigned CDA COB Davis SF assigned EF CBO CDA COB Gordon CDA assigned CDA Kurt eligible cob Conrad eligible CLA Lynn eligible EDK lary eligible EDA Center All Show Eligible Find Employee Lisl by Name Show HisTory aasece 6 38 User s Guide Building multi column list boxes Creating a multi column list box W hat to do Create an instance of ColumnLB and attach the instance to a data class A data class contains the information displayed in the ColumnLB class AionD S uses theterm data class to avoid confusion with the ColumnLB class AionD S displays the data class instance data at runtime You can select specific slots to display at runtime Create and resize a multi column list box 2 Doubleclick on the multi column list box TheColumnar List Box Slots dialog displays Instance Name Meals Owning
14. Instance Name RecipeOpenMl Styles C Checked O Separator O No Open Short Cut Key Menu Item List 5 Select the O pen menu item under Recipein the M enu Item List field T ype over the Instance name RecipeO penM with the new name RecipeNewmr Type over the M enu Item Text name O pen with the new name N ew and click Insert Click OK and N ew is inserted before O pen 2 24 User s Guide Changing the knowledge base 6 Createthe WhenRecipeN ewM IC hosen method and function for the N ew menu item This method is executed when the user selects the N ew menu item In the GrocerySW window select RecipeN ew The M ethods dialog displays Edit Method Method Class Selected Touring AionDS 2 25 Changing the knowledge base 7 In the Edit Method group select Chosen and click OK TheM ethod and Function dialogs are created and displayed E Method WhenRecipeNewMIChosen GroceryStandard Window Function WhenRecipeNewMlChosen_ GroceryStandardVindow ggi Function Arguments Local Variables mi is pointer to MenuItem o O RetwumYawe O Value Lt T 2 26 User s Guide Changing the knowledge base In the Function Body property include the following statements Goto the Open RecipeDlg or create a new Recipe instance and Open the RecipeDlg Hipp RE for ts if RecipeDlg IsOpen then RecipeDlg SetActiveWindow else RecipeDlg RecipePtr crea
15. c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeetteeeeeeeee 4 4 Object listing DY ICOMi siaaa a sect Oa aniran AANA RENIER 4 14 Object listing by nameni aa a ee eet es 4 15 Object listing by etal ccc sais ceetevieweeek aa aaeeea aaa aea lateness 4 16 Object listing by NierarGhy ckeelseeiceelssasvevaisteneedencecteneebea ete ete aaea aaa aeia 4 18 Object listing by Graphs is s s esha eee aes a dl iae al alien ais 4 22 Changing the format of an Object List WINGOW ccecceecseeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesnnenaaeess 4 28 Collecting objects into another Object List WINGOW cccccceccsseesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeessnnaeees 4 29 iv User s Guide Chapter 5 Work with Objects Working with included library objects ccceccecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseccaaaeeeeeeeeneeeeees 5 3 Creating an object cceeeeeceee eee eeeceneee eee retest eeaaaee sees eeeteeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeesegesenaaeeeeees 5 4 Saving an OD CCl take 2s ae ee he ee ete ee ee 5 6 Changing and deleting objects in a library 0 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeenaaees 5 8 Opening object editorsy 2802 ee ea eee a a ea 5 9 Going to another object ecceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeseeeaaaeeeeeeesiaaaeeeeeeeeesaaes 5 12 Closing and Saving an ODJCCt ccceeeceeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 5 15 Closing an object without SAVING ccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeedaaeeeeeeeeeteene
16. cceeecceeecccneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeteeieeeeees A 33 Modifying the selected window s text properties cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeees A 34 Modifying Window Colors ccccceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeteenaaaes A 35 Ordering WINGOWS ii nti ae ee ee i eee eee A 37 Cutting copying pasting and deleting WINdOWS cccceeceeetttteeeeeeeeeeees A 39 Moving and resizing windows in the Layout WiNdOW eeeeeeeeeeeeeteees A 40 Displaying the Window Position dialog ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes A 42 Displaying the Layout WINdOW ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes A 43 Updating the Layout WiINdOW ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeteeeaaaes A 44 Hiding and showing selected windows or DisplayS cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 45 Modifying Layout window characteristics ccccceceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeees A 46 Reorganizing the windows in the Screen editor cceeeeceecseteeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees A 48 Running character based applications ccccccccceeeccneeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeees A 49 How to Use This Manual T his manual describes how to use the AionD S graphical development environment GUI AionD S W hat this manual is about You should read this manual if you are not familiar with GUI AionDS This manual assumes you are already famili
17. eee cece eeceeeee cece ee eeeee eee ee eee etre tte aaaee sees eee aaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaeeeeeeeeseeeneaaaes 3 25 Tracking changes in a knowledge DaSe ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeetiaaaes 3 26 Knowledge base utilities 22 2 2 ecceecccceceeeeeeeenneee eee eeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeseaaaaeeaaeeeeeeeeteeenaaaaes 3 27 Copying a knowledge base cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeteeenee 3 28 Updating a knowledge base cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeesiaaeeeaes 3 31 Deleting a knowledge base ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteecaaaeeeeeeeenaaaaaaes 3 33 Moving a knowledge Dase cccececeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeccneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeesseeaaaes 3 36 Preparing a knowledge Dase cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeessaaeeeaes 3 38 Setting knowledge base attributes cccceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 3 41 Setting a PAaSSwoOrd nenn ni nieta aa aAa a eaa a a tiia 3 42 Organizing windows with the Window pull down Menu eeesseesssssssseeessssrrrrsssssssess 3 45 AionDS online help seessesseseeesnnnssssessrssssssserrrnsssnsssssrnnnnnntssrennnnsasernntsnrennnnsssennennsent 3 46 Work with Object List Object listing actio nS snn n a iaaea i ee 4 2 Selecting objects for an Object List WINdOW ccccceceeseeeeneeeteeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeentetsaatess 4 3 Fields on the Select Objects WiNdoW
18. pi O TSL Attached Object Pointer p User Sints Back Color 8 Replace the text in the Title field with Recipe Click OK to return to the Recipe dialog 2 30 User s Guide Adding label windows Changing the knowledge base Add the Recipe N ame and Ingredients N eeded label windows For each select the Label W indow icon from the tool palette and click the cursor displayed as the Label W indow icon in the Recipe dialog box TheN ew Window dialog displays New Window Class pon 2 Name a Parent En Attached Class _ New Class In the N ew Window dialog enter the name of the label window in the N ame field and click N ew to return to the label window N ame the Recipe N ame label window RecipeN ameLbl N ame the Ingredients N eeded label window RecipelngredientsL bl Touring AionDS 2 31 Changing the knowledge base 3 Ente the text displayed in the label window Doubleclick in the label window to display the label window slots Text Window Slots Instance Name RecipeNameLbl Owning Class TextWindow Basic Window Styles l Group l Tab Stop No Open l Disabled l Invisible Text Window Styles l Border IX Label F Password I Multi Line F Auto HScroll F Vertical Scroll I Read Only I Auto VScroll F Horizontal Scroll Text Source Plain Text TSL Attached Object Text Label Window Pointer User Slots B
19. 6 122 User s Guide When AionDS is the client application the D D EO bject and W indowO bject Classes are closely related A conversation is defined for a specific window That window must be an instance of either a Standard Window or a Standard W indow subclass The conversation is only active while that window is open D etermine how the application starts conversations For example you can initiate a conversation when selecting an OK push button or when opening a window You can also define controls to display data from the server T his section describes how to create the Client instance and set up knowledge base logic to start the D DE conversation For more information Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the logic used to start the DDE conversation In the Window editor open the window for which to establish aD DE conversation Building a DDE system Displaying the N ew Conversation dialog 1 Select Screen D DE Conversation The Client Conversations dialog displays Client Conversations Name Parent Service Topic 2 To createa new subclass of the Client class click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays 3 Complete the N ew Class dialog For more information See Creating windows dialogs and controls on page 6 14 Working with the Window Editor 6 123 Building a DDE system 4 Inthe Conversations dialog click New The N ew Conversation dialog displays New Conversation
20. A abort 3 12 9 25 accelerator keys supported for OCX 6 92 access method access string property 7 11 adding example of 2 43 changing 7 7 class definition property 7 14 configurations 7 3 data file name property 7 16 data integrity check property 7 17 data location property 7 19 database property 7 22 defining 7 6 external sourcing property 7 23 index file names property 7 24 key fields property 7 30 load mode property 7 32 mapped slots property 7 33 runtime during 7 4 selection criteria property 7 34 table name property 7 38 update mode property 7 39 access method class 7 5 access method 7 2 Access string property of access method 7 11 accessing property values OCXs 6 91 adding libraries 3 14 adding OC Xs to windows 6 90 ADI see Automatic D atabase Interface AD aes Desktop 6 5 agenda example 2 15 AION INI 10 13 AionDS application knowledge 1 2 application window 6 4 concepts 1 2 contexts 1 8 control knowledge 1 2 features other 1 15 GUI 1 5 GUI library 1 11 inference engine 1 4 knowledge base building 1 14 object hierarchy 1 7 objects 1 2 primary window 2 5 quitting 2 8 starting 2 5 tour 2 2 utilities other 1 15 windows 6 4 AionD S as client creating links 6 125 all resolutions check box font settings window 10 5 Alternate file name property 7 12 Alternate key field property 7 13 ancestors definition 4 9 application window build 6 27 definiti
21. Building a DDE system Name Parent Conversation Item Format Linked Object Type LIL X Hot Link Creating the Link instance In the N ew Link dialog 1 2 Specify the name of the Link instance in the N ame field Select the name of the parent class for the Link instance in the Parent field M Tip The parent class is either the Link class or a subclass of Link To create a subclass of Link instead of using the Link class select N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays Complete the N ew Class dialog For moreinformation See Creating windows dialogs and controls on page 14 Select the conversation name in the C onversation field A Reminder The conversation must already exist Specify the server s name for the data item in the Item field Working with the Window Editor 6 127 Building a DDE system 7 In theFormat field select the format for transferring the server data M Tip The format is either text dde FORMAT TEXT or AionDS binary dde FORMAT AIONBINARY 8 Select the linked object s type in the T ype field M Tip Thetypeis either a slot or parameter 9 Specify the linked object s namein the N ame field 10 Select thelinked object s parent in the O wner field 11 By default the H ot Link check box is selected so that the value is updated automatically Deselect this check box to have a warm link instead 12 Click OK Modifying links Usethe Links dialog
22. Enter the following statement in the Function Body If the user s answers are successfully assigned to the Recipe slots update the RecipeValueList and close RecipeDlg fh if AssignAnswers then state UpdateRecipeValueList close end You cannot save the Recipe dialog until you have created the independent state U pdateR ecipeV alueList which the OK push button function calls Touring AionDS 2 39 Changing the knowledge base Creating an independent state Overview Create an independent state called U pdateR ecipeV alueList This state contains the rules to allow new recipes to be selected from the Add Dish dialog Whattodo i est 1 Activate the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window by selecting it from the W indow pull down menu 2 Select O bject N ew to display the N ew O bject window New Object Type Name UpdateRecipe YalueList omw OOO J Open object 3 In theTypelist box click the down arrow to use the drop down list and Select or enter state 4 Click in or TAB to the N ame field and enter UpdateRecipeValueList 5 Leavethe Owner fied blank to create an independent state not owned by any other state 6 MakesureOpen Object is checked When O pen O bject is checked AionD S opens an editor for the object as soon as AionD S creates the object 7 Click N ew or press ENTER to create the new state The state and its Agenda window are created and displayed 2 40 User s Guide Changing
23. Instance Name anytool Owning Class handtools E Window Styles Group Disabled l Invisible Tool Style Push Button C Radio Button C Check Box F Initially Chosen Tool Attributes X Stretch Image Image clawhammer Bitmap clawhammer Bitmap plane Bitmap prybar Bitmap saw Bitmap Pointer To rename the tool instance enter a new name in the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new tool instance You can assign a tool instance to another tool subclass by entering a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new tool instance Working with the Window Editor 6 63 Building tools on a tool bar 6 64 User s Guide In the Window Styles group you can specify the tool as Group Disabled or Invisible Group attaches a tool to a group Disabled the tool selection is disabled You cannot select the tool Invisible AionD S temporarily hides the tool For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different window styles In the Tool Styles group you can specify the tool s logic Push button Radio Button or Check Box push button executes a piece of logic radio button represents mutually exclusive condition check box provides a Boolean value A Reninde Thetool styles determine the tool s behavior not its
24. Name e a Parent aa Partner App en Service SEs Topic E Timeout hooo Creating the Client instance In the N ew Conversation dialog 1 Specify a conversation name in the N ame field 2 Select the parent class for the Client instance in the Parent field 3 To create anew parent class for this Client instance click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays 4 Complete the N ew Class dialog m For more information See Creating windows dialogs and controls on page 6 14 5 Specify the server s executable file name without the EXE extension in the Partner App field Specify the service name as defined by the server in the Service field 7 Specify the topic namein the T opic field 8 Specify the timeout period in the Timeout field You can enter a value between 0 and 64 000 milliseconds T he default is 1000 milliseconds 6 124 User s Guide Modifying conversations Creating link instances Building a DDE system 9 Click OK editing a conversation 1 select the conversation name and click Edit The Edit Conversation dialog displays 2 TheEdit Conversation dialog contains exactly the same fields as the N ew Conversations dialog Change the desired fields and click OK Reult Theconversation fields change and you return to the Client Conversation dialog deleting a conversation 8 1 select the conversation name and click Delete A confirmation window displays 2 Click Delete to delet
25. Place the tip of the arrow on the side of the text window to resize so that the arrow turns into a double headed arrow Drag the mouse to pull or push the side in the desired direction Adding the Ingredients N eeded list box Changing the knowledge base Add the Ingredients N eeded list box Select the N ew List Box icon from the tool palette and click the cursor displayed as the List Box icon in the Recipe dialog box TheN ew Window dialog displays The ListBox class displays in the Class field T he RecipeD Ig RecipeD ialogBox window displays in the Parent field In the N ame field you must name the list box RecipelngredLB to match the corresponding namein the N ew menu item s Function Body property Click New Thelngredients N eeded list box displays You must change some list box styles D ouble click in the Ingredients N eeded list box to display the List Box Slots dialog List Box Slots Instance Name RecipeingredLB Owning Class ListBox Basic Window Styles l Group X Tab Stop l Disabled l Invisible l No Open List Box Styles l Sort List Box l Multi Select l Horizontal Scroll Pointer 2 4 Recipes usually contain several ingredients so check M ulti Select in the List Box Styles group Touring AionDS 2 35 Changing the knowledge base 2 36 User s Guide O O NOg 11 You must set up the Ingredients N eeded list box so you can attach it to the IngredientsN
26. See Adding mnemonics to controls on page 6 106 In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the radio button or check box For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the radio button or check box s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Click OK Thechanges are applied and the radio button or check box displays Select a method and add a function to the radio button or check box Building radio buttons and check boxes For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 51 Building group boxes Building group boxes Overview A group box groups two or more related controls To include controlsin a group box specify the group box as the parent window for those controls W hat to do 1 Create and resize a group box 2 Doubleclick on the group box TheGroup Box Slots dialog displays Group Box Slots Instance Name examplet Owning Class GroupBox Basic Window Styles IX Group l Tab Stop l Disabled l Invisible l No Open Group Box Styles l No Border Align Top Text Source Plain Text TSL C Attached Object Title Pointer e User Slots Attach
27. The GENERATE command maps each defined slot to afield in the class definition Commit Mode Changes committed or rolled back Valid values Properties available in the class Usethe Commit M ode property to control when to execute commits and rollbacks for SQ L databases To commit changes automatically on an update to an SQL database set Commit M odeto Automatic To commit or roll back changes manually using the DBMS statenent with either the commit or rollback option set Commit M ode to O n Request For moreinformation See the Language Reference to learn more about the DBMS statement When acommit or rollback is executed the current SQL unit of work is committed or rolled back all classes which have current SQ L connections are committed or rolled back to the last commit point A unit of work consists of the changes made by the knowledge base to databases since the last commit You can set this property to the following values Automatic A commit is executed when the update is completed On Request A commit isnot executed when the update is completed You can use the DBMS statement with either the commit or rollback option to execute a commit or rollback Working with External Databases 7 15 Properties available in the class Data File Name dBASE QSAM and VSAM only Purpose The D ata File N ame property is user specified indicating the name of the data file and its location Path names You can specify path nam
28. and sound effects to your application AionD S also provides an OleO bject class to represent O LE objects The OleO bject instance represents an OLE object that you can embed in an application For example a spreadsheet could bean OLE object that you embed into another application For moreinformation For moreinformation about OLE and OLE Custom Controls check the current titles available from M icrosoft Press or other publishers Working with the Window Editor 6 85 Building OLE controls and objects AionDS and OLE 6 86 User s Guide O bject Linking and Embedding O LE is a data transfer protocol used to extend an AionD S application You can display information or user interface objects from other third party applications without extensive API calls Furthermore the objects appear to be seamlessly integrated A common example is enbedding a spreadsheet within a word processing application You can add an OLE object to a standard window or dialog box You can use an icon window or bitmap window to display a graphic but you cannot edit the graphic at runtime You can create an empty frame for O leO bject and fill in that frame at runtime For example in a reporting application you may insert a spreadsheet a graphic or a word processing file into an empty frame AionD S represents O LE objects as instances of the O leO bject class in the W indow0 bject class hierarchy You can create subclasses of O leO bject but it isn
29. by another person W hen you copy or cut a change set it is copied to the clipboard so you can then paste it Usually you paste it into another knowledge base Caution If you delete a change set it isnot copied to the clipboard To cut copy or delete a change set perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base that contains the change sets you wish to cut copy or delete 2 Select File C hange M anagement List Select the change sets you wish to cut copy or delete Select Edit C ut Edit C opy or Edit D dete Change Set AionD S presents a confirmation dialog Confirm the change sets you want to copy cut or delete then click Copy Cut or D dete Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 21 Integrating change sets before applying them to the master To paste a change set perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base in which to paste the changes 2 Select Edit Paste Change Set T he Paste dialog displays Confirm the change sets to paste and click Paste 8 22 User s Guide Resolving change set conflicts Resolving change set conflicts W hat to do You can completely avoid conflicts only if you do not make changes to object properties which you know are changed in other outstanding change sets T o keep yourself from making changes to object properties that others have changed check with others working on the same knowledge base Also frequently applying the checked in change sets to the master
30. click on the knowledge base AionD S includes the latest version of each library F Note You cannot import a knowledge base with read only access Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 19 Exporting a knowledge base Exporting a knowledge base W hat to do Use Export to generate the external format of a knowledge base Export your knowledge base frequently this creates a backup copy The knowledge base must be open gt Select File Export 3 20 User s Guide Printing object information Printing object information W hat to do To print knowledge base object information or save it in text format in a file use the Print window 1 2 4 Select File Print To print selected knowledge base objects first select objects from an object list window then select O bject Print File name Directory is C aionds 640 Files Directories i C Append to file O Include External Specify the file to which to save the object information in the Filename field You can enter a path name or use the Directories list box to specify a path To print out object information enter the name of your printer in many installations this isLPT1 or PRN See your operating system documentation for the exact name of your printer To append object information to the end of a file select the file then select the Append to file check box Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 21 Printing object information 3
31. delete 6 112 Index l 9 description 6 108 graphic filename 6 110 name change 6 110 new image dialog 6 108 open image dialog 6 110 parent class change 6 110 import external database definition 7 8 import knowledge base window 2 9 knowledge base 2 9 3 17 object 5 49 Include Libraries list 3 14 include subtrees check box of delete window 5 17 Index file names property of access method 7 24 inference engine 1 4 inherited properties 5 40 inherited definition 5 27 initial wrap mode 10 42 inserting OLE objects 6 94 Insert mode 10 43 installing OCXs 6 89 instance see also image instance instances ColumnLB 6 38 creating O CX statically 6 89 creating O leC ontrol statically 6 89 definition 1 9 multicolumn list boxes 6 38 OleControl 6 85 OleO bject 6 85 6 86 6 88 6 94 rows display datain ColumnLB 6 38 instances and groupsin screen editor 0 6 integer ranges displaying 6 82 interface setting 6 10 I 10 User s Guide J jump defined 5 12 from active object 5 13 jump window 5 14 K K ey fields property of access method 7 30 keyboard support for O C Xs 6 92 knowledge base building 1 14 changes tracking 8 1 closing 3 8 components 1 6 copy 3 28 create how to 6 10 creating 3 2 current directory specifying 3 4 definition 1 2 deleting 3 33 entry state 1 9 example 2 2 export 3 20 hierarchy window 2 12 import 3 17 importing 2 9 modifying
32. example of 2 20 moving 3 36 Opening 3 5 preparing 3 38 print 3 21 read only access 3 4 running 3 9 saving 3 7 set attributes 3 41 testing example 2 46 update 3 31 updating 2 11 knowledge base attributes window 3 41 knowledge base graphical create 6 10 knowledge bases character based 2 7 included libraries updating 3 16 number of included libraries 1 3 knowledge bases list box 2 9 knowledge base window 3 4 L label box adding example of 2 31 label windows build 6 33 layout window definition 0 43 libraries adding 3 14 definition 1 3 deleting 3 15 main state including 1 3 modified updating to knowledge bases 3 16 objects owned by objects creating 5 3 objects modifying 1 3 restrictions 1 3 5 3 size limit 1 3 size limitations 5 3 Link class creating static instances 6 125 link instance creating 6 127 link instances modifying 6 128 Link code 0 32 linking and embedding 6 87 OLE objects 6 87 list change sets 8 7 in screen display 0 18 list box adding example of 2 35 build 6 36 list format by details 4 16 by graph 4 22 by hierarchy 4 18 by icon 4 14 by name 4 15 list items see also ComboBox ListBox ListBox 6 36 see also ComboBox list items definition 6 36 use of 6 36 Load mode property of access method 7 32 load object text check box of window settings dialog 0 47 lock cursor attribute 0 27 logic adding to windows 6 97 main
33. felNextMeal_ Function Menu ph OpenAll Method Menu fe OpenAll_ Function Menu ph OpenMenu Method Menu EMNnanhiani Function Mami If you select KB objects from the entire knowledge base can display regardless of the contents of the O wne field Any constraints specified in the Select O bjects window affect the contents of the object list Leaving the Owner field blank is equivalent to selecting KB If you select KB AionDS removes the contents of the O wner field from view Selecting objects for an Object List window Authorization radio The Authorization radio buttons display lists of selected objects with different buttons levels of access Authorization Function lists W riteable read write objects Read O nly read only objects cannot be changed Hidden objects hidden from view that cannot be changed not available with the U ser password All all objects the user is authorized to view For moreinformation See Chapter 5 Working with O bjects Work with Object Lists 4 13 Object listing by icon Object listing by icon Overview If you select Icons in the Select O bjects window objects display asiconsin an O bject List window Each object in the O bject List window is represented by an icon the object name displays below each icon Object List icons Beverage MainDish SideDish e eneren WhenCreated_ fl To change the order of the icons select a sort characteristic by name b
34. of 0 22 Select objects window 4 6 toggles see check box tool palette description 6 12 tool palettes 6 79 toolbar create 6 59 6 62 toolbars OCX 6 96 OLE object 6 96 topic description 6 129 top level windows 6 4 parent window 6 5 tour 2 2 trace action 9 16 action blocks 9 15 copy text 9 16 displaying 9 15 file namein run files window 10 29 search for text 9 16 statements 9 15 trim attribute 0 27 tutorial 2 2 type field new object window 5 5 new window dialog of 0 22 select objects window 4 5 type list box of new object window 2 40 typeface list box in font settings window 10 5 U unit of work 7 15 definition 7 42 unspecialize open property window 5 41 slots methods 5 29 unspecialize object window 5 29 unspecialize object window 5 29 unspecialized open property window 5 35 up in jump 5 13 update knowledge base 2 11 3 31 U pdate mode property of access method 7 39 updating automatically multicolumn list boxes 6 44 updating modified libraries to knowledge bases 3 16 U ppercase attribute 0 27 use menu attribute 0 27 used by in graph 4 22 in jump 5 12 user editing OLE objects 6 96 user input empty frames 6 86 OLE objects 6 93 persisting in OLE objects 6 86 6 95 processing in OLE objects 6 93 saving in OLE objects 6 86 user editing 6 96 user interfaces AionD S PM in 1 4 AionD S Win in 1 5 user interfaces 1 4 user slot values change 6 101 u
35. select Run List Breakpoints Reult The Breakpoints window displays Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 9 Continuing execution Continuing execution Executing the current statement and stopping on the called object 9 10 User s Guide You can continue the execution of the knowledge base in one of the following ways execute into the current statement and stop on the called object execute over the current statement and the called object and stop on the next statement exit subprocessing go to thenext breakpoint gt To executeinto the current statement and stop on the first statement of the called object select Run Step Into M Tip If the current statement does not call an object the execution is stopped on the next statement Example If you are debugging function A and the current statement calls function B function B is called and execution is stopped on function B s first line This operates like N ext in the character based system gt To execute over the current statement and the called object and stop on the next statement select Run Step O ver M Tip If the current statement does not call an object the execution is stopped on the next statement Example If you are debugging function A and the current line calls function B the system executes function B and stops on the next line of the current function A This operates like Skip in the character based system Executing the current ob
36. set authorization for and print objects m Working with object properties how to open cut copy paste move search for and replace text in properties In this chapter Topic Page Working with included library objects 5 3 Creating an object 5 5 Saving an object 5 7 O pening object editors 5 9 Going to another object 5 12 Closing and saving an object 5 15 Closing an object without saving 5 16 Deleting objects 5 17 Cutting and pasting objects 5 18 Cutting and pasting between knowledge bases 5 20 Directly manipulating objects 5 21 H ow you can tal an object has changed 5 24 Specializing class Sots and methods 5 26 Continued Working with Objects 5 1 Working with included library objects 5 2 User s Guide Continued Topic _ Page U nspecializing class slots and methods 5 30 Changing object authorization 5 32 Editing an object 5 34 Cutting and pasting text 5 45 Cutting and pasting text between applications 5 46 Searching for and replacing text 5 47 Exporting objects to external files 5 49 Importing objects from external files 5 51 Printing selected objects 5 52 M aking a state the entry state 5 54 Working with included library objects Working with included library objects Creating objects owned by library objects Library object restrictions You modify objects in a library the same way you modify objects in a knowledge base you open the library as a knowledge base Included library obj
37. the mouse pointer changes to an beam by default You can change a mouse pointer shape to one already included in AionD S or you can create anew mouse pointer shape To create a mouse pointer shape first create a mouse pointer graphic outside AionD S Link the mouse pointer graphic to an instance and then specify the instance in a window Slots dialog A mouse pointer image must be in one of the following file formats Operating system Supported file format Windows CUR 0S 2 PTR To create a mouse pointer image use the Software D evelopment T ool kit that comes with Windows or O S 2 You can also use any utility that can create or convert files to these formats 1 Create a mouse pointer graphic from outside AionD S Link the mouse pointer graphic to an instance 3 In the window slots dialog select the appropriate instance name of the M ouse Pointer class or subclass in the Pointer field 4 Click OK Working with the Window Editor 6 113 Linking minimize icons to windows Linking minimize icons to windows Overview To create minimize icons create an icon image file from outside of AionD S Link the icon image file to an icon instance You specify the icon instance for the minimize icon in the window slots dialog s Icon field Theicon image displays when the window is minimized For moreinformation See Building icons on page 6 79 W hat to do 1 Create an icon graphic from outside of AionD S 2 For thelcon
38. 2 Select O bject Export The Export window displays a Selected objects F Include subtrees Working with Objects 5 47 Exporting objects to external files 3 Click Export Another Export window displays Please specify the name of the export file File name EXP Directory is C ADS700 Files Directories a Enter the name of the new export file 5 In the Directories list box specify the directory in which to save the export file 6 Click Export Reult The object exports to an export file in the specified directory 5 48 User s Guide Importing objects from external files Importing objects from external files W hat to do To import an object from an external file use the Import window 1 Select the object under which the imported object is to exist 2 Select Object mport Thelmport window displays Please specify the name of the export file File name Directory is CAADS700 Directories 3 If necessary change the directory in the Directories list box 4 Select an export file in the Files list box 5 Click Import Reult Theselected export file is imported into the knowledge base and placed under the selected object in the knowledge base hierarchy Working with Objects 5 49 Printing selected objects Printing selected objects W hat to do 1 To print or save information about selected objects to a file select O bject Print after selecting objects from an O bject L
39. 22 User s Guide To place object information in anew file enter the path and filenamein the Filename field and select the Append to file check box To overwrite the contents of a file with object information select the file and make sure the Append to file check box is not selected To specify the print order of object information click Sort The Print Sort window displays Change the print sort fields then click O K to return to the Print window To perform any of the following tasks click Format The Print Format window displays enter header and footer text for each page change page width and length a indicate printer type compress output into minimum number of lines add index to end of printout add table of contents to end of printout add extended table of contents containing entries for all objects to end of printout add summary of all objects printed to end of printout After changing the print format attributes click OK to return to the Print window Printing object information Prnt Ronse Wingo Header SYBTST 0 01 Footer ns a ti Page Width 76 E o Page Length 66 Index Printer Type Table Of Contents Standard X Extended Table of Contents HP Laserjet x Summary From this window you can Enter the header and footer text for each page T he default header is the knowledge base name and version number Change the page width and length T he default pag
40. 31 Run menu summary 9 5 run program settings customizing 10 33 run programs settings window 10 33 run pull down abort and restart 3 12 run settings customizing 10 27 run settings window 10 27 run window 3 9 backup rerun 0 51 preload answers 0 51 store answers 0 51 S sample area of window colors dialog 0 36 save object 5 6 settings 10 13 saving user input OLE objects 6 86 scope radio button KB 4 12 I 18 User s Guide owner 4 11 owner and up 4 11 scope radio buttons select objects window 4 9 Screen browse window 0 19 description of editor 0 5 see also Screen file 0 5 screen editor display objects 0 6 opening 2 7 0 7 screen pull down attach display 0 13 attributes 0 25 build display 0 16 colors 0 35 description 6 13 detach display 0 14 display submenu 0 8 displays list 0 18 hide 0 45 layout 0 43 new display 0 11 new window 0 21 order of windows 0 37 other choices 0 9 position 0 42 properties 0 28 refresh 0 44 settings 0 46 show 0 45 text 0 34 window submenu 0 8 windows dialog 0 23 screen pull down 0 8 screens building 0 4 scroll bar building 6 82 description 6 82 scroll bars turning on and off 5 39 scrollable attribute 0 26 search 5 45 select objects window description 4 4 list format 4 7 name field 4 6 owner field 4 6 scope 4 9 status 4 8 title field 4 6 type field 4 5 select input 10 24 Selec
41. 6 48 check in 8 11 check length attribute 0 27 check out 8 6 child windows groups organizing 6 103 tabbing order setting 6 104 Class concept 1 8 description 1 9 new Class dialog 6 15 properties database related 7 10 Index l 3 class definition definition 7 2 exporting example of 2 44 import 7 8 property 7 8 property of access method 7 14 reverse generating example of 2 43 client building 6 122 Client class creating static instances 6 122 client instance creating 6 124 close knowledge base 3 8 object 5 15 object without saving 5 16 property windows 5 37 close all list editor and screen windows 3 45 properties 5 42 screen property windows 0 48 color background not displayed in 3 D 6 115 background change 6 115 color dialog 6 116 text change 6 115 colors of display windows 0 35 ColumnLB appearance 6 38 attaching to data classes 6 39 building multicolumn list boxes 6 39 columns 6 38 components 6 38 data classes 6 39 formatting 6 42 6 43 instances 6 38 introduction 6 38 ordering columns 6 43 l 4 User s Guide ordering slots 6 43 rows 6 38 slots 6 38 columns ColumnLB 6 38 formatting 6 42 6 43 multicolumn list boxes 6 38 ordering 6 43 represent slots in ColumnLB 6 42 combo box build 6 45 ComboBox see also list items ListBox definition 6 45 command preference 10 41 Commit M ode property AutoCommit 7 42 O nRequest 7 42 commits set
42. 9 13 frames creating for OLE objects 6 93 empty 6 86 6 95 function creating example of 2 25 functions windows adding to 6 97 G go command 9 11 graphic instance link to 6 108 graphical user interface building 6 6 grid activate how to 6 17 command 6 13 description 6 17 GROCERY functions 2 3 introduction 2 2 logic 2 4 menus 2 4 objects 2 4 windows 2 4 GROCERY2 knowledge base 2 21 group box build 6 52 controls including 6 54 definition 6 52 tabbing order of controls 6 54 groups child window order setting 6 105 child windows including 6 105 child windows organizing 6 103 6 105 order children dialog 6 103 groups and instances in screen editor 0 6 GUI application definition 0 2 GUI library 1 11 hidden hidden properties 5 35 open property window 5 35 hide windows and displays 0 45 hierarchy owns 2 13 slots methods 2 14 hot region delete 6 73 mouse pointer displaying in 6 72 new hot region command 6 70 user slot values modifying 6 73 hot regions build 6 70 edit hot region dialog 6 70 H otRegion definition 6 69 use of 6 69 hypertext see on line hdp H help how to access 3 46 icon building 6 79 graphic creating 6 79 icon window see also Icon creating 6 79 definition 6 79 size 6 79 tool palette 6 79 icons button bar 2 6 instances link to 6 108 minimize see minimize icons image instance bitmap icon mouse pointer link to 6 108
43. 9 23 parameter values displaying 9 14 parameters 9 21 pattern matching rules 9 24 pop command 9 11 procedure 9 3 run knowledge base with 9 4 dots 9 21 step into 9 10 Suspend execution 9 8 trace 3 9 debug split 10 41 decimal separator 10 24 10 45 default properties 5 34 delayed rules property 9 13 debugger 9 13 delete knowledge base 3 33 objects 5 17 windows 6 22 deleting libraries 3 15 descendents definition 4 9 D esktopW indow 6 5 detach display 0 14 device type field of window settings dialog 0 46 Device type 0 31 DialogBox see also AskD ialog ShowD ialog definition 6 4 6 29 dialogs AskD ialog 6 29 build 6 29 create how to 6 14 creating example of 2 28 move 6 17 open how to 6 16 resize 6 17 ShowD ialog 6 29 direct manipulation see objects moving and cloning directories list box knowledge base window 3 4 disallow empty list attribute 0 27 disallow unknown attribute 0 27 display command 9 12 displaying instances in other classes 6 38 displays list box new window dialog of 0 22 displays window 0 18 down in jump 5 13 drop down combo box see combo box drop down list combo box see combo box E edit object 2 15 edit hot region command 6 13 edit pull down 5 19 5 43 editing OLE objects in container windows 6 96 in native environments 6 96 editors screen 0 5 effect of assignment property 9 13 embedding Index l 7 and linking 6 87 O
44. Chapter 4 Working with O bject Lists to learn more about how to view instances and objects You cannot change objects while a knowledge base is running Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 11 Running a knowledge base Aborting and restarting knowledge base execution W hat to do gt To aborta running knowledge base quickly for example onein an infinite loop select Run Abort gt To restart knowledge base execution quickly select Run R estart Exception The Restart command is not available in GU AionD S W in 3 12 User s Guide Managing libraries Managing libraries Overview M anaging libraries comprises the following tasks a adding libraries to knowledge bases deleting libraries from knowledge bases updating modified libraries to knowledge bases Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 13 Managing libraries Adding libraries W hat to do 3 14 User s Guide Select File Libraries The M anage Knowledge Base Library List dialog displays Manage Knowledge Base Library List Available Libraries Include Libraries DYNAMIC v0 01 WINLIB GROCERY v0 01 SYBTST v0 01 Remove From the Available Libraries list select the libraries to add by clicking on each You can select more than one library M Tip The Available Libraries list displays the libraries in the AionD S directory To include a library in a knowledge base place the library in the AionDS directory or D PATH Click Add A
45. Checking out new working copies helps ensure that everyone working on the same knowledge base has the most current working copy Use the Compare command to compare change sets to for any conflicts If conflicts exist resolve the conflict depending on the type of conflict involved M anual editing may be required to merge the conflicting changes effectively T he Compare command generates a conflict report that indicates the object properties in conflict To view the actual changed properties print the change sets then browse the generated file To view the original properties open an editor for the objects T his section describes the procedures for determining the order of apply and repairs for the following types of conflicts a two change sets with a single conflict two change sets with multiple conflicts more than two change sets with multiple conflicts To resolve the conflict perform the following steps 1 Determine which change set to apply first At the same time determine the repairs you need to make For more information See D etermining the order of apply and repairs on page 8 24 2 Check out a working copy of the master 3 Apply the change sets that contain the conflict to the working copy Apply them in the order you determined in the first step Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 23 Resolving change set conflicts Determining the order of apply and repairs 8 24 User s Guide 4 Correct the
46. Class Meals Basic Window Styles Group l Tab Stop l Disabled l Invisible No Open List Box Styles IX Extended Select F Multi Select Pointer E e Font User Slots Configure Working with the Window Editor 6 39 Building multi column list boxes 6 40 User s Guide To rename a multi column list box instance enter anew name in the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new multi column list box instance name You can assign the multi column list box instance to another multi column list box subclass by selecting a new class name in the O wning Class fied AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new multi column list box instance name In the Basic Window Styles group you specify the multi column list box as part of a group byselecting the Group check box You can also specify the T ab Stop styles by selecting the T ab Stop check box For more information See the BuildingGUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the List Box Styles group you specify how to select items in the multi column list box Extended Select more than one row by using the mouse with the CTRL and SHIFT keys M ulti Select any number of items on thelist at one time Use the Pointer field to select a mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the multi column list box area For more information See C ha
47. Dish dialog Add Dish Meal Dish Breakfast Lunch Dinner Recipe Coffee Eggs Benedict French Toast Fruit Hash Browns Select your new recipe from the Recipe list box Select a meal time and dish for your new recipe by making a selection from the M eal list box and the Dish list box Click OK 4 Seeif your new recipe has been added to the M enu dialog by selecting M enu O pen Touring AionDS 2 47 Changing the knowledge base 2 48 User s Guide Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level T his chapter describes how to perform functions affecting a knowledge base T o access knowledge base level functions use the File menu This chapter also briefly describes online help In this chapter Topic Page Creating a knowledge base 3 2 O pening a knowledge base 3 5 Saving a knowledge base 3 7 Closing the current knowledge base 3 8 Running a knowledge base 3 9 M anaging libraries 3 13 Importing a knowledge base 3 17 Exporting a knowledge base 3 20 Printing object information 3 21 Browsing afile 3 25 Tracking changes in a knowledge base 3 26 K nowledge base utilities 3 27 Organizing windows with the W indow pull down menu 3 45 AionDS online help 3 46 Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 1 Creating a knowledge base Creating a knowledge base W hat to do To create a knowledge base set the Interface option in the Environment Settings window to Graphical and
48. F4 or PF4 to create windows TEXTEDITINGKEYS displays the current function key assignments for alternate key tables It is only available on the mainframe where there are three tables of function key assignments W hat to do To create a new window in the current Display perform the following steps 1 Select Screen W indow N ew The N ew Window dialog displays New Window Type EEN z Title Displays Recipe Recipe A lt a A 20 User s Guide 2 3 4 5 Building character based applications In theT ype field indicate the window type Click on the arrow to display a list of valid window types Valid window types are those appropriate to the current display For example if the display is attached to a slot you can create prompt windows answer windows and so on H owever if the display is attached to a message you can create message windows but you cannot create prompt or answer windows In the Title field enter a title in the default title location of the window The Displays list box indicates which D isplays the new window will bea part of The Displays available from this list include any that are part of the screen being edited Click OK Reult AionD S creates a window as part of the display you indicated If the Layout window is open it shows this new window as part of the screen The W indows dialog lists the new window For more information See Listing and selecting windo
49. Knowledge Bases 9 5 Run menu summary 9 6 User s Guide Trace Display Application Window Abort Restart Interrupt Calls the AionD S browser to display the current trace file Displays the values of parameters instances and functions local variables Brings the application window to the foreground This command is useful when the AionD S system has covered up the running application T erminates the knowledge base execution and returns control to the AionD S editing environment Aborts the current application and restarts its execution This option is always disabled under Windows Interrupts the running application and forces a breakpoint This option is always disabled under Windows Finding and fixing errors in the knowledge base Finding and fixing errors in the knowledge base To find and fix errors in a knowledge base examine the flow of control and the values generated by different objects U sing the debugger you can suspend knowledge base execution on objects where you suspect errors might occur and step through those objects one statenent at atime You can also examine the execution trace the call stack and the parameter instance and the function values To suspend knowledge base execution on the objects that you think might contain errors set breakpoints at the beginning of the objects A breakpoint is a place in the knowledge base where execution is suspended The O bject editor displ
50. Please select the objects from which you wish to detach displays 2 Inthe Objects list box select the object from which to detach a D isplay A 14 User s Guide Building character based applications 3 Click OK TheD etach dialog displays Please select a display for Class Hello Displays 4 In theD etach dialog there is alist of valid Displays you can detach from the selected object Select one or more displays 5 Click OK Reult Theselected Displays are detached from the selected object Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 15 Building character based applications Building default Displays W hat to do To build adefault display for the current object perform the following steps 1 Select Screen D isplay Build The Build D isplay window displays Build Display Please select the objects for which you wish to build default displays Objects 2 In theObjects list box select the object for which to build a display 3 Click OK Reult AionD S builds the default display based on the object type in the Screen editor AionD S has default displays for the following objects m messages instances parameters m classes a dots m types m groups Caution If the display already contains windows they are deleted before Build adds default windows A 16 User s Guide Building character based applications Listing the Displays in the current screen W hat you
51. S development environment is set to graphical mode 4 Create a knowledge base Select FileN ew The Create Knowledge Base window displays 5 After entering the correct information in the window click N ew Reult The following actions occur AionDS creates a knowledge base Theknowledge base hierarchy window displays a Theentry state W indowO bject class library and DDE class hierarchy are loaded 6 10 User s Guide Creating a knowledge base For more information See Chapter 3 W orking at the Knowledge Base Level for details about the C reate Knowledge Base window Working with the Window Editor 6 11 Opening the Window editor Opening the Window editor Overview To build windows for the knowledge base open the W indow editor Whattodo gt To open the Window editor select Object Scren tt Reult The Window editor Position dialog and tool palette display AionD S adds the Screen pull down menu Tool palette 0 x SELECTION CHECK ocx OLE TOOL BOX CONTROL 6 12 User s Guide P STANDARD m PUSH ove OLE WINDOW BUTTON OBJECT DIALOG HORIZONTAL BOX SCROLL TOOL LABEL VERTICAL m TOOL WINDOW SCROLL SS BAR E B WINDOW LIST BOX m ICON WINDOW GROUP p MULTI COLUMN BITMAP BOX LISTBOX WINDOW RADIO CHECK HOT BUTTON BOX REGION The tool palette consists of buttons you click to create the different windows and controls Opening the Window editor The
52. Screen pull down menu contains the following options Screen pull down menu Option Opens N ew Window N ew W indow dialog to create a new window O pen Window O pen W indow dialog to open an existing window Slots slots dialog of the current window From the slots dialog you can change the attributes of the window M ethods M ethods dialog of the current window From the M ethods dialog you can select a method and add logic for the window M enu Items M enu Items dialog to build menu items Order Children N ew Image O pen Image N ew H ot Region Edit H ot Region Grid Position Install OCX Insert O LE O bject DDE O rder Children dialog to create tabbing sequences and organize groups of child windows N ew Image dialog to create a new image instance O pen Image dialog to display the slots dialog of an existing image N ew Hot Region dialog to create a new hot region instance Edit H ot Region dialog to select the hot region to display Grid dialog to specify the attributes of the grid Position dialog that displays the position and size of the current window Insert O bject dialog to install an OCX control Insert O bject dialog to insert an OLE object dialogs used to build static DDE systems This menu item contains the C onversations Links and T opics submenus Working with the Window Editor 6 13 Creating windows dialogs and controls Creating windows dialogs and controls
53. State st_name Vocabulary vocab_nm In this case you can type either the state choice or the vocabulary choice Braces indicate a required choice List objects State st_name Vocabulary vocab_nm You must type a state choice or a vocabulary choice You must use other characters such as parentheses and angle brackets exactly as specified EOF fparam T he parentheses are required An dllipsis indicates that you can repeat a choice param IS FROM stexpr stexpr stexpr You can repeat stexpr as many times as you want How to Use This Manual XV xvi Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction to AionDS Concepts Introduction T his chapter describes the basic Aion D evelopment System AionD S concepts that you need to understand to develop graphical knowledge bases You can skip this chapter if you are familiar with AionD S on another platform or have attended an AionD S training class In this chapter Topic SS Page AionD S concepts 1 2 Knowledge base structure 1 6 Procedure for building knowledge bases 1 14 Other AionD S features and utilities 1 15 Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 1 AionDS concepts AionDS concepts Overview AionDS isan application building tool and consists of the following actructure for modeling knowledge an inference engine You use AionD S to build knowledge bases A knowledge base is structured information about a specific subject For example i
54. T his option can have one of the following values GRAPHICAL knowledge base should be built and executed to usea graphical user interface GU 1 using the GU class library For moreinformation See the Building GU I Applications Reference to learn more about graphical knowledge bases CHARACTER knowledge base should be built and executed to usea character mode interface For moreinformation See U s s Guide C haracte based for details about character based knowledge bases This field sets the USER INTERFACE profile option Customizing AionDS 10 21 Customizing profiles Display D evice Type Display D evice T ype specifies the kind of terminal that AionD S emulates T he choices are Devicetype Terminal Rows Columns z all any any PC PC any any PC25 PC 25 80 PC 43 PC 43 80 PC 50 PC 50 80 M 3270 any any M2 3270 24 80 M3 3270 32 80 M4 3270 43 80 M5 3270 27 132 For a character based knowledge base you can use the setting to edit all windows of a display with the Screen and W indow Properties editors This setting is not recommended for running knowledge bases Your hardware must support the device you specify This field sets the DEVICE TYPE profile option 10 22 User s Guide Customizing profiles Strings No FileYes FileNo specifies the string to use when AionD S accepts or displays a true Boolean value during user sourcing This field sets the YES ST RING profile option specifies the s
55. The following profile options are valid only when you are editing character based applications Backup M ouse Support Command Preference Password Program Confirm D eete Rerun D ebug Split Rule T ype Edit Interrupt Save D eleted Lines Flush T ypeahead SQ L separators Initial W rap M ode Sorted Export Insert M ode T ab W idth Join At End Value Can C hange K eep Entry M ode 600 Export M atch parenthesis This profile option is also valid when you are editing knowledge bases with a graphical user interface T his profile option is also valid when you are running character based applications BACKUP specifies whether AionD S records user sourced answers during a consultation The ability to back up and rerun a consultation both rely on recorded answers You can specify one of the following values No answers are not recorded Yes answers are recorded If you answer yes AionD S saves answersin memory For very long consultations saving information slows the consultation 10 40 User s Guide Customizing profiles controls the initial command mode for each monitor COMMAND PREFERENCE T his option can have one of the following values COMMAND initial command mode is to put the cursor on the command line initial command mode is to put the cursor in the O ptions menu specifies whether to AionD S to confirm to delete an object before AionD S CONFIRM DELETE removes it ON OFF specifies that AionD
56. U seJump to open an editor quickly for a related object Jumping to another O bject editor does not close the editor from which you jumped TheJump feature lets you view a list of objects related to the active object and edit one of them Related objects You can select from the following relationships Properties The To list box lists U ses objects to which the From object explicitly refers Used By objects in which the From object is referred to explicitly Owns objects which the From object owns This option is available only when a context is in the From field Owned By the context which owns the From _ object 5 12 User s Guide Continued Going to another object Continued Properties The To list box lists Up If the From object is not a state or class objects of the same name and type owned by any context above the From object in the hierarchy If the From object is a state or class objects of the same type above the From object in the knowledge base hierarchy Down If the From object is not a state or class objects of the same name and type owned by any context below the From object in the hierarchy If the From object is a state or class objects of the same type below the From object in the knowledge base hierarchy W hat to do 1 From an active O bject editor select O bject ump TheJump window displays Relation From C Uses cl AekDisleg DialogBox C Used by To E Owns
57. active 5 38 property values accessing OC X 6 91 property windows reorganizing 5 42 push button adding example of 2 37 build 6 74 default setting as 6 76 definition 6 74 Push buttons type of object authorization 5 32 update mode property 7 39 Q QSAM data access class definition property 7 14 data filename property 7 16 data integrity check property 7 17 data location property 7 19 external sourcing property 7 23 load mode property 7 32 mapped slots property 7 33 selection criteria property 7 34 R radio button build 6 48 definition 6 48 use of 6 48 range of values displaying 6 82 read byline graph 4 23 read only attribute 0 26 reads in graph 4 23 refresh screen editor 0 44 region radio buttons of window colors dialog 0 35 registering OCXs 6 89 OLE objects 6 93 Registration D atabase OCXs 6 89 OLE objects 6 93 relation radio buttons jump window 5 13 reload attribute 0 27 replace 5 45 resize title of a display window 0 41 restart 3 12 restrictions libraries 1 3 5 3 reverse generation See class definition rollbacks setting 7 42 unit of work 7 15 7 42 rows ColumnLB 6 38 Index l 17 display instance data in ColumnLB 6 38 multicolumn list boxes 6 38 rule creating example of 2 41 run application window 2 18 display device 3 10 example 2 16 knowledge base 2 17 knowledge base profile 3 10 rerun 3 10 run files settings window 10
58. blue or whatever color you set for this type of text in the operating system The displayed default color means you cannot edit this property until you specialize it To determine if a property is specialized use the O pen Property window in the Specialized list of properties After you select Property Specialize the text in the property window becomes black or whatever color you set for this type of text in the operating system T he object is now specialized and you can change the contents of the property windows Unspecialize To return an object to its original state select U nspecialize from the Open inherited values Property window AionD S removes the specialized input and returns the object to its original unspecialized state 5 40 User s Guide List specialized properties Determining which objects in a class are specialized Editing an object You can toggle back and forth between specialized and unspecialized property contents by repeatedly selecting Property Specialize U nspecialize amp Reminde An asterisk displays after the property name T he change has not been saved you must save the objects to write the changes to the knowledge base In theO pen Property window there are two radio buttons Specialized and U nspecialized Select a radio button to display the specialized or unspecialized properties of the current object To determine which objects in a Class are specialized open the Slot or M e
59. character based knowledge base See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S in the AionD S U ss Guide Characte based manual for details about the Profile monitor The Screen editor used in character based applications is not available in a GUI application You cannot build the screens displayed in a character based application A 2 User s Guide Building character based applications Porting to the mainframe You can port character based knowledge bases developed on the PC to the mainframe For moreinformation See Appendix A Porting Knowledge Bases in the AionD S G eneral Reference for details about porting an application built on thePC to the mainframe Authorizecommand si i i s S S In GUI AionDS there is no Authorize command nor any equivalent to it W hen you import a character based knowledge base any restrictions placed on the knowledge base by the Authorize command are retained but cannot be changed For moreinformation See AionD S U srs Guide Character based Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 3 Building character based applications Procedure for building screens Procedure To build a screen for an object perform the following procedure 1 Open the Screen editor of the object to build a screen LJ For moreinformation See O pening the Screen editor on page A 7 2 Build aD isplay object for that object LJ For moreinformation See Creating ne
60. class or multiple class access methods Since a class can have only one assigned access method define multiple classes to access different databases T he previous figure shows the following access method configurations 1 one class one access method one database 2 multiple classes multiple access methods multiple databases 3 multiple classes one inherited access method one database 4 multiple classes multiple specialized access methods multiple databases Configuration 1 shows one class inheriting one access method T he class has access to the database Configuration 2 shows multiple classes Each class has one access method and accesses one database Working with External Databases 7 3 Access method configuration Configuration 3 shows two Classes inheriting access methods from the parent class T he two classes have access to the single database If more than one database exists the classes can be dedicated to different databases Configuration 4 shows a parent class with NONE specified in the Access M ethod property Each subclass is dedicated to a different database and requires a different access method Subclasses cannot use a different access method than the parent class If the subclasses require different access methods do not specify an access method for the parent class Access methods at T he following figure shows the Access M ethod and its relationship to runtime AionDS at runtime Required defin
61. dialogs and controls first open the W indow editor To build new windows you use Feature Function New Window creating new windows dialogs and controls dialog OR tool palette Slots dialog customizing each window dialog and control mouse OR adjusting the window dialog and controls to the desired size cursor keys You can build the following controls label windows text windows list boxes column list boxes combo boxes push buttons radio buttons check boxes group boxes tool bars tools scroll bars pull down menus bitmap windows hot regions icon windows OCX controls OLE objects Working with the Window Editor 6 7 Procedure for building the graphical user interface 6 8 User s Guide Each window s slots dialog contains attributes you can modify Although each window dialog and control has its own unique slots dialog many attributes are the same In the slots dialog for each window dialog and control you can customize most of the following attributes instance name owning class title or text displayed in the window dialog or control window dialog or control styles user slot values parameters slots and messages attached to windows dialogs or controls mouse pointers minimize icons You can add customized logic to the following controls list boxes multi column list boxes combo boxes push buttons radio buttons check boxes tools icon window hot region scroll bars
62. existing file select the file and make sure that the Append to file check box is not selected 8 To append thechange sets to an existing file select the file and click Append to file check box Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 15 Change Management menu commands 9 Tochangetheorder in which the changed object information is printed click Sort The Sort window displays W hen you complete changing the sort attributes click OK to return to the Print window 10 To perform any of the following tasks click Format The Print Format window displays Enter header and footer text that appears on each page Change the page width and the page length a Indicate the printer type Compress the output into as few lines as possible Add an index to the end of the printout m Add atableof contents to the end of the printout Add an extended table of contents containing entries for all objects to the end of the printout Add a summary of all the objects printed to the end of the printout W hen you complete changing the print format attributes click OK to return to the Print window 11 Click Print 8 16 User s Guide Change Management menu commands Starting Change Management Enable W hat to do To enable Change M anagement perform one of the following steps a Select FileC hange M anagenent Check Out When you build a working copy Change M anagement is enabled in the working copy automatically a Select Fil
63. ext and attributes for the new menu item 3 Click Append Working with the Window Editor 6 57 Building pull down menus 6 58 User s Guide Reult Thenew menu item is placed after the selected menu item Inserting a menu item before another one t S 1 Toinsert a menu item before another one enter the desired attributes of the menu item 2 IntheM enu Item List select the menu item before which to place the new menu item 3 Click Insert Reult Thenew menu item is placed after the selected menu item Creating separator lines ssts S 1 To create a separator line a line that separates groups of menu itemsin a pull down menu select the menu item below which to place the separator line 2 Ente the instance name for the separator and check the Separator check box 3 Click Append Reult A separator menu item is placed after the selected menu item Deetingamenuitm j 1 Select the menu item to delete 2 Click Delete Reult AionD S deletes the specified menu item D eleting all menu items gt To deete all menu items click D elete All Creating tool bars Creating tool bars Example H orizontal toolbar D efault Floating toolbar W hat to do 1 Create and resize a tool bar 2 Doubleclick on the tool bar TheT ool bar Slots dialog displays Working with the Window Editor 6 59 Creating tool bars 6 60 User s Guide Toolbar Slots Instance Name ftest2 Owning Class ToolBar
64. field in the window slots dialog select the icon instance to display when the window is minimized in the Icon field 3 Click OK 6 114 User s Guide Changing window background and text colors Changing window background and text colors Overview Use the Select Background and Foreground Colors dialog to define a background or text foreground color of a window 3 D restrictions If you display windows in 3 D at runtime the background color defaults to gray If you change the background default color in the Select Background and Foreground Colors dialog turn off the 3 D option in the D isplay Settings dialog Uncheck At run timein the U se 3 D controls group to display that color at runtime For more information See Building GUI Applications Reference to learn more about the 3 D option Available container You can define background and some text foreground colors for most colors containers Container Background colors Text colors Ask Dialog yes no Dialog Box yes no Show Dialog yes no Standard Window yes _no Working with the Window Editor 6 115 Changing window background and text colors Available control Background and text foreground colors are available for most controls colors Control Background colors Text colors Bitmap Window yes no Check Box yes yes ColumnLB yes yes Combo Box yes yes Group Box yes yes Icon Window no no Label Window yes yes List Box yes yes OLE Control no no OL
65. following steps 1 Select from the Screen W indow Properties T he Window Properties dialog displays 2 Change the text of the title in the Window Properties window A 40 User s Guide Building character based applications Displaying the Window Position dialog Overview T he Window Position dialog shows you the position of the mouse cursor in the Layout window and the size and position of the currently selected window Whattodo gt Display the W indow Position dialogbysdecting Screen W indow Position Reult TheW indow Postion dialog displays Window Position Mouse 2 31 row col 5 14 depth width 8 50 Title 4 14 Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 41 Building character based applications Displaying the Layout window W hat to do gt Selecting Screen Layout Reult The Layout window displays W hat you see The Layout window shows the appearance of the windows of all of the Displays that are attached to the object the Screen editor is associated with T he example Layout window shown in the following example is from the Screen editor for a Group called GROUP1 GROUP1 has members PARAM 1 and PARAM 2 and their attached displays The Display object PARAM 1 is attached to parameter PARAM 1 and ownsthe PROM PT 1 window The Display object PARAM 2 is attached to PARAM 2 and owns the PROM PT 2 window PROMPT 1 PROMPT A 42 User s Guide Building charact
66. interface property AionDS AIX AionD S AIX uses the following Interface property values to access the corresponding databases Interface property value Database accessed IBM IBM DB2 6000 Informix Informix ODBC use the O pen D atabase C onnectivity ODBC interface to connect to any ODBC compliant database Oracle Oracle Sybase M icrosoft Sybase SQL Server 4 X 10 X 7 26 User s Guide Properties available in the class AionD S H P U X AionD S H P U X uses the following Interface property values to access the corresponding databases Interface property value Database accessed IBM IBM DB2 6000 Informix Informix ODBC use the O pen D atabase C onnectivity ODBC interface to connect to any O DBC compliant database Oracle Oracle Sybase M icrosoft Sybase SQL Server 4 x 10 x AionD S MVS AionD S M VS uses the following Interface property values to access the corresponding databases Interface property value Database accessed DB2 IBM Database 2 D B2 dbc 1012 Teradata D BC 1012 Oracle Oracle Working with External Databases 7 27 Properties available in the class AionD S O S2 AionD S O S2 uses the following Interface property values to access the corresponding databases Interface property value Database accessed DB2 IBM DB 2 IBM IBM DB2 2 Informix Informix ODBC use the O pen D atabase C onnectivity ODBC interface to connect to any ODBC compliant database Oracle Ora
67. items that are not displayed in the list You usually use a combo box when users will probably choose an existing option but might create a new one You can also use a drop down combo box because it takes up less window space than a list box W hat to do 1 Create and resize a combo box 2 Doubleclick on the combo box The Combo Box Slots dialog displays Working with the Window Editor 6 45 Building combo boxes 6 46 User s Guide Combo Box Slots Instance Name test Owning Class ComboBox Basic Window Styles Group IX Tab Stop Disabled Invisible No Open Combo Box Styles l Sort List Box Combo Box Type Simple C Drop Down C Drop Down List Pointer Font User Slots 3 To renamea combo box instance enter anew namein the Instance Name field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new combo box window instance name You can assign a combo box instance to another combo box subclass by selecting anew subclass name in the O wning Class field AionDS automatically updates parent and child links with the new combo box instance name In the Basic W indow Styles group you can specify the combo box as part of agroup by checking Group You can also specify the T ab Stop styles for the combo box by checking T ab Stop 10 11 12 Building combo boxes For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for detail
68. line the directory from which you start AionD S m from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionDS in its program group To select a directory name from the D irectories list box double click on the directory name All Knowledge bases in the selected directory display in the K nowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base F Note Read only access does not apply to deleting knowledge bases Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 35 Knowledge base utilities Moving a knowledge base W hat to do To move a knowledge base 1 Select File Utilities M ove The M ove Knowledge Base window displays Move Knowledge Dase Please specify where to move the knowledge base Name Version fom Knowledge Gases p Headoniy acocss 2 Ente the destination knowledge base path name and version If the knowledge base is unique to its directory you can let the version number default to the current version number or enter a new version number If the knowledge base name exists in the destination directory you must change the knowledge base name or give it a unique version number or both 3 After entering the information click M ove If you are overwriting the same knowledge base an error message displays You cannot movea knowledge base onto itself 3 36 User s Guide Name field Current path Knowledge Bases and Directories li
69. links with the new push button instance name In the Window Styles group you can specify a push button as part of a group by selecting the Group check box You can also specify the T ab Stop style by selecting the T ab Stop check box Working with the Window Editor 6 75 Building push buttons For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles 6 In the Push Button T ype group you can select a textual or a graphical push button 7 If you select a text push button you can change the text on the push button by using the T ext window in the T ext Push Button Attributes group You can enter a mnemonic with the text The text push button is the default push button Push Button Type Text Push Button C Graphic Push Button Text Push Button Attributes x D it Push Button Text AionDS For moreinformation See Adding mnemonics to controls on page 6 106 Caution You can have only one default push button in a window 8 Ifyou select a graphic push button in the Push Button T ype group the Graphic Push Button Attributes group box displays 6 76 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 Building push buttons Push Button Type Text Push Button Graphic Push Button Graphic Push Button Attributes X Stretch Image Image EErEE earth Bitmap hand Bitmap plat platinum sfox3 Bitmap Pointer Sel
70. list all objects starting with the letters st To list objects ending with TRX enter TRX A Reminder The N amefield is not case sensitive so Trx is the same as trx Leaving the N ame field empty is equivalent to typing in the field U sthe O wne field to indicate the name of the context that owns all objects placed in the O bject List window The owner you specify is used in conjunction with the Scope radio buttons to indicate how to constrain the list of objects Use the Title field to give the O bject List window atitle With a useful name in the object list title bar you can identify collections of objects quickly when you have more than one collection open T he default title bar for an O bject List window is the format of the O bject List window For example the default title bar for an O bject List window by icon is Object List Icon Selecting objects for an Object List window T he following five List Format radio buttons indicate the format of the List Format radio buttons O bject List window icons names details a hierarchy graph Objects as icons In an O bject List window objects display as the following icons State Class Pb Method Function O Slot Parameter Vocabulary Message E Rule I Instance E Type Process Graph Report Group Display Work with Object Lists 4 7 Selecting objects for an Object List window Status check boxes You can spe
71. mark hap icon inthe from alist of common tasks button bar the H elp pull down select H elp from the choose from the help options menu bar displayed in the menu 3 46 User s Guide Chapter 4 Working with Object Lists T his chapter shows you how to view and manipulate knowledge base objects through O bject List windows An Object List window displays collections of knowledge base objects selected according to your criteria When you open a knowledge base the first O bject List window displayed is the knowledge base Introduction In this chapter hierarchy window Inthischaptr Tope E SSC Object listing actions 4 2 Selecting objects for an O bject List window 4 3 Object listing by icon 4 14 Object listing by name 4 15 Object listing by detail 4 16 O bject listing by hierarchy 4 18 O bject listing by graph 4 22 Changing the format of an O bject List window 4 28 Collecting objects into another O bject List window 4 29 Work with Object Lists 4 1 Object listing actions Object listing actions Summary Use the following two options in the O bject pull down menu to control creation of O bject List windows Option Function List opens an O bject List window Selecting List displays the Select O bjects window From the Select O bjects window you can select the type of objects to display in the O bject List window Collect opens an O bject List window containing objects selected from another Object List
72. meal and day add dishes to a meal list and display and print the shopping list a the M enu Open Sdection dialog box from which you select the day and meal a adialog for each day and meal from which you select the dishes a theAdd Dishes dialog box from which you can add dishes to each meal list a the Shopping List dialog box that displays the shopping list Starting AionDS Starting AionDS Result When you first start AionD S the primary window opens T he primary window shown in the following figure displays AionD S in its title bar All knowledge base development takes place within a primary window Use the primary window to tell AionD S what to do AionDS EYERYMAN v0 01 AGS Edit Object Settings Window Yiew Help Knowledge Base Hierarchy X lt rs i 3 lt Close Title Bar Save Run Menu Bar lv Libraries LET Pull down menu Export Print s Change Mgmt ppleContro Al Utilities Mind Browse Register OCX ndardi Unregister OCX Exit Button bar Message bar DRET Create a new knowledge base M Tip When a knowledge base is open the words AionD S and the name and version of the current knowledge base display in the title bar Menu bar Below the title bar is the menu bar which provides you with a selection of actions you can take Click any menu bar entry or press ALT and the underlined l
73. or ID M S DC region limiting access using a data communications link T o access data remotely you need the AionD S Cooperative Processing Option You can run a knowledge base in AionD S CICS or AionD S IM S to access data remotely For moreinformation See Appendix A Porting Knowledge Bases in the General Reference for details about porting knowledge bases from the PC to the mainframe VSAM and SQL Knowledge bases can access VSAM D B2 and DL I databases from AionD S CICS Knowledge bases also can access D B2 and D L I databases locally or remotely from AionD S IM S When running a knowledge base through CICS or IM S transaction drivers AAES and AIONADS a connection to the M AES region is made and with certain access methods you can specify whether data access is local or remote For example for a Working with External Databases 7 19 Properties available in the class CICS transaction with VSAM access specified you can access the VSAM file locally either within the M AES address space or remotely within CICS For moreinformation Seethel O Reference to learn about local and remote access AionD S CICS and IMS T he following figure shows the relationship between AionD S and the other componentsin CICS and IM S environments CICS VTAM Link Local requests use a memory to memory protocol and do not require VT AM services Local requests do not synchronize data access with CICS or IMS message traff
74. other knowledge bases you might need to modify the knowledge bases in which the library is included to accommodate your changes To cut an object select Edit Cut object Cut object removes the selected object or objects to the clipboard Alternative Select the cut button from the button bar AionD S displays the Cut window Usethis window to confirm the selected object to cut Usethe list box in this window to deselect an object To copy an object select Edit Copy object T his copies the selected object or objects into the clipboard AionD S displays the Copy window Use this window to confirm the selected objects to copy Usethe list box in this window to deselect an object M Tip Depending on the current selection the cut copy and paste actionsin the Edit pull down menu change If you select a knowledge base object the Edit menu has a Cut object choice If you select text the Edit menu has a Cut text Copy text or D elete text choice If the knowledge base object or objects are contexts the Include subtrees check box is available Check Include subtrees to place all contexts below the selected context in the clipboard 4 Select an object to be the parent of the knowledge base object Working with Objects 5 19 Cutting and pasting objects 5 Select Edit Paste Alternative Select the paste button the glue bottle icon from the button bar AionD S displays the Paste window 6 If theselected object is a
75. pdate M odeto display the U pdate M ode property Select Automatic 5 Select D atabase E xport definition to create the external database file 2 44 User s Guide Changing the knowledge base Saving and closing all open editors W hat to do 1 Tocloseall open editors select them and press F8 2 Save the knowledge base to disk by selecting File Save or selecting D isk on the button bar M Tip If parsing errors occur check the message bar for more information Touring AionDS 2 45 Changing the knowledge base Testing the new knowledge base Overview T his section covers testing your new changes Always test a knowledge base after making major changes to it If the knowledge base does not execute as expected or even terminates abnormally use the debugger to identify and solve the problem For more information See Chapter 3 Working at the K nowledge Base Level for instructions on running the knowledge base with the debugger W hat to do 1 Run the knowledge base by selecting FileRun 2 Create anew recipe by selecting RecipeN ew The Recipe dialog displays Recipe Name Ingredients Needed English Muffins Coffee Fruit Tea Juice Enter anew recipe namein the Recipe N ame field and select required ingredients from the Ingredients N eeded list box Click OK 2 46 User s Guide Changing the knowledge base 3 Add thenew recipe as a meal in the M enu dialog Select M enu AddD ish to display the Add
76. pull down menus OCX controls For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications T utorial and Building GUI Applications Reference for details about windows dialogs and controls Procedure for building the graphical user interface To build anew window or dialog and add controls W hat to do 1 2 3 4 oa Open the Window editor Create a new window or dialog Customize the window or dialog using the slots dialog Use the mouse or cursor keys to adjust the window or dialog to the desired size Add controls to the window and adjust the controls to the desired size Customize the controls using the slots dialog Add logic to the controls For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 9 Creating a knowledge base Creating a knowledge base Overview To create a knowledge base with a graphical user interface set the AionDS development environment to graphical W hat to do 1 Select Settings Environment The Environment Settings window displays Environment Settings Comparison Tolerance 0 0000000000 Interface GRAPHICAL Display Device Type Pc25 Strings Masks Input ae E Date Unknown Unknown a Time Select s E Separators File Yes T File Date Decimal f File No F File Time Thousands f 2 Specify graphical in the Interface field 3 Click Set Reult TheAionD
77. see To list the Displays in the current screen gt Select Screen D isplay List Reult The Displays window displays T he Displays window shows the names of the D isplays used in the current Screen editor It also shows the names of the objects that are part of the screen being edited Displays p ipa pad Main pa Main papal Main pal Main T he example Displays window is for a Group called GROUP1 GROUP1 has two parameters and their attached D isplays as members PA1 and PA2 The Display object PA1 is attached to parameter PA1 and the Display object PA2 is attached to PA2 Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 17 Building character based applications Creating new windows Overview To create a new window specify the type of window its title and D isplays of which it should be a part W indows types are the following Window types Window Function ANSWER BROWSE BROWSEFILE CERTAINTY CHOICES COMMAND LINE CONFIRM MENU CONSTRAINT DESCRIPTION EXPLAIN FUNCTION KEYS retrieves an answer to the prompt displays a system file such as a trace file during runtime displays the file specified in the File N ame property of a message displays certainty information if any displays choices if any used to enter commands holds the choices for the Abort question displays constraints on property values holds a description for the E
78. side of the field lines display on the bottom an outline displays only at the top of the window lines display on the top and bottom of the field a line displays on the left side of the field no lines display around the fidd lines display on the top and the left and right sides of the field lines display on the top bottom and right side of the field lines display on the top bottom and left side of the field lines display on the bottom and left and right sides of the fidd aline displays on the right side of the field lines display on the top and left side of the field a line displays on the top of the field lines display on the top and the right side of the field no lines display around the field but the fidd within the window is underlined lines display on the left and right sides of the field Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 29 Building character based applications Device Purpose tits T he D evice field specifies the type of monitor on which this window displays The default is an asterisk Valid values T he table below lists the D evice specifications the terminals to which they apply and the number of rows and columns in each Device Terminal Rows Columns Descriptions the window displays on every Al Any ADY monitor or terminal the window displays on any PC PC PC Any Any monitor the window displays only on poze APE A a monitors supporting 25 lines and 80
79. state 5 52 See entry state libraries including with 1 3 M anage K nowledge Base Library List dialog 3 14 managing libraries 3 13 M apped slots property of access method 7 33 matches property 9 13 menu bar defined 2 5 menu item see also separator lines adding example of 2 22 Index I 11 append 6 57 build 6 55 change 6 57 definition 6 55 deleting 6 58 insert 6 58 menu items command 6 13 menu selections creating 6 57 message bar customizing 10 6 defined 2 6 message boxes see also ShowD ialog see also DialogBox messages windows attaching 6 99 method creating example of 2 25 methods command 6 13 definition 1 9 methods dialog 6 97 windows adding to 6 97 methods dialog displaying 6 97 minimize icons create 6 114 mnemonics controls adding 6 106 group boxes for 6 107 label windows for 6 106 supported for OCX 6 92 modified open property window 5 35 option of status 4 8 M onitors and facilities screen editor 0 5 mouse pointer l 12 User s Guide change shape 6 113 graphic file create 6 113 hot region displaying in 6 72 mouse pointers instances link to 6 108 mouse support 10 44 move knowledge base 3 36 title of a display window 0 40 multicolumn list boxes appearance 6 38 building 6 39 columns 6 38 components 6 38 example 6 38 formatting 6 42 6 43 instances 6 38 ordering columns 6 43 ordering slots 6 43 rows 6 38 dots 6 38 updat
80. the change in the second change set includes the change from the first change set T his case is common Apply the second change set after applying the first N o repairs are necessary Resolving change set conflicts T he changes from both change sets are required T his is the case when two people inadvertently modified the same property and both changes should be made to the master This can also be the case if you do not apply change sets that exist in the master when you check out your working copy Theorder of apply does not matter The repair that must be made is contained in the first change set It isa copy of the change that you made to the object that has the conflict Two change sets with multiple conflicts If more than one conflict exists one of the following conditions exists All changes in the second change set should overlay the changes from the first change set This is similar to the first case listed above Apply the second change set after applying the first N o repairs are necessary It is likely that some changes from each change set are required Examine the change sets to determine which contains the fewer required changes This isthe change set you should apply first If all changes from both change sets are required in the master order is not important In this case the repair is contained in the change set you apply first It is a copy of the change made to the objects that have conflicts More th
81. the knowledge base 8 In the Agenda window enter the following Update the RecipeValueList forwardchain DishDlg ResetRecipeValueList 9 Save the state by pressing F8 See the new state icon U pdateR ecipeV alueList displayed in the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window Knowledge Base Hierarchy a fPGROCERY2 A hun f Cra ta EhoppingUst E Miish iadogBo BG rocery Standard Window ngodor Ew 10 Add arule asa child of the U pdateR ecipeV alueList state Select the U pdateR ecipeV alueList state in the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window Select O bject N ew to display the N ew O bject dialog Type Owner UpdateRecipe alueList J Open object Touring AionDS 2 41 Changing the knowledge base Enter rule in the T ype field and the name of the rule in the N ame field Click New The U pdateR ecipevV aluel ist state displays in the O wner field because it was already selected in the knowledge base hierarchy window The Rule editor displays Rule UpdateRecipeValueList UpdateRecipeValueList ia Rule Definition Enter the following statements in the Rule D efinition property Update RecipeValueList by adding to it y Selection Values that are not already f included E ifmatch Recipe with not RecipeValueList includes Recipe Name then add Recipe Name to RecipeValueList end 11 Save the rule by pressing F8 2 42 User s Guide Changing the kno
82. the master 2 Copy and apply the out of synch working copy s change set to the new working copy 3 Delete the out of sync working copy M ake your changes to the new working copy 5 When you complete your changes check both the out of sync and current change sets into the master 8 20 User s Guide Integrating change sets before applying them to the master Integrating change sets before applying them to the master Copying cutting pasting and deleting change sets What to do Verify changes made to individual change sets before applying them to the master Also verify the combination of the various change sets affected before applying them to the master To verify that no conflicts exist between change sets copy and paste all change sets to one working copy and apply them For example developers A and B complete and test their changes D eveloper A wants to verify the combination of changes before incorporating any change sets into the master The change set from D eveloper B s knowledge base is copied and pasted into D eveloper A s knowledge base and applied Developer A can verify the end result before making updates to the master If conflicts between the two change sets exist D eveloper A can correct the situation in athird change set and check it into the master You can copy cut paste and delete C hange Sets just like other objects T his is helpful when you need to includein your working copy the changes made
83. the same time For example an AionD S knowledge base may manage stock portfolios This knowledge base could request stock prices from an application with direct access to several stock exchanges T his section describes building static client and server applications a Static client and server applications are built at edit time U se static conversations at edit time when the servers and topics are known You need to know what kind of data the end user wants and from which application U s static data items when the data is known at edit time The knowledge base objects necessary to create data items must be static and internal m Dynamic client and server applications are built at runtime If the data resides in a database dynamically create the data items For moreinformation See BuildingGUI Applications Reference to learn how to build dynamic client and server applications 6 120 User s Guide DD EO bject class hierarchy Building a DDE system To set up your knowledge base as a client application use the Client class and Link class You can also create subclasses of Client and Link and use these To set up your knowledge base as a server use the T opic class or define a subclass of T opic TheD DEO bject class hierarchy contains the following classes T im ja m i Working with the Window Editor 6 121 Building a DDE system AionDS as the client Creating client conversation instances W hat to do
84. to edit or delete existing Link instances 1 To edita link select the link name and click Edit Link The Edit Link dialog displays 2 TheEdit Link dialog contains exactly the same fields as the N ew Link dialog Change the desired fields and click OK Reult Thelink fields change and you return to the Link dialog 1 To deletea link select the link name and click D elete Link A confirmation window displays 2 Click Delete to delete the link Reult Thelink is deleted and you are returned to the Links dialog 3 Click Cance to cancel the deletion Reult Thelink isnot deleted and you are returned to the Links dialog 6 128 User s Guide Building a DDE system Building AionDS as the server Linking data Creating topics and data items To makeAionD S the server organize the client application information by creating topic classes with data item instances Topic classes contain data item instances Dataitem instances identify the knowledge base objects containing data values requested by a client application A data item does not contain the actual data but the name the client application uses to request the data and a pointer to the knowledge base object containing the data You do not need to define a user interface for data that AionD S provides to a client application You do not have to link the data items in DD EO bject to the windows in the W indowO bject class H owever a server application must have at least one wi
85. to include in the object list Selecting Any When you first open the Select O bjects window the default selection in the Type field is any Any indicates that the object list contains objects of any type that match the other specifications in this window If you select any the object list is not constrained by the type of knowledge base object To constrain the types of objects to include in the O bject List window select a type from the T ypes list box Selecting a ingle object type ttst S Enter the full name of the object category or enough of the first few letters usually two to indicate a unique object category You can also select an object category from the drop down list Work with Object Lists 4 5 Selecting objects for an Object List window Name field Title field 4 6 User s Guide Selecting more than one object type You can enter any type of object Separate each object category with a space The field scrolls horizontally to 255 characters if you need more room To select more than one type of object to list enter the full name of the object or enter enough letters to indicate a unique object type For example use M D for method M E for message or IN for instance Thisis an optional field UsetheN ame field to enter the name of the knowledge base object or objects to list To list anumber of objects with similar names use the asterisk as a wild card For example enter st in the N ame field to
86. to the group box click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 In the Title field change the text to the name to be displayed at the top of the group box You can also add a mnemonic to a group box title For more information See the Adding mnemonics to controls on page 6 106 Working with the Window Editor 6 53 Building group boxes 6 54 User s Guide 10 In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the group box For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 11 Click Back Color to change the color of the background within the group box For moreinformation See Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 12 Click Text Color to change the color of the text displayed in the group box For more information See the Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 13 To modify the values of slots owned by the group box s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 14 Click OK The changes are applied and the group box displays Including controls in a group box To include controls in a group box 1 Build a group box 2 Build the contro
87. valid owner for the objects in the clipboard the Target O wne field contains the object s name If the selected owner is not a valid owner for the objects in the clipboard the T arget O wner field is blank Enter a valid parent from the drop down list in the T arget Owner field If the name is already in us in that context AionD S prompts you for a new object name 7 If you check Open object list AionD S displays a Collect O bjects window with the target object in the O wner field Thislets you open anew O bject List window for the pasted objects For moreinformation See Chapter 4 Working with O bject Lists for a description of O bject List windows and the Select O bjects window 5 20 User s Guide Cutting and pasting between knowledge bases Cutting and pasting between knowledge bases Pasting the same information into several knowledge bases When is information in the clipboard discarded You can cut and paste knowledge bases attached library text or objects between knowledge bases T he contents of the clipboard remain after you close a Knowledge base You can cut text objects or windows from one knowledge base close the knowledge base and open another then copy clipboard contents to the open Knowledge base Caution Library objects can own other objects in a knowledge base Cutting library objects may produce unexpected results in the knowledge bases in which the library objects are included From
88. window usually displays possible actions in drop down menus You must make a subclass of the WIN LIB StandardW indow class in the knowledge base before creating instances W hat to do 1 Subclass the standard window 2 Resizeand position the new window Working with the Window Editor 6 23 Building standard windows 3 Doubleclick on the standard window The Standard W indow Slots dialog displays Standard Window Slots Instance Name example Owning Class AionDS Anitial State Basic Window Styles s Son I Disabled I Invisible Maximized F No Open C Minimized Standard Window Styles I Border X Maximize Button l No System Debug r Di ee X Minimize Button T No System Explain Seta X System Menu l No System Trace X Size Border Delete On Close T No System Unknown X Title Bar l No System Abort l No System Paste Delete Link Text Source Title Plain Text leane op e O TSL i C Attached Object Pointer 4 Torenamethe window instance enter a new name in the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new window instance name 5 You can assign a window instance to another class or subclass by typing a new class name in the O wning Class Field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new window instance name 6 Inthelnitial State group specify how to display the window when opened 7 Inthe Basic Window Styles group
89. you apply the change set to your working copy before making changes it will contain the new rule text Then if you modify the same rule you will be making a change from the new rule text and not the old When the change sets are applied to the master your change will not overwrite the change contained in the other change set M T ip Select multiple change sets from the C hange Set list for a single Apply command they are applied in order listed one by one each in its entirety T his is usually the most efficient method of applying change sets as long as they have been checked for conflicts Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 19 Updating out of sync working copies with the new master Updating out of sync working copies with the new master Overview Optimally all outstanding change sets are applied to the old master at the same time and each person checks out a new working copy to make more changes All working copies are synchronized with the new master Sometimes a working copy s change set is not checked into the old master when the checked in change sets are applied to the old master Consequently this working copy is out of sync with the new master To prevent integration problems when you work on an out of sync working copy update the out of sync working copy with the new master W hat to do To integrate the out of sync working copy complete the following steps 1 Check out anew working copy from the latest version of
90. 10 eeeeeecccececeneee eee e teeta etter eee eeecaeee tees eettecaeeeeeeeeteecaaeeeeeeeeeneee 7 15 Data File Name dBASE QSAM and VSAM only 7 16 Data Integrity Check cccccceecceecee eee e eee eetnee eee t eee aaeee ee eeccaaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneee 7 17 Dat asEO CAO tt nae a ek et ee ee ee ea 7 19 Database SQL OMnly ccceccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeetenaaeeeeees 7 22 Table of Contents vii Chapter 8 External Source SpecifiCation ccccccccsecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeees 7 23 Index File Names dBASE only eccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeneaaaes 7 24 Index File Specification 2 2 2 cee cc ceceeeeeccee cece eeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeaaaes 7 25 Interface SQL Only aeie a a a a Aa r ED cd eauteacteaed 7 26 Key FIGIAS sss sssceteciaealeaize0t nnan ane aa AAA REEERE NERENS 7 30 Load ModE a a aa a aee 7 32 MEV alol 1o ke l6 EEPE A E 7 33 Selection Criteria a aaar aaaea aa aaa potest ete aetee edd ned ete 7 34 SQL Select SQL ONI tess savsssseecnensanacies vanes ane anatase aaa 7 37 Table Name SQE ONIY oaia ei raen srein aas aatra aaa aa Naaa ARA aR AAEN 7 38 Ufore EIE MN Loo EEEE EEEE EET ET 7 39 Setting SQL commits and rollbacks 000 ceeeeeeeeececenee cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeenaaaes 7 42 Setting up SQL error handling ssssssesssssssssesessrrresnsrrnrstenirnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnssennnn 7 43 Track Chang
91. 10 Usethe mouse to reposition and resize a H ot Region 11 Doubleclick on the H ot Region TheH ot Region Slots dialog displays Working with the Window Editor 6 71 Creating and editing hot regions 6 72 User s Guide 12 13 14 15 Hot Region Slots Instance Name image Owning Class HotRegion Hot Region Styles Disabled l Invisible Border l Invert When Selected l No Open Pointer e User Slots TheH ot Region instance name displays in the Instance N ame field To change the instance name type over the current name T he parent class of the H ot Region instance displays in the O wning class field To changethe parent class select a different one In the H ot Region Styles group specify whether the H ot Region has visible borders whether there is a visible response to mouse clicks and so on For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the H ot Region For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 Creating and editing hot regions 16 To modify the values of slots owned by the H ot Region s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 17 Click OK Reult AionD S applies th
92. 2 mapped slots property 7 33 selection criteria property 7 34 table name property 7 38 update mode property 7 39 SQL interface profile ODBC 10 26 standard windows build 6 23 StandardW indow definition 6 4 6 23 use of 6 23 6 29 state 1 8 state independent creating example of 2 40 states description 1 9 libraries in 1 3 status group select objects window 4 8 step into command 9 10 stop change management 8 18 StoragelD slot OleO bject class 6 86 6 88 store answers 0 51 styles D efault PushButton in OC Xs 6 92 subclassing contexts 1 8 reasons 2 29 top level windows 6 15 Support unavailable in AionD S 2 6 86 Suspend execution debugger 9 8 syntax error 5 15 system settings customizing 10 35 l 20 User s Guide system settings window 10 35 T tab stops defining 6 104 tabbing order order children dialog 6 103 setting 6 104 tab stops 6 104 tabbing to O CXs 6 92 T able name property of access method 7 38 text cut and paste 5 43 text color change 6 115 text window adding example of 2 32 text windows build 6 33 T extW indow see also ComboBox definition 6 33 TSL using 10 5 use of 6 33 tile list editor and screen windows 3 45 property windows 5 42 screen property windows 0 48 time values displaying 6 82 title knowledge base for 3 41 of a display window 0 40 property of window properties editor 0 33 title bar 2 5 title field new window dialog
93. 29 interface option 10 21 load all states system setting 10 38 loading 10 15 loading automatically 10 15 loading manually 10 16 log file setting 10 31 no strings option 10 23 print file setting 10 32 print page length system setting 10 37 print page width system setting 10 37 saving 10 18 show program setting 10 34 I 16 User s Guide swapper threshold system setting 10 37 thousands separator 10 24 10 45 time mask option 10 23 trace file setting 10 32 trace include timing values 10 29 trace level 10 28 trace width 10 28 unknown input option 10 24 user name system setting 10 35 v5 10 emulation 10 30 yes strings option 10 23 PROFSYS ADS 10 15 prompts see AskD ialog D ialogBox properties access string 7 11 accessing values 6 91 alternate filename 7 12 alternate key field 7 13 and dots or stylesin O CX 6 91 change sets 8 9 Class definition 7 14 data filename 7 16 data integrity check 7 17 data location 7 19 database 7 22 device type 0 31 external sourcing 7 23 fidd name 0 32 index file names 7 24 key fields 7 30 link code 0 32 load mode 7 32 mapped slots 7 33 outline 0 29 selection criteria 7 34 table name 7 38 title 0 33 update mode 7 39 window type 0 29 properties object definition 1 9 property defaults 5 34 determining if changed 5 25 inherited 5 40 opening 5 35 property pull down 5 33 window name considerations 5 36 windows making
94. 5 40 Reorganizing the property windows in an object editor cccccccceeeeeeeeeees 5 42 Cutting and pasting text c cc ci iii i eden nde 5 43 Cutting and pasting text between applications ccccccsessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesessensaeeeees 5 44 Searching for and replacing text cc cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeecaaeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeessaaaes 5 45 Exporting objects to external files ce ceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeesnaaeees 5 47 Importing objects from external filOS eee cc eee ceeneee eee eeecceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeesaaaes 5 49 Printing Selected objects cccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeenneeas 5 50 Making a state the entry State ccc cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeetseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 52 Table of Contents v Chapter 6 Work with the Window Editor OVEIVICW anana iio icin sisi n a aeett tint tite anne a 6 4 Procedure for building the graphical user interface cccccsceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetaeeeeees 6 6 Procedure for building new windows dialogs and Controls eeeeeeeees 6 7 Creating a Knowledge DaSe cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeccaaaeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeneeaaaes 6 10 Opening the Window editOl cccceeeeee eee eeeeccee sees eee teeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeneneaaaes 6 12 Creating windows dialogs ANd controls ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeee
95. 6 88 6 94 support for OLE 6 88 user input 6 86 on line help how to access 3 46 onrequest load mode specification 7 32 O nRequest option commits setting 7 42 rollbacks setting 7 42 onrequest update specification 7 39 open change sets 8 9 knowledge base 3 5 object editor 2 15 properties 5 35 screen editor 0 7 open image command 6 13 open image dialog 6 110 open object check box new object window 5 5 of new object window 2 40 open object window 5 10 open properties 5 35 open window command 6 13 dialog 6 16 order of windows in screen 0 37 order children command 6 13 ordering columns ColumnLB 6 43 multicolumn list boxes 6 43 ordering slots ColumnLB 6 43 multicolumn list boxes 6 43 Outline property of window properties editor 0 29 outline check box font settings window 10 5 owned by in graph 4 22 in jump 5 12 owner field new object window 5 5 of new object window 2 40 select objects window 4 6 owns in graph 4 22 in jump 5 12 P palettes 6 79 parameters windows attaching 6 99 parameters debugging 9 21 password program 10 44 Passwords assigning 3 42 Passwords window example of 3 43 paste text 5 43 windows 6 21 persistence OLE objects 6 86 6 95 user changes 6 86 persistent data definition 7 5 porting to mainframe 0 3 position command 6 13 dialog 6 18 dialog how to display 6 18 preload answers 0 51 prepare knowledge base 3 3
96. 8 primary window 2 5 primary windows see Standard W indow print change sets 8 15 knowledge base 3 21 objects 3 21 5 50 print window 3 21 5 50 sort window 3 24 print format window 3 23 processing user input OLE objects 6 93 persistencein OLE objects 6 86 saving user edits in OLE objects 6 86 user editing 6 96 profile customizing 10 14 Profile monitor command preference 10 41 confirm delete 10 41 debug split 10 41 decimal separator 10 24 10 45 initial wrap mode 10 42 insert mode 10 43 mouse support 10 44 password program 10 44 Select input 10 24 Index l 15 value can change 10 46 profile options enhancements 10 45 SQL database 10 26 PROFILE ADS 10 15 10 19 SQL interface 10 26 profiles store file setting 10 32 SQL access string 10 26 ask program setting 10 33 auto export system setting 10 39 auto store file setting 10 32 changes when applied 10 17 changing with text editor 10 19 check all system setting 10 39 comparison tolerance option 10 20 date mask option 10 23 dBASE version 10 25 debugger 10 29 definition 10 15 display device type option 10 22 display program setting 10 34 environment 10 30 environment changing 10 20 error message system setting 10 38 file date mask option 10 23 file no strings option 10 23 file time mask option 10 23 file yes strings option 10 23 graph program setting 10 34 graphics driver system setting 10 36 HPO emulation 10
97. ADSSTORE environment variable exists on the PC T his field sets the AUTO STORE FILE profile option Customizing profiles Changing run program settings Overview Therun program settings are available in GUI AionD S but only apply to running character based knowledge bases W hat to do 1 To change the programs that replace parts of AionD S select Settings Run Programs The Run Programs Settings window displays Program Settings 2 Change the desired settings 3 Click Set Reult The current run program settings are replaced Ask file name that specifies the program that replaces the C onsultation monitor when the user is asked for input This field sets the ASK PROGRAM profile option M Tip If you do not enter a program name for ASK user input is disabled simulating CAES Customizing AionDS 10 33 Customizing profiles Show specifies the program that replaces the Consultation monitor during the display of a message M Tip If you do not enter a program name for Show message displays are disabled for an entire consultation simulating CAES T his field sets the SHOW PROGRAM profile option Graph Specifies the program that AionD S uses instead of the default graphic interface to display a graph This field sets the GRAPH PROGRAM profile option Display specifies the program to execute when AionD S sources a Group object If you set Display to NUL groups are not displayed This field sets the DISPLAY PROGRAM prof
98. Bases of Read only access seer _coneet_ 3 Select the directory in which to save the copy Alternative You can specify the disk and path name in the N ame field 4 Enter the knowledge base name for the copy To keep the same knowledge base name for the copy as the original select the original name in the Knowledge Bases list box 3 28 User s Guide Name field Version field Knowledge base utilities 5 If the knowledge base has a unique name within the directory let the version number default to the source knowledge base version number or you can enter a new version number If the knowledge base name is the same as a knowledge base in a directory you must specify a unique version number 6 After entering the information click Copy The next time you view a Knowledge Base window the copy displays in the appropriate directory The original knowledge base remains open Enter the name of the knowledge base in this field Select a knowledge base name from the K nowledge Bases list box or enter the full path and knowledge base name To change directories enter the path name to the directory including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash Check that the Version field is correct then click Copy Enter the verion number of the knowledge base If you select a knowledge base from the K nowledge Bases list box that version number displays Working a
99. Building ask show and other dialog boxes 6 32 User s Guide 14 15 16 17 18 19 Click Back Color to select the background color for the dialog box For moreinformation See Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 Click OK Thechanges are applied and the dialog box displays Add controls to the dialog box and adjust the controls to the desired size Customize the controls using the slots dialog Select methods and add functions to the controls For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Press F8 to save and close the dialog box Building label and text windows Building label and text windows W hat to do A text window can display text or accept text input from end users A label window is a type of text window that only displays text T ext windows can be used in many different ways When creating a text window be sure to select a style that supports the way the text window is used in the application Create and resize a label or text window 2 Doubleclick on the label or text window TheT ext Window Slots dialog displays Text Window Slots Instance Name testi Owning Class TextWindow Basic Window Styles Group l Tab Stop l No Open F Disabled l Invisible Text Window Styles Border IX Label T Password l Multi Line I Auto HScroll I Vertical Scroll F Read Only F Auto VScroll F Horizontal Scroll Text Source
100. Concepts 1 11 Knowledge base structure 1 12 User s Guide T he W indow0O bject class hierarchy contains predefined classes for the different elements of a graphical user interface such as top level windows menus push buttons and text windows Each window is built as an instance of one of these predefined classes from the W indowO bject class hierarchy T he basic characteristics of each window are determined by the class to which it belongs You must subclass the standard window and the dialog classes of the WIN LIB before creating these instances The additional characteristics that make each instance unique are set in the instance definition when it is created For example the PushButton class contains all graphical characteristics that make up a push button It is rectangular shaded in gray its title is displayed in the center of the rectangle and so on T he exact size position and title of a push button are specified in its instance definition For more information See the Building GUI Applications Referencefor a description of each object in the W indowO bject class hierarchy Knowledge base structure DDE Object class hierarchy You can use D DE to pass data between two applications running on the same PC Thetwo applications that are passing data using DDE arehaving a conversation To build a D D E system you need to use the classes in the DDE object class hierarchy For moreinformation See the Building GUI Ap
101. E Object no no Push Button no no Radio Button yes yes Scroll Bar yes no Text Window yes yes Tool no no Tool bar yes no 6 116 User s Guide Changing window background and text colors W hat to do 1 Click Color in the dots dialog The Color dialog displays Custom Color Selector Window Basic Colors Bee IL HEGRoE 3 5 EE GEBDSE ustom Cal mn fn EE olar Ele a 2 S i 3 CalorlSglid Element Background il Text Z Use Derawrs 2 To definea color other than the system default color click a Basic color rectangle Custom Color rectangle or use the mouse to select a color in the Custom Color Selector window AionD S displays that color in the Color Solid display window 3 Click OK to return to the slots dialog 4 After completing the slots dialog click OK Return to the Window editor and the new color displays for the background or text The background colors of child windows inherit color changes made to the parent s background color To change the background color to a child window use the Select Background and Foreground Colors dialog U ing the system default colors ts s gt Tousethe operating system default color select the U se System D efault Color check box The first time you open the Color dialog for a window the default color is set Working with the Window Editor 6 117 Changing fonts Changing fonts Overview Use the Fonts dialog to change the font
102. ERSION profile option Customizing AionDS 10 25 Customizing profiles SQL Interface specifies the default SQL access method In AionD S this option can have one of the following values IBM IBM sDB2 2 isthe SQL access method ORACLE Oracle for O S 2 isthe SQL access method SYBASE M icrosoft Sybase SQ L Server is the SQL access method ODBC You use the O pen D atabase C onnectivity O DBC interface to connect to any O DBC compliant database DB2 IBM Database 2 D B2 isthe SQL access method requires the C cooperative Processing O ption This field sets the SQL INTERFACE profile option Access String defines the default access string used to establish an SQL database connection This field sets the SQL ACCESS ST RING profile option D atabase specifies the default database name used to establish an SQL connection T his field sets the SQ L DAT ABASE profile option 10 26 User s Guide Customizing profiles Changing run settings Whattodo ests 1 To change the run settings select Settings Run TheRun Settings window displays Trace Compatibility Settings Level m Width 76 l HPO emulation mee l v5 10 Emulation l Include Timing Yalues Environment PC Debugger Backup Rerun Disabled X Store Answers Enabled l Preload Answers 2 Change the desired settings 3 Click Set Reult The current run settings are replaced Customizing AionDS 10 27 Customizing profiles
103. For example you can often customize characteristics of the O CX such as how the O CX responds to user actions The user can interact immediately with an O CX without using commands U nlike an OLE object an O CX is always active OCXsare typically dynamic link libraries AionD S represents O C Xs with the O leC ontrol class In OLE 2 0 at runtime you can interact with an OLE object or OCX directly in the container window rather than using the object s or O CX s native environment This feature is called visual editing Visual editing is available only when the OLE object or OCX is active at runtime Exception OLE objects developed under OLE 1 0 do not support visual editing Working with the Window Editor 6 87 Building OLE controls and objects How AionDS implements OLE Overview AionD S provides two classes to support OLE OleControl and O leO bject T his section focuses on O leC ontrol which you use to represent O C Xs Using AionD S you can add an OCX to a standard window or dialog box 6 88 User s Guide Building OLE controls and objects Building an OleControl Registering OC Xs Installing an OCX Register the OCX before installing it to a tandard window or dialog box T he installation creates the subclass of O leC ontrol for the specific OCX If you have O C Xs that are not in the Registration Database you can refer to the documentation provided with thoseO CXs If you do not have a facility for registerin
104. Guide Selecting objects for an Object List window Suppose you select D etails from the List Format group box O wner in the Scope group box and All in the Authorization group box You then select Any In the T ype field and the Breakfast class in the O wner field As shown in the following example the object list only displays the knowledge base objects owned by the Breakfast class Object List details Name Type Parent Flags Beverage Slot Breakfast n MMainDish Slot Breakfast n Meal Slot Breakfast n SideDish Slot Breakfast Pb VhenCreated Method Breakfast feWVhenCreated_ Function Breakfast Suppose you select U p in the Scope group box and the Breakfast class isin the O wne field and any isin the T ype field T he following objects display in the O bject List window objects owned by the Breakfast class m the Breakfast class objects owned by classes above the Breakfast class Classes above the Breakfast class Work with Object Lists 4 11 Selecting objects for an Object List window 4 12 User s Guide T he following example shows the object list Object List details Name Type Parent pb GetMenuPtr Method Menu felGetMenuPtr_ Function Menu MMainDish Slot Breakfast MMainDish Slot Menu Meal Slot Breakfast Meal Slot Menu gt X MealList Parameter GlobalPararneters X MealSelPa Parameter GlobalParameters Menu Class MMenuDlgPtr Slot Menu pb NextMeal Method Menu PXJNextMealList Parameter Menu
105. Knowledge Base Please confinn the pew version mw 5 S Version o n CHADS TO Koowledge Mases SYHTST wi 01 3 You can change the name path and version number 4 Click Update Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 31 Knowledge base utilities Name field Current path Knowledge Bases and Directories list boxes 3 32 User s Guide Thename of the current knowledge base displays To change the name in this field select a name from the K nowledge Bases list box or a typethefull path and knowledge base name To change directories enter the path name to the directory including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash Check that the Version field is correct then click U pdate AionD S increments the version of the current knowledge base by one number and displays the change in the N amefield You can change the version number If you select a different knowledge base to update from the K nowledge Bases list box that version number displays in the V ersion field The current path displays to the right of the Version field To change the current path use the Directories list box or the N ame field When you enter the full path and knowledge base name AionD S ignores the current path By default the current path is one of the following from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S m from the AionD S icon the working directory associ
106. LE objects 6 87 empty frames OLE objects 6 95 OleO bject instances 6 94 Entering new password example of 3 44 entry state 1 9 application window to open 6 4 changing 5 52 environment settings interface option 3 2 interface setting 6 10 environment settings window 10 20 error handling setting up 7 43 errors fixing 9 7 handling for SQL generated 7 43 Example of Change O bject Authorization window 5 31 entering new password 3 44 Passwords window 3 43 examples multicolumn list boxes 6 38 execution trace 3 9 export class definition to external database 7 9 knowledge base 3 20 object 5 47 export file sorting 10 45 External sourcing property of access method 7 23 F Field name property 0 32 file pull down browse 3 25 l 8 User s Guide close 3 8 export 3 20 import 2 9 new 3 2 open 3 5 print 3 21 5 50 run 2 17 save 2 45 3 7 utilities update 2 11 file settings customizing 10 31 focus definition 4 20 font sample 10 5 types of fonts 10 4 foreground list box window colors dialog of 0 36 format of O bject List window 4 28 of printout 3 22 5 51 8 16 format TSL check box of window settings dialog 0 46 formatting ColumnLB statically at edit time 6 42 columnsin ColumnLB 6 42 6 43 columnsin multicolumn list boxes 6 42 6 43 columns statically at edit time 6 42 multicolumn list boxes statically at edit time 6 42 forward fire agenda property
107. Line I Auto HScroll Vertical Scroll l Read Only l Auto VScroll F Horizontal Scroll Text Source Plain Text TSL C Attached Object Pointer User Slots Attach Back Color Text Color Touring AionDS 2 33 Changing the knowledge base 2 34 User s Guide 10 11 12 Since you only want to create one new recipe at a time uncheck M ulti Line in the T ext Window Styles group Set up the Recipe N ame text window so you can attach it to the Name slot owned by the Recipe class T he function W henRecipeN ewM IC hosen_ dynamically attaches the N ame slot to the Recipe N ame text window Select Attached O bject in the T ext Source group Click Attach The Attach O bject dialog displays Attach Object Type e Name a Owner e e l Reload l No Empty Answer Window Attributes Window Type s Sourcing Option l Answer Name ake ee I Explain Source Yalue Current Yalue Constraint Prompt C Final Value I Uppercase I No Trim l Check Length l No Load Value l No Unknown Check Answer in the Window T ype group Check N o Empty and N o Unknown in the Answer W indow Attributes group Click OK to return to the T ext Window Slots dialog Click OK in the T ext Window Slots dialog You return to the Recipe N ame text window Resize the text window to the size shown in the Recipe dialog figure on page 2 28
108. OAD command while executing a knowledge base AionD S loads only the selected data into memory Example When AionD S encounters the following KDL statement AionD S loads the required data if purchased is true then dbms load cl_access end If the parameter or slot called purchased evaluates to the value of TRUE AionD S loads the required data as specified in the access method attached to the class called cl_access ONREQUEST data is never automatically loaded data is loaded only when AionD S encounters the DBMSLOAD statement 7 32 User s Guide Mapped Slots Valid values Properties available in the class TheM apped Slots property is an AionD S maintained property that lists the dots in the class mapped to fields in the database You can map slots by a using the Generate class command using the Generate slots command modifying the M apped To property of a slot For more information See Generating a class definition and slots on page 7 8 and Generating an external database on page 7 9 See the General Reference for information about the M apped T o property Working with External Databases 7 33 Properties available in the class Selection Criteria Purpose The Selection Criteria property is user specified limiting the records brought into AionD S memory to those records meeting the specified conditions You can specify any KD L statement that evaluates to a Boolean expression The following line s
109. Plain Text TSL C Attached Object Text Label Window Pointer Attach Fan aly 3 Toreamethelabel or text window instance enter anew namein the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new label or text window instance name Working with the Window Editor 6 33 Building label and text windows 6 34 User s Guide You can assign the label or text window instance to another label or text window subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new label or text window instance name In the Basic Window Styles group you can specify the label or text window as part of a group by selecting on the Group check box To specify the T ab Stop style for the label or text window select the T ab Stop check box For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the T ext Window Styles group define the display properties of a label or text window such as multi line label and horizontal and vertical scroll bars For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the T ext Source group specify the source of the text that displays in the label or text window at run time If you select the Plain radio button text from the T ext field displays in the label or text window If you se
110. S confirms before it deletes the object This is the default option specifies that AionD S takes action before immediately without confirmation On the mainframe it is sometimes useful to avoid confirmation when you want to delete many objects by specifying them in the List O bjects monitor specifies the division of the screen between the Consultation monitor and the Debug monitor in AionDS on the PC The default is OFF DEBUG SPLIT T his option can have one of the following values OFF ON screen is not split between the Consultation monitor and the D ebug monitor screen is split between the Consultation monitor and the Debug monitor The first 25 lines of the screen are reserved for the Consultation monitor the remaining lines display the D ebug monitor Customizing AionDS 10 41 Customizing profiles EDIT INTERRUPT specifies the action AionD S takes when you enter an editor T he default is ON T his option can have one of the following values OFF cursor is positioned in the Windows menu or on the command line when you enter an editor ON cursor is positioned in an editor window when you enter an editor FLUSH TYPEAHEAD controls whether characters typed before AionD S is ready to process them are saved in AionDS on the PC Thedefault ison T his option can have one of the following values OFF characters that are typed ahead are saved and processed when AionD S is ready for then ON characters cannot be typed ah
111. S2 profsys ads profileads kb_namevll kb_namepro WIN profsys ads profile ads kb_namevll kb_namepro kb_name name of the knowledge base vil version number AionES Platform System profile User profile KB profile 0S2 profsys aes profile aes kb_namepro WIN profsys aes profile aes kb_namepro kb_name name of the knowledge base 10 14 User s Guide Loading profiles Automatically loaded profiles Customizing profiles AionD S profiles are loaded automatically in a specific order when you start AionD S and execute a Knowledge base You can also load anew profile at any time T he following three profiles are loaded automatically The first two profiles PROFSYS ADS and PROFILE ADS must be available in a directory in the environment variable DPATH when you start AionD S 1 AionDS loads the system profile PRO FSYS ADS 2 AionDS loads the user profile PROFILE ADS AionD S loads the knowledge base profile konamePRO when knowledge base execution begins if the following conditions exist m kbnamepro is available in the directory that stores a knowledge base where kbnameis the name of the open knowledge base m Load KB profileis checked in the Run window W hen any profile option is specified in more than one of these three types of profiles the last one to load takes precedence When these files are not available AionD S uses profile defaults that are shipped as part of AionD S Customizing AionDS 10 15 Customizing profiles Man
112. SQ L only a KeyFidds m Load M ode Mapped Slots S lection Criteria a TableName SQL only m Update M ode 7 10 User s Guide Properties available in the class Access String SQL only Purpose The Access String property is user specified containing information necessary to establish a connection with SQL such asa user ID or password For moreinformation See the General Reference Working with External Databases 7 11 Properties available in the class Alternate File Name VSAM only Purpose You can only specify this property only if the VSAM fileis a keyed sequence data set K SD S or an entry sequenced data set ESD S Alternative File N ame contains an optional cluster or path name used to load records from aK SDS You only need to specify the Alternative File N ame when loading records from a base cluster or path and updating those records using a different base cluster or path Example The D ata File N ame property specifies a base cluster and the Alternate File N ame property specifies a path built from that base cluster Using the alternate index AionD S loads records from the Alternate File N ame and updates those records in the D ata File N ame with the primary index 7 12 User s Guide Properties available in the class Alternate Key Field VSAM Only Use this property only if the VSAM fileisa KSDS or an ESDS and you specify an Alternate File N ame The Alternate K ey Field specifies the option
113. Search Again from the T race window amp Reminder If you selected the W rap check box in the Search dialog when you select Search Again at the end of the trace AionD S starts the search at the beginning of the trace Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 17 Displaying the call stack Displaying the call stack W hat to do gt Toexaminethe call stack select Run Call stack The Call stack window displays T he default call stack view is a detailed view which displays the object property and row col information The view can be changed to a graphical view for a graphical call stack T he graphical call stack only shows the names of the objects 9 18 User s Guide Changing object properties Changing object properties Overview You can make changes to object properties while running a knowledge base H owever to save those changes first abort or complete the execution For more information See Saving objects on page 9 26 and the Saving the knowledge base on page 9 27 W hat to do To change an object property complete the following procedure 1 Toopen the object double click the object in the object list window T he object editor displays 2 Open the property by selecting Property O pen from the Property window TheO pen Property window displays 3 Doubleclick the property to change T he property window displays M ake the changes to the property Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 19 Debugging objects in which error
114. Settings window is set to character AionD S 2 uses the Screen editor When the Interface field in the Environment Settings window is set to graphical AionD S uses the W indow editor For more information see Appendix A Building and Running C haracter based Applications in AionD S to learn how to use the Screen editor Select the Window menu to display the three choices Tile displays the W indows editor and all open object list object editor and screen editor windows side by side and top to bottom within the AionD S primary window Cascade displays the Windows editor and all open object list object editor and screen editor windows one on top of another with only the title bars showing Close All closes the W indows editor and all open object list object editor and screen editor windows AionD S presents confirmation pop ups for each window where you have made but not saved changes Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 45 AionDS online help AionDS online help Overview T here are many places to access online help in AionD S The following table summarizes those places From H ow Function a window press F1 or the H elp help window describing the push button window with hypertext links to help a pull down menu when a pull down help window describing the menu option is purpose of the action highlighted press F1 the H elp icon in click on the question help window that lets you select the button bar
115. System Explain aera X System Menu l No System Trace F Size Border Delete On Close T No System Unknown X Title Bar l No System Abort l No System Paste Delete Link Text Source Title Plain Text icon _ e O TSL g C Attached Object Pointer User Slots Cancel To rename the dialog box instance enter a new name in the Instance Name field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new window instance name You can assign a dialog box instance to another dialog box class or subclass by typing a new class or subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new dialog instance name In the Initial State group specify how to display the dialog box when it is opened In the Basic Window Styles group specify whether the dialog box is initially enabled or visible and whether it is opened automatically when its parent window opens For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles 7 10 11 12 13 Building ask show and other dialog boxes In the Standard W indow Styles group define the display properties of a dialog box such as whether the border of your dialog box is resizeable whether the user of your application can maximize or minimize your dialog box and how many options display in the pull down system menu For more information See the Building GUI Applic
116. Type Message Name questiont Owner AskDialog p Window Type Sourcing Option l Answer Name g YP T Message I Explain pooner eae C Current Yalue a l Constraint _ Prompt Final Value Answer Window Attributes Reload l Uppercase l Check Length l No Empty l No Trim I No Load Value F No Unknown Working with the Window Editor 6 99 Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows 6 100 User s Guide 9 In theT ype field specify the object type slot parameter or message to attach In the N ame fied specify the name of the object to attach In the Owner field specify the name of the class that owns the object to attach In the Window T ype group select the type of window to assign to your window Each window type maps the window to an object property For example selecting Answer provides an area for you to input values In the Sourcing O ption group select one of the following types of processing to resolve variables Options The object resolves processing Source value by backward chaining for parameters that do not havea value and placing those parameters on a pending list if required Current value without backward chaining and uses the current parameter value even if it is unknown Final Value by backward chaining for all unprocessed parameters In the Answer W indow Attributes group select one or more of the options to set the ch
117. Type lt Icons l Invalid Name Names Not used sus Details l Modified Owner E 2 C Hierarchy C Mapped C Graph l External Title Object List names Scope Authorization Owner Writeable C Up O ReadOnly Down Hidden Summary The following is a summary of window fields and controls Field Control Function Type drop down list box indicating types of knowledge base objects to list Name text entry fied to enter explicitly the name or name with wild card of objects to display in the object list Owner drop down list box indicating the name of the context from which the objects can come T his combo box works in conjunction with the Scope radio buttons Title specifies text that displays in the title bar of the O bject List _ window Continued 4 4 Users Guide Type field Selecting objects for an Object List window Continued Field Control Function List Format comprises five radio buttons controlling the format of the object list Status group of check boxes that lets you specify the status of objects to display in the O bject List window Scope comprises three radio buttons and works in conjunction with the Owner fidd These buttons control where AionD S looks for objects to place in the object list Authorization comprises four radio buttons that limit the objects that a user can view or change Usethe T ype field to indicate the type of knowledge base objects
118. Version field is correct then click Prepare The open knowledge base s version number displays in the Version field To use Prepare you must change the version number of the knowledge base If you select a Knowledge base from the K nowledge Bases list box the corresponding version number displays in the V ersion field AionD S increments the version number by 0 01 For example the second version of a knowledge base is 0 02 Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 39 Knowledge base utilities Current path The current path displays to the right of the Version field To change the current path use the Directories list box or the N ame field When you enter the full path and knowledge base name AionD S ignores the current path By default the current path is one of the following a from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionDS in its program group Knowledge Bases and To select a directory name from the Directories list box double click on the Directories list boxes directory name All knowledge bases in the selected directory display in the K nowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base Fa Note You cannot prepare a knowledge base with Read only access Selected 3 40 User s Guide Knowledge base utilities Setting knowledge base attributes Overview Use Attribu
119. a El Aion Development System User s Guide PLATINUM technology inc 555 Twin Dolphin Drive Suite 400 Redwood City CA 94065 DC0427 415 591 8200 Title and publication number User s Guide DC0427 Product version This manual accompanies Release 7 0 of AionD S Win Copyright information 1996 by PLATINUM technology inc All rights reserved Notices No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the express permission of PLATINUM technology inc RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEN D Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in a contract with PLATINUM technology inc and if applicable subpar c 1 ii of the Rights in T echnical D ata and Computer Software clause at D FARS 252 227 7013 or subpars c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable The contractor manufacturer is PLATINUM technology inc 555 Twin Dolphin Drive Suite 400 Redwood City CA 94065 Additional copies of this document can be ordered from PLATINUM technology inc Contact PLATINUM technology inc for prices on bulk orders and fees for reproduction licenses Trademarks AION Forest amp Trees and KBM S are registered trademarks and InfoH ub InfoPump and INTELLECT are trademarks of PLATINUM technology inc All o
120. a single character to display as a decimal point in areal number T his field sets the DECIM AL SEPARATOR profile option THOUSANDS specifies a single character to display to separate thousands 000 in anumber T his field sets the THOUSANDS SEPARAT OR profile option SQL DECIMAL specifies a single character to display as a decimal point SEPARATOR in areal number The character is only used when AionD S substitutes a real number for a parameter or dot in an SQL statement causes Export to output a sequenced file Sorted export lets change source management systems control changes made to the knowledge base at the Export file level controls the number of positions to move the cursor when the TAB key is pressed in AionDS on the PC T he default is 4 Customizing AionDS 10 45 Customizing profiles VALUE CAN CHANGE specifies the default choice for the V alue C an C hange property of parameters and slots This option can have one of the following values m FALSE m TRUE m TRUE ASK 600 EXPORT causes Export to output Version 6 0 and Version 6 1 compatible files T hese files can be processed by the AionD S Version 6 0 and 6 1 systems 10 46 User s Guide Appendix Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS Introduction T his appendix describes building and running character based applications in the GUI AionD S environment F Note In AionD S W in and AionD S 2 you cannot build and run a character based interfa
121. aaaes 5 16 Deleting Obje tssir sein en nS i A A 5 17 Cutting and pasting ODjCCtS 0 ec cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ee eeeeaaaeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeseeeaaaaeeeeeseeseaaeeeeees 5 19 Cutting and pasting between knowledge bases ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 5 21 Directly manipulating objects ccc eeeceeeee teste eeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaaeeeeeeesetesetaaeeeeees 5 22 How you can tell an object has Changed ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeteneeeeeeneneaeaes 5 25 Specializing class slots and methodS ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 5 27 Unspecializing class slots and MethoOdS ccccceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeteessnaeeeeeees 5 29 Changing object authorization cccccccceeeeeeeeecee eee ee eee eeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeteeccaeeeeeeeeeeeneeaaaes 5 31 Editing an objection tenes eee as E N a a A 5 33 Properties that appear by default ssssseeeesseereeesinrreeenirnnresnnnnnnnnrnnnnnenene 5 34 Opening property WINKOWS cceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeee ee eeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeennee 5 35 Closing property WINKOWG ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sete eeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeeeeeneee 5 37 Making open property windows active 00 cece eee ceceteeeeeeeeeteeeaaaeeeeeeeeetentaaaes 5 38 Setting scroll bars in property WINKOWS cccceeceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeees 5 39 Specializing and unspecializing object properties
122. ab key to each child window Press the Right or D own arrow keys to move the cursor from the current child window to the next child window in the group m For radio buttons press the Right or D own arrow Keys to deselect the current radio button and select the next radio button in the group O pening the Order gt Select Screen O rder Children Children dialog Reult The Order Children dialog displays Order Children Parent Windows RecipeDig Child Yvindows RecipeNameLbI Recipe Name RecipeNameTW RecipelngredientsLbl Ingredients Needed Recipelngred H RecipeOKPB OK F Iab Stop F Group The Parent W indows field automatically displays the name of the parent window from the W indow Editor pull down menu Working with the Window Editor 6 103 Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups Ordering child windows in a tabbing sequence 6 104 User s Guide The Child Windows field contains the list of child windows belonging to the window whose name displays in the Parent Windows field U sethis field in conjunction with the T ab Stop and Group check boxes to complete the following tasks order the child windows in a tabbing sequence organize the child windows into groups Groups and tabbing orders are independent from each other You could have overlapping groups and tabbing orders To order child windows in a tabbing sequence define tab stops for each child window in the seq
123. ack Color 4 IntheTet field enter the text you want displayed in the label window Click OK to return to the label window For the Recipe N ame label window enter Recipe Name For the Ingredients N eeded label window enter Ingredients Needed 5 Resizethe label windows to the size shown in the Recipe dialog figure on page 2 28 Place the tip of the arrow on the side of the label window to resize so that the arrow turns into a double headed arrow D rag the mouse to pull or push the side in the desired direction Adding the Recipe 1 Add the Recipe N ame text window Select the T ext Window icon from Name text window the tool palette and click the cursor displayed as the T ext Window icon in the Recipe dialog box 2 32 User s Guide 2 3 Changing the knowledge base TheN ew Window dialog displays New Window Class I Name D Parent TE Attached Class In the N ame field enter RecipeNametw to match the corresponding name in the N ew menu iten s Function Body property Click N ew to return to the Recipe N ame text window You must change some text window styles Double click in the Recipe N ame text window TheT ext Window Slots dialog displays Text Window Slots Instance Name RecipeNameTW Owning Class TextWindow Basic Window Styles l Group X Tab Stop No Open l Disabled C Invisible Text Window Styles X Border Label l Password X Multi
124. adio button or check box instance name In the Basic W indow Styles group you can specify the radio button or check box as part of a group by selecting the Group check box You can also specify the T ab Stop style for the radio button or check box by selecting the T ab Stop check box Working with the Window Editor 6 49 Building radio buttons and check boxes 6 50 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles Check Initially Chosen for the radio button or check box to be selected when the window is opened In the T ext Source group specify the source of the text that displays in the radio button or check box at runtime If you select the Plain radio button text from the T ext field displays in the radio button or check box If you select the TSL radio button you can enter T SL text into the T ext field If you select the Attached O bject radio button attach an object with the desired text to display in the radio button or check box To attach an object to the radio button or check box click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 In theT ext field enter the text to display on the radio button or check box You can also add mnemonics to a radio button or check box For moreinformation
125. ails from the Select O bject window objects display in an O bject List window as alist with anumber of columns name type parent and flags 39 Object List details Parent Tie Menu eConvertPackages Rule CresteShoppingList jresteShoppingList State ay Slat Men fpeayList Parameter Menu xPaySePa Parameter Menu atenuPtr Method Menu fgppetMenurtr_ Function Wenu Bhain State Ptaindish Slat Menu eal Slet Menu KMealist Parameter Menu xealSePe Parameter Menu enu class enuDlgPtr Slat ny bp NextMea Method nu xNextMealList Parameter Menu feNextMes _ Function nu Phpenal hiethod henu 4 16 User s Guide Object listing by detail To sort the O bject List window select a characteristic by name by type or by parent from the View pull down menu For more information See Status check boxes on page 4 8 for a list of flags Work with Object Lists 4 17 Object listing by hierarchy Object listing by hierarchy Overview Thisis the same object list format as the knowledge base hierarchy window displayed when you first open or create a knowledge base If you select H ierarchy on the Select O bject window objects display in an O bject List window by hierarchy If you select H ierarchy the valid types in the T ypes field are Any State Class and V ocabulary in this case Any is the same as entering State C lass and Vocabulary in the T ype field AionD S displays a hierarchical outline of
126. al key field that you use to limit the number of records retrieved from the Alternate File N ame see Selection Criteria The key fied must reference a mapped slot in the access method Working with External Databases 7 13 Properties available in the class Class Definition property W hat to do 7 14 User s Guide The Class D efinition property can be either user defined or AionD S defined The Class Definition property maps the external database data structure to AionDS The following example shows an external dBASE record mapped in the Class D efinition property file dBASE of record item is string 20 price is integer 10 department is string 20 priority is string 10 purchased is Boolean The record structure in the Class D efinition property must match the data structure in the external BASE Q SAM SQL or VSAM database exactly You can either enter the record structure manually in the Class D efinition property or AionD S automatically maps the record structure specifying a D atabase File N ame or T able N ame for SQ L and executing the import option One method is to specify a D atabase File N ame or T able N ame for SQ L and execute the IMPORT DEFINITION command For more information See the section External Source Specification on page 7 22 T he other method requires that you specify slots to match each record field in the external database data structure and then execute the GENERATE command
127. ame from the knowledge base s list box enter the full path and knowledge base name To change directories enter the directory path name including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash If the Version field is correct click Import 3 18 User s Guide Version field Current path Knowledge Bases and Directories list boxes Importing a knowledge base To import enter the version number of the knowledge base If you select a knowledge base from the Knowledge Bases list box that version number displays in the Version field AionD S increments the version number by 0 01 For example the second version of a knowledge base is 0 02 The current path displays on the right of the Version field To change the current path use the Directories list box or the N ame field When you enter the full path and knowledge base name AionD S ignores the current path By default the current path is one of the following from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionDS in its program group To select a directory name from the D irectories list box double click on the directory name T he selected directory displays in the Knowledge Bases list box To include a library in a knowledge base place the library in the AionDS directory or D PATH To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box
128. ameter instance or function from the object list window 2 Select Run D isplay 9 14 User s Guide Displaying the execution trace Displaying the execution trace Trace statements Action blocks TheT race window shows the steps that the inference engine takes as it processes the knowledge base A trace consists of statements that outline the sections of the inference engine You can search for a specific text string and copy parts of the trace to the clipboard to copy into another application or another window in AionD S For more information See General Reference Chapter 19 T race File for trace statement examples of inference engine processing T races statements are divided into the following categories a action blocks a actions An action block consists of two separate trace statements that show the start and completion of an inference engine action T he following example shows an action block evaluating twin twin failed T he inference engine starts processing the object twin at the first trace statement The second statement shows the result of the processing in this case twin failed An action block can be separated by other action blocks Each indentation of a trace statement indicates that the action is a subgoal of the previous statement Action blocks can thus be nested Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 15 Displaying the execution trace Copying part of the trace Searching for a specific t
129. an object to the standard window click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 Click Back Color to select the background color for the standard window For moreinformation See Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 Click OK Thechanges are applied and the window displays Working with the Window Editor 6 25 Building standard windows 17 Add controls to the window and adjust the controls to the desired size 18 Customize the controls using the slots dialog 19 Select methods and add functions to the controls For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 20 Press F8 to save and close the window 6 26 User s Guide Building an application window Building an application window W hat to do M ost graphical knowledge bases begin with an application window When a user starts the knowledge base the application window displays first The application window has a set of initial optionsin pull down menus tool palettes or icons To build an application window you create a standard window build the menus tool palettes or icons displayed in it and write the logic executed when a user selects a menu item tool or icon To open the application window when the knowledge base is started set up the entry state agenda to send
130. an two change sets with multiple conflicts W hen there are more than two change sets to apply the concepts used in determining which change set to apply are the same H owever the size of the problem grows very quickly because you will most likely need to make repairs for some of the changes in each change set For this reason try to minimize the number of unapplied change sets Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 25 Resolving change set conflicts 8 26 User s Guide Chapter 9 Debugging Knowledge Bases T he debugger is a utility that you use to find and fix errors in a knowledge base You can use the debugger to interrupt knowledge base processing view runtime values and conditions and execute KD L step by step You can update the knowledge base while the knowledge base is running but you cannot save any changes until after the knowledge base completes execution Introduction In this chapter Topic Page D ebugging procedure 9 3 Running a knowledge base with the debugger 9 4 Run menu summary 9 5 Finding and fixing errors in the knowledge base 9 7 Suspending execution 9 8 Continuing execution 9 10 Displaying an object 9 12 Displaying parameter instance and function values 9 14 Displaying the execution trace 9 15 Displaying the call stack 9 18 Changing object properties 9 19 Debugging objects in which errors most commonly occur 9 20 Aborting execution 9 25 l Continued Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 1 Debugg
131. and color of the text displayed in a window If AionDS cannot find the specified font AionD S uses the closest available font as determined by the operating system If the operating system cannot find a font that closely matches the specified font AionD S uses the system font Caution Do not change the font if your application will run on different platforms W hat to do 1 Font Font Style IT Symbol it ERE System al Bold Italic Terminal il F Times New Roman E T Wingdings Effects C Strikeout C Underline AaBbYyZz Color 2 Select thefont font style font size effects and color of the text Click OK to return to the slots dialog After completing the slots dialog click OK You return to the W indow editor and the new text displays 6 118 User s Guide Changing fonts For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about fonts Working with the Window Editor 6 119 Building a DDE system Building a DDE system Overview Use D ynamic D ata Exchange D D E to pass data between two applications running on the same PC The two applications have a conversation one is the client and the other is the server The client application requests information while the server application returns the requested information For example the portfolio manager knowledge base may provide recommendations to a report generator application An application can have multiple conversations at
132. ange the length of the scroll bar but you cannot change its width 2 Doubleclick on thescroll bar The Scroll Bar Slots dialog displays Instance Name irstscroll Owning Class Scroll Bar Slots ScrollBar e Building scroll bars Basic Window Styles Group Tab Stop l Disabled Invisible No Open Scroll Bar Type Horizontal Vertical Position Min 1 Max 100 Initial fi Increment Line 5 Page 20 Pointer 3 To renamea scroll bar instance en ter a new namein the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new scroll bar instance name 4 To assign a scroll bar instance to another scroll bar subclass enter a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new scroll bar instance name In the Basic Window Styles group specify whether the scroll bar is initially enabled or visible and whether it is opened automatically when its parent window is opened Working with the Window Editor 6 83 Building scroll bars 6 84 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 For more information See Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the Scroll Bar T ype group define the type of scroll bar vertical or horizontal In the Position group set the minimum maximum and initial positions for the scroll box Valid values can be integers fr
133. antage of the clipboard function using a word processor to write reports messages and text for other knowledge base objects while using the clipboard to copy that text into knowledge base objects copying help topics that contain syntax examples to the clipboard while pasting the examples into knowledge base objects Select Services C opy from any help window to copy the current help topic into the clipboard 5 44 User s Guide Searching for and replacing text Searching for and replacing text Overview You can search and replace any text residing in the active property all selected objects or the entire knowledge base To search external library objects for example objectsin WIN LIB check Include External O therwise only objects that you created are searched Caution Library objects can own other objects in a knowledge base Replacing text in library objects may produce unexpected results in the knowledge bases in which the library objects are included From within a knowledge base you cannot replace text in included library objects Search for text To search for text 1 Select the property or object in which to search for the text 2 Select Edit Search 3 Enter the text for which to search 4 Select the location to search in the Scope field Scope Field Searches Active Prop only the active property O bject s only selected objects KB the entire knowledge base For alist of objectsin which the te
134. appearance For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different tools If you select a radio button or check box from the T ool Styles group you can select the Initially Chosen check box AionD S displays the tool as selected when its application opens In the Tool Attributes group select the Stretch Image check box to stretch the image to fit the entire push button area For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the STRETCHIMAGE style From the Image pull down menu select a bitmap instance to display on the tool 10 11 12 13 Building tools on a tool bar Click OK Theimage displays on the tool and stretches to fit its dimensions For more information See Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances on page 6 108 Use the Pointer field to select a mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the tool area For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the tool s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Select a method and add a function to the tool For moreinformation See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 65 Displaying bitmap wi
135. ar with knowledge base objects and AionD S development concepts Who should read this manual T his manual is organized as follows H ow to find information Chapter Contents Chapter1 introduces AionD S concepts Chapter 2 provides a short tour of the functions of AionDS Chapter3 describes actions you can perform on an entire knowledge base Chapter 4 explains how to use an object list window and its various formats Chapter5 explains how to edit knowledge base objects and their properties Chapter6 explains how to build a knowledge base with a graphical user interface Chapter 7 explains how to access databases external to AionD S Chapter8 explains how to track changes made to knowledge bases Chapter9 explains how to debug errors in knowledge bases Chapter 10 explains how to customize windows and other AionD S environment characteristics Appendix A explains how to build character based user interfacesin GU AionDS How to Use This Manual xi For more To build knowledge bases you should have the following AionD S manuals information General Reference Language Reference 1 0 Reference M essages and C odes U s s Guide C haracter B ased Installation and O peration Guide for your platform Application Programming Interface G uide for your platform If you are building a knowledge base with a graphical user interface you should also have the following AionD S manuals Building GUI Applications Reference Build
136. aracteristics of the Answer W indow type If you did not select Answer for the W indow T ype only the Reload option is available Click OK Reult The specified object attaches to the window Changing user slot values Changing user slot values What to do Use the U ser Slots push button which is available in most slots dialogs to change the values of the slots associated with a window Depending on which window is open during runtime you can set different initial values for the same slot In the window slots dialog click User Slots The U ser Slots dialog displays M Tip The User Slots dialog is only available when the window s parent class owns slots Create user slots using O bject N ew User Slots Slots scratchawl linelevel Working with the Window Editor 6 101 Changing user slot values 2 Inthe Slots field select the slot that contains the value to change 3 IntheValue fied enter the new value to assign to the slot 4 Click OK 6 102 User s Guide Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups Overview You can set and change the tabbing order of child windows and organize child windows into groups by using the O rder Children dialog At runtime you can press the T ab key to move the cursor from one child window to the next in the tabbing order A tabbing order is the sequence in which you move the cursor by pressing the T
137. ase H owever changing the trace file when you are running a knowledge base does not affect the current execution because the trace file is already open Customizing AionDS 10 17 Customizing profiles Saving profiles Overview You can save the current AionD S profile settings at any time If you save a profile as the standard names PROFSYS ADS Or PROFILE ADS in a directory available in the AION or DPATH environment variable the options saved in these files are reflected the next time you open AionD S If you save a profile as the file konamePRO where kbname is the name of the knowledge base in the directory where the knowledge base is stored the next time you run the knowledge base kbname those profile characteristics are loaded If you save the profile with another name load that profile using the Load core file command in order for the options to take effect W hat to do 1 Tosavethecurrent profile settings select Settings Save core profile The Save C ore Profile window displays gt Save core profile Please specify the name under which to save the profile File name PROFILE ADS Directory is C3ADS7004 Files Directories PROFILE ADS 2 Select the path and enter the filename of the profile to save 3 Click Save Reult Thecurrent settings are saved to the specified profile file 10 18 User s Guide Customizing profiles Creating and editing profiles using a text editor W hat to do Example Yo
138. ate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Click OK Theicon image displays in the icon window Select a method and add a function to the icon window For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 81 Building scroll bars Building scroll bars W hat to do 6 82 User s Guide A scroll bar is a graphical bar with four main parts as shown in the following figure Scroll Box Scroll Shaft as Scroll Buttons You can move the scroll box within the scroll shaft to display or input a range of values You can move the scroll box by clicking on the scroll buttons clicking on the scroll shaft or dragging the scroll box You can use a scroll bar as an independent control You use an independent scroll bar to set values by changing the scroll position It can be attached to a knowledge base object Independent scroll bars are useful for displaying or sourcing integer date or time values that can fall anywhere within a known range This section shows you how to build scroll bars as independent controls A scroll bar can also display as an integral part of another control such asa text window list box or combo box A scroll bar that is integrated with another control is considered a feature of the primary control and is discussed in the section that covers the control 1 Create and resize a scroll bar You can ch
139. ated with AionDS in its program group To select a directory name from the D irectories list box double click on the directory name All Knowledge bases in the selected directory display in the K nowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base FN ote You cannot update a knowledge base with read only access Knowledge base utilities Deleting a knowledge base Overview To delete the current knowledge base select D elete with the knowledge base open AionD S closes and deletes the open knowledge base If no knowledge base is open the D elete Knowledge Base window displays Deleting an open 1 Select FileUtilities D elete A confirmation dialog displays knowledge base Delete Knowledge Base 7 Are you sure you want to Delete SYBTST v0 01 2 To delete the knowledge base click D elete Reult AionD S closes and deletes the open knowledge base from disk 3 Ifyou do not want to delete the knowledge base click Cancel Reult You return to the open knowledge base Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 33 Knowledge base utilities Deleting an unopened knowledge base 3 34 User s Guide To delete an unopened knowledge base from disk close the open knowledge base Select File U tilities D elete The D elete Knowledge Base window displays Delete Knowledge Base Please specify the knowledge base to be deleted Nome fi Version fs CAD STON Know
140. ations Reference for details about the different styles In the T ext Source group specify the source of the text that displays in the dialog box at runtime If you select the Plain radio button text from the Title field displays in the window s title bar If you select the TSL radio button you can enter T SL text into theT itle field If you select the Attached O bject radio button attach an object with the desired text to display in the title bar To attach an object to the dialog box click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 To modify the values of slots owned by the dialog box s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 In the Title field change the text to the name to display in the title bar In thelcon field specify an icon to be displayed when the user minimizes the dialog box If this field is left blank a default icon is supplied M Tip If the Minimize Button style is not selected the dialog box cannot be minimized In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the dialog box For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 Working with the Window Editor 6 31
141. ays The property windows in which the statements exist are displayed You can continue the execution in the object one statement at a time For more information see Suspending execution on page 9 8 see Continuing execution on page 9 10 see Displaying an object on page 9 12 see Displaying parameter instance and function values on page 9 14 see Displaying the execution trace on page 9 15 see Displaying the call stack on page 9 18 see C hanging object properties on page 9 19 see D ebugging objects in which errors most commonly occur on page 9 20 Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 7 Suspending execution Suspending execution D efault interruption points Setting breakpoints 9 8 User s Guide W hen execution is suspended you can perform debugging tasks Execution is Suspended at the default interruption points or breakpoints You set breakpoints by using the Run Set breakpoint To examine a specific object you should set a breakpoint at the beginning of the object W hen execution is suspended at the breakpoint or default interruption point you can execute the process one statement at a time By default execution is suspended when one of the following conditions occurs a thefirst statement of the entry state agenda is reached an action required from the user Specify an object property at which the debugger should stop when executing an application Breakpoints are selected b
142. background and text colors on page 6 115 Click OK The changes are applied and the label or text window displays Working with the Window Editor 6 35 Building list boxes Building list boxes Overview A list box displays a list of text items for selection You can define the list itemsin an attached object W hat to do 1 Create and resize a list box 2 Doubleclick on thelist box The List Box Slots dialog displays Instance Name festi Owning Class ListBox Basic Window Styles Group IX Tab Stop Disabled l Invisible No Open List Box Styles Extended Select Multi Select l Horizontal Scroll l Sort List Box Pointer e Font User Slots 3 Toremamealist box instance enter anew name in the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new list box instance name 6 36 User s Guide 10 11 Building list boxes You can assign a list box instance to another list box subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new list box instance name In the Basic W indow Styles group you can specify the list box as part of a group by clicking on the Group check box You can also specify the T ab Stop styles for the list box by selecting the T ab Stop check box For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different sty
143. base close the object s editor and select O bject C lose or press F8 AionD S saves the object in the open knowledge base and closes the object editor The knowledge base is not written to disk T o save the knowledge base to disk select File Save W hat happens If there are no syntax errors AionD S displays a smile icon If thereis a syntax error AionD S displays a frown icon that points to the problem An edit error message appears in the message bar AionD S also displays an exclamation point next to the name of the object Working with Objects 5 15 Closing an object without saving Closing an object without saving W hat to do gt Toclosean O bject editor window without saving any changes select Close on the system menu icon located in the top left hand corner of the property window Alternatives doubleclick on the system menu icon a select W indow C lose all m pressCTRL F4 W hat happens AionD S displays a confirmation window that prompts you to save the object s changes You can save or discard the changes or cancel the confirmation window and return to the O bject editor 5 16 User s Guide Deleting objects Deleting objects W hat to do To delete knowledge base objects use the D elete window 1 Select the object or objects 2 Select Edit D elete object The D dete window displays a Selected objects F tnelude subtrees 3 Click D eleteto confirm the removal of the object
144. break points deleting all 9 9 bright check box window colors dialog of 0 36 browse window 3 25 AionD S 2 in 3 25 AionD S Win 3 25 answer window 0 19 build display 0 16 building multicolumn list boxes 6 39 button bar customizing 10 6 defined 2 6 run 2 17 save KB 2 45 save object 5 6 task help 3 46 C call stack 9 18 called by in graph 4 23 called object topping on 9 10 calls in graph 4 23 cascade list editor and screen windows 3 45 property windows 5 42 screen property windows 0 48 change management See also conflicts change sets 8 2 change sts integrate 8 21 check in 8 11 8 12 check out 8 6 8 19 command summary 3 26 compare 8 14 8 23 conflict resolving 8 23 copy 8 21 cut 8 21 delete 8 21 disable 8 18 enable 8 17 list 8 7 master knowledge base 8 2 menu commands 8 5 open 8 9 out of synch working copy 8 20 overview 8 1 paste 8 21 print 8 15 procedure 8 4 starting 8 17 stop 8 18 working copy 8 2 Change O bject Authorization window example of 5 31 change sets apply 8 12 check in 8 11 conflict resolving 8 23 copy 8 21 cut 8 21 listing 8 7 open 8 9 paste 8 21 properties 8 9 changed instances property 9 13 changes tracking see change management Changing an object s authorization 5 31 changing object authorization 5 31 character based application definition 0 2 running 0 49 check box build 6 48 definition 6 48 use of
145. can also apply the changes made in other working copies T hisis helpful if you are working with others to modify the same master knowledge base Copy the change sets from another working copy or from the master knowledge base and apply the changes to your working copy For more information See Change M anagement procedures on page 8 2 Caution Once the changes have been applied and saved they cannot be undone For this reason it isa good idea to export the knowledge base before applying changes A Reminder When you export the knowledge base AionD S compresses the change set After the change set is compressed all changes for an object are collapsed into one entry This action reduces the amount of space required to store the change set 8 12 User s Guide What to do Change Management menu commands To apply changes in one or more change sets O pen the knowledge base to which to apply the changes Select File C hange M anagement List The Change Sets window displays To apply changes in change sets that are not part of this knowledge base copy the change sets from the knowledge base in which they exist to your knowledge base M Tip When you apply multiple change sets done by selecting multiple change sets on the Change Sets window AionDS applies then one at atime in the order in which they are listed in the Change Sets window Select the change sets to apply Select File C hange M anagement Apply If ther
146. ccessing property values ceeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 6 91 RUNIE EEE e AT A E A eeeeaenteee es 6 92 Building an OLE object instance eeeeeseeeeeeeseeeessssrissssrrristsssrrrrssssrrrrnen 6 93 Runtime gt teen eterna a e A A a 6 96 vi User s Guide Chapter 7 Selecting methods and adding fUNCTIONS cccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteetaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 6 97 Attaching parameters slots or MESSAGES tO WINKOWS ccccccccceeeesseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 99 Changing user Slot ValUCS eee cence eenneeeetenaeeeeeeeaaeeesseaeeeesenaaeeeseeaeeeensaeees 6 101 Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and QrOUPS cccceeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeetees 6 103 Adding Mnemonics to controls 2 00 2 cceeeeeeeeeeeceee eee eeeeecaaee ee eeeeceeeeeeeetaeeeeeeseetaaaeeeennees 6 106 Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeteeees 6 108 Changing instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers cceeeeeeeeeee 6 110 Deleting instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers eeeeeeeeeeeees 6 112 Changing the mouse pointer in a WINKOW 0 ceeeeeeeeneeeeetenneeeeteseeeeeteaaeeeeeeaeees 6 113 Linking minimize icons tO WINKOWS cceeeeeeeeee cette ee eeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeteeeaaaes 6 114 Changing window background and text COIOMS ceeeeeeeenseeeeeesneeeteenaeeeeeenaeees 6 115 CHANGING TONS c
147. ce in the GUI environment You must use a separate character based system In this appendix Topic Page Building character based applications A 2 Running character based applications A 48 Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 1 Building character based applications Building character based applications Overview You can use AionD S to build character based applications to run on the PC and mainframe A character based application is a program with a user interface that displays screens using characters as the basic display unit such asin aDOS or OS 2 environment A GUI application is a program with a user interface that displays windows using graphics as the basic display unit such asin a Windows or PM environment Although you build objects in the same manner as described in chapters 3 and 5 use the Screen editor to build screens displayed in a character based application you cannot use the W indow editor described in Chapter 6 W orking with the Window Editor to build character based screens This section describes how to build and edit screens using the Screen editor amp Caution To import an existing character based knowledge base or build a new character based application set the U ser Interface field in the Profile monitor to character See Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level in the AionD S U ses Guide Character based manual for details about opening or importing a
148. ce to manipulate all windows owned by all Displays attached to a particular object Use the W indow editor to create and edit windows that you place in a display Suppose you add a new Display object to a Parameter that doesn t have any Display objects attached AionD S creates a new D isplay object in the knowledge base You can edit this Parameter s D isplay using the Screen editor or the D isplay object editor just like any other object Screen editor for Although a screen is defined by a single object for Groups and Instances the Groups and Instances Screen editor represents several components that make up the object The displays are not attached directly to Groups and Instances T he Screen editor for aGroup object represents the D isplays attached to the members of the Group The Screen editor for an Instance represents the D isplays attached to its slots A 6 User s Guide Building character based applications Opening the Screen editor W hat to do In order to perform any Screen editor actions described in this section havea Screen editor window open and active The description of Screen editor actions assumes that you have already opened a Screen editor for an object You can design a screen for the following objects Parameter Instance Slot M essage Group Class Display Type To open a Screen editor for an object perform the following steps 1 Select the object to design a screen 2 Select O bject Screen to o
149. ceensat sure rected ove 2 9 Updating GROCERY nmass ni i cnn re aa 2 11 Exploring the Knowledge Base Hierarchy Window eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetcaeeeeeeeeetees 2 12 What objects does a State OWN ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeecaeeeetetecueeeeeeeetees 2 13 What slots and methods does a class have ccseceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeteaaeees 2 14 Looking at the CreateShoppingList state agenda ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 2 15 Running GROCERY 0 cceeeceeeeeee eect ee eee eee eee eee eee eee sete eee eeaaaeeeeeeeteneedaaeeeeeeeeenee 2 16 RUD WINCOW Aart teeet ite ett ata te ta 2 17 Application WNAOW prsrssnsirreeanpannpinrrannpannpanni tangane tnni nakanai nna anipun tani nakani i nE 2 18 Changing the knowledge base sesssseeesesessssirrrstssstntirrrrsssstrirnnntnssnnnnnnnnnssennnnn 2 20 Adding the New menu item eeeeeeseeerrrresesinressssrnnnssssnnnssssrnnnnssssnn 2 22 Creating the Recipe dialog nnessessoesseninnesseessennnnesssesrnnnrnnsssennennnnsssesnnnnn 2 28 Creating an independent state eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 2 40 Changing the Recipe ClaSS cccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeteneaaaes 2 43 Saving and closing all open editors cece ee eeeeeteeeeeeeeteeettaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 2 45 Testing the new knowledge base eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeenees 2 46 Table of Contents iii C
150. cify the following characteristics of the objects to list When you display an object list in a details view AionD S displays the status of each object in the Flag column as follows Description Situs Fiag Invalid N ot Used N M odified M apped M External X invalid knowledge base objects knowledge base objects with an empty U sed by property those not used by any other object in the knowledge base no flag unsaved modified knowledge base objects mapped slots to a specific field in an external database library objects for example objects in W inLib AionD S adds library objects to the object list M Tip If the List O bject window does not display the flag column expand the window Listing Authorization status When you display an object list in detail view AionD S displays any hidden or read only authorization status Description Status Flag H idden H Read only R objects hidden from view which cannot be changed when the knowledge base is opened with a user password read only objects which cannot be changed when the knowledge base is opened with a user password 4 8 User s Guide Selecting objects for an Object List window Scope radio buttons T he Scope radio buttons define the scope AionD S uses when creating an O bject List window Scope Function lists Owner Up Down KB object name in the O wner field any objects owned by this object display in the objec
151. cl Dialeghax Standard Vind mwi c d cl StandardWindow Windaw Sened by I Wiadow WindewObiec Up cl Window bjeet C Down 2 Indicate the relationship using the Relation radio buttons T hese buttons define the relationship between the active O bject editor shown in the From field the object where you opened J ump and the objects that appear in the To list box Working with Objects 5 13 Going to another object 3 To seect an object to edit in the To list box double click an entry in the list box or select an entry then select the ump push button From the Jump window you can select the object in the To list box to which you want to jump Example T he following example shows objects that appear in the To list box if you open Jump from a function at the bottom of a class hierarchy AD File Edit Object Settings Wind Relation From Uses fu function classe B ciesse To list box shows CUSedby To lt A Mead PMR function classb Owned by fu function classa gt slo Fme Down M stot 1 slot3 i classe FAitunction slo F e 3 Moy i Cancel j Atmctioni Msl Pe method M stot 1 slot3 E dasse iunctio Msl F method T stot Msi Select this function and press F to open Look up in the hierarchy K 5 14 User s Guide Closing and saving an object Closing and saving an object W hat to do To check the syntax of an object add its changes to the knowledge
152. cle Sybase M icrosoft Sybase SQL Server 4 X 10 X AionD S VM AionD S VM uses the following Interface property values to access the corresponding databases Interface property value Databases accessed Oracle Oracle SQL DS IBM SQ L D ata System SQ L D S dbc 1012 Teradata D BC 1012 7 28 User s Guide Properties available in the class AionD S Win AionD S W in uses the following I nterface property values to access the corresponding databases Interface property value Databases accessed DB2 IBM DB 2 IBM IBM DB2 2 Informix Informix M icrosoft Microsoft SQ L Server 6 0 ODBC use the O pen D atabase C onnectivity ODBC interface to connect to any ODBC compliant database Oracle Oracle Sybase M icrosoft Sybase SQL Server 4 x 10 x Working with External Databases 7 29 Properties available in the class Key Fields 7 30 User s Guide The Key Fields property specifies the fields used as index fields To update SQ L tables you need key fields for rows If you specify an index in the external sourcing specification AionD S automatically maps the key fields dBASE IMPORT from data dbf indexing purchase ndx AionD S maps the index fields in the dBASE index file PURCH ASE N DX and lists the index fields in the K ey Fields property For more information See Appendix A of the 1 0 Reference for external sourcing syntax AionD S maps the key fields automatically when importing from D B2 2 Inform
153. columns the window displays only on Pon she i A monitors supporting 43 lines and 80 columns the window displays only on PRAN Ee ae a monitors supporting 50 lines and 80 columns the window displays on any M3 3210 Any SANY mainframe terminal Mo 3270 4 80 the window displays only on terminals supporting 24 lines and 80 columns A 30 User s Guide Continued Link code Valid values Field Name Valid values Building character based applications coumadin a a a e Device Terminal Rows Columns Descriptions the window displays only on ue ni Be terminals supporting 43 lines and 80 columns M5 3270 7 132 the window displays only on terminals supporting 27 lines and 132 columns This option can contain any alphanumeric character An asterisk in the Link code property indicates no link No link is the default To establish a link between windows use the same link code for each window For example if the answer windows for the NAME ADDRESS and DATE_OF_BIRTH slots all use link codeA the three windows are linked together Specifies the name of a field in a record that corresponds to the window for the Answer Certainty Choices and Constraint windows of record parameters If the record field nameis not specified for a window AionDS does not display a window when it displays the record during execution For other windows the Field N ame property contains a name to identify the window You can use the Fiel
154. create an icon window in a standard window or dialog box and identify the icon instance to display Theicon instance links to an icon graphic file You cannot change the icon window s size You can select a method and add a function to an icon window You can click the icon window to execute an action It appears that the icon is clicked but the icon window actually responds to the click You define the application s response to input in W hen InstanceN ame C hosen methods A number of icon windows each displaying an icon that represents an action can be grouped together to create a tool palette The tool palette in the AionD S Window editor was created in this manner To create an icon graphic use the tools in the Software D evelopment Kits SDK for Windows and OS 2 PM Theicon graphic must bein a Windows or PM ICO format To create an icon and display it in AionD S 1 Create an icon graphic outside AionD S 2 Link theicon graphic to an instance For moreinformation See Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances on page 6 108 3 Createan Icon window Double click in the con window T he Icon Window Slots dialog displays Working with the Window Editor 6 79 Building icons 6 80 User s Guide Icon Window Slots Instance Name Owning Class IconWindow Basic Window Styles Group l Disabled l Invisible No Open Icon Window Styles Border l Invert When Selected Imag
155. creating 5 4 definition 6 87 embedding 6 87 hierarchy 1 7 inserting 6 94 linking 6 87 listing 4 3 moving and cloning 5 22 owned by library objects creating 5 3 setting authorization 5 31 user editing 6 96 viewing while running 3 11 OCXs Index l 13 accelerator keys support for 6 92 adding to windows 6 90 and objects 6 87 creating 6 89 Default PushButton style 6 92 definition 6 87 installing 6 89 instances 6 85 6 89 introduction 6 85 keyboard support 6 92 mnemonics support for 6 92 property values 6 91 registering 6 89 Registration D atabase 6 89 tabbing support for 6 92 toolbars 6 96 OLE controls and objects 6 87 definition 6 86 embedding 6 87 linking 6 87 object linking and enbedding 6 87 objects and controls 6 87 support in AionD S 2 6 86 OLE objects creating 6 93 creating frames 6 93 definition 6 87 editing 6 96 empty frames 6 95 inserting 6 94 introduction 6 85 OleO bject class 6 86 6 88 OleO bject instances 6 86 6 88 persistence of edits 6 86 6 95 processing user input 6 93 registering 6 93 Registration D atabase 6 93 saving user input 6 86 I 14 User s Guide slots 6 86 6 88 StoragelD slot 6 86 6 88 toolbars 6 96 user editing 6 96 user input 6 93 6 95 OleC ontrol class and O leO bject class 6 86 instances 6 85 6 89 support for OLE 6 88 OleO bject class and O leC ontrol class 6 86 empty frames as instances of 6 94 instances 6 86
156. ct another format for an O bject List window when you collect objects 4 28 User s Guide Collecting objects into another Object List window Collecting objects into another Object List window W hat to do To view specific types of objects from an existing O bject List window collect the objects into another O bject List window For example if you open an O bject List window for all states in aknowledge base then add a new state the O bject List window reflects the new states If you collect STAT E1 STAT E2 and ST AT E3 into an O bject List window the contents of this window do not change unless you delete a collected object from the knowledge base 1 To select objects to collect from an existing O bject List window press SHIFT CLICK on the object in the collected O bject List window 2 Select Object Collect AionDS displays the Collect O bjects window Collect Objects Display Format O Icons C Names Tte gonjencph 3 Specify the format of your new O bject List window by selecting a radio button from the D isplay Format group 4 Enter the title of the collected O bject List window 5 Click Collect Work with Object Lists 4 29 Collecting objects into another Object List window 4 30 User s Guide Chapter 5 Working with Objects Introduction T his chapter discusses the following topics a Working with objects how to create open import export cut copy paste move search and replace
157. ctory are displayed in the Knowledge Bases list box Touring AionDS 2 9 Importing GROCERY 2 10 User s Guide 3 Double click GROCERY v0 01 to import the knowledge base If you do not have a user name in a loaded Aion DS profile AionDS prompts you for your name For more information See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S to learn about profiles As AionD S is importing the knowledge base the message bar shows you the progress and AionD S displays a message asking you to wait Reult After it is imported the knowledge base title appears in the AionD S title bar An object list window appears containing the class and state hierarchies This knowledge base hierarchy window shows icons for the states classes and vocabularies in the GRO CERY knowledge base M Tip To open the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window after closing it 1 2 4 5 6 Select O bject List The Select O bjects dialog displays In the Select O bjects dialog select any in the Type fied Do not enter any text in the N ame field Check External O bjects in the Status group This displays WIN LIB and DDELIB Select KB in the Scope group Select H ierarchy in the List Format group Click Select Reult The objects listed in the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window are displayed Updating GROCERY Updating GROCERY Before exploring GROCERY use the U pdate utility to make a copy of GROCERY This way you can make changes and still return to t
158. cts particular properties to open within an object editor window AionDS displays the O bject Properties window Specialize U nspecialize specializes an inherited property If you specialize a property you can change the contents If you do not specialize a property it remains locked You must specialize a property to make changes Choices displays a pop up window with alist of valid options for the selected property Tile arranges all open property windows in the active object editor to appear side by side and top to bottom within the object editor window Cascade layers all open property windows in the active object editor one on top of another with only the title bar showing Close All closes all open property windows in the active object editor Close All does not save or discard the contents of any property window it just hides the property _ window Working with Objects 5 33 Editing an object Properties that appear by default Overview An object editor appears as a window within the AionD S primary window In turn an object editor can own anumber of property windows Each window manipulates a particular property or properties of a knowledge base object W hen open each object editor displays properties specified in the defaults until you change the defaults In most editors one to three property windows automatically open by default You can change the default property position and window size For morein
159. cutting pasting and deleting windows 6 21 Building standard windows 6 23 Building ask show and other dialog boxes 6 29 Building label and text windows 6 33 Building list boxes 6 36 Continued Working with the Window Editor 6 1 Overview 6 2 User s Guide Continued Topic Page Building multi column list boxes 6 38 Building combo boxes 6 45 Building radio buttons and check boxes 6 48 Building group boxes 6 52 Building pull down menus 6 55 Creating tool bars 6 59 Building tools on a tool bar 6 62 Displaying bitmap windows 6 66 Creating and editing hot regions 6 69 Building push buttons 6 74 Building icons 6 79 Building scroll bars 6 82 Building OLE controls and objects 6 85 Selecting methods and adding functions 6 97 Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows 6 99 Changing user slot values 6 101 Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups 6 103 Adding mnemonics to controls 6 106 Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances 6 108 Changing instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse 6 110 pointers Deleting instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse 6 112 pointers Continued Overview Continued Topic Page Changing the mouse pointer in a window 6 113 Linking minimize icons to windows 6 114 Changing window background and text colors 6 115 Changing fonts 6 118 Building a D DE system 6 120 AionD S as the client 6 122 Building AionD S as the server 6 129 Working with the Window Ed
160. d N ame property to identify windows for use with thecm statements in KD L For moreinformation See Chapter 4 of the AionD S Language Reference Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 31 Building character based applications Set relative to bottom A 32 User s Guide Contains the title of the window Titles can include T SL Titles can only be displayed on a single line The Title property lets you enter more than one line of text because T SL statements might require more characters than the actual display The text in the Title property overwrites the window outline if it is placed on the same line the outline is on Specifies whether or not to set a window relative to the bottom of the screen You set the position of the window in the Layout window Row check box sets the last row for the window or title relative to the bottom of the screen T he text portion of the window begins the distance as shown in the Layout window from the bottom of the screen and extends upward The position of the window relative to the top of the screen might vary for different types of devices Depth check box sets the last row for the window relative to the bottom of the screen The window extends to the distance as shown in the Layout window from the bottom of the screen If the window displays on a different screen it displays the same number of lines from the bottom of that screen You should not specify relative pos
161. database 1 Add the W henU pdateError or W henError method to the desired class 2 Create the functions for the W henU pdateError or W henError method Include any KDL for handling errors 3 Attach the function to the W henU pdateE rror or W henError method If you are using the W henU pdateE rror method set the Commit M ode property to O nRequest in the Access M ethod monitor for the class Setting Commit mode to O nRequest ensures that neither a rollback nor a commit is executed when an update error is encountered Setting Commit mode to O nR equest lets you use the customized error processing to execute commits and rollbacks You do not use the Commit mode property with the W henError method 5 To display error information you should use primarily message or text windows although you could also use display report or other GUI windows 6 Ifyou are using the W henU pdateE rror method you can use the DBM S statement with the commit or the rollback options to commit and roll back changes For moreinformation See the Language Reference to learn about the DBMS statement See thel O Reference to learn about executing commits and rollbacks for specific SQL databases Working with External Databases 7 43 Setting SQL commits and rollbacks 7 44 User s Guide Setting SQL commits and rollbacks Working with External Databases 7 45 Chapter 8 Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base Change M anagement is used to track doc
162. dditional sources of information on a _ particular topic continued How to Use This Manual xiii continued Symbol Meaning f Important stresses a point that can help you achieve greater success with the AionD S product A Reminde reminds you in passing of an important aspect that was discussed previously M Tip suggests a technique that can result in more efficient use of the system gt identifies a one step procedure Syntax T he following conventions are used to define the AionD S syntax and command formats in this manual You must type letters that are capitalized You do not have to capitalize these letters Lowercase letters are optional If a command or syntax statement contains both capitalized and lowercase letters you can type only the capitalized letters RUn For the above command you can type the following letters ru run You cannot type the following letter r fu Important For AionDS running on UNIX platforms AionDS commands are not case sensitive H owever file names that exist in UNIX for example knowledge base names must be typed in uppercase and lowercase exactly as displayed in UNIX a Italics indicate a response that you must specify RUn kb_name T he expected response for an italicized word is indicated below the command or syntax statement xiv Users Guide Brackets indicate an option ASORT expr ON key Theon key phrase is optional A bar indicates a choice List objects
163. dent states substates and classes subclasses A dependent state or class is a state or class that exists under another class or state in the tree For example the Breakfast class is a subclass of the M enu class 1 8 User s Guide Knowledge base structure Contexts own other objects States integrate mostly business logic and high level control logic Classes integrate mostly facts grouped as data values and the corresponding procedures that act on them Vocabularies contain global variables and constants States primarily contain rules that model business logic and the Agenda property that models high level control instructions Properties are attributes that define an object W hen the knowledge base is started the knowledge base s entry state is executed The entry state is the first part of the knowledge base to be executed A knowledge base can have only one entry state The default entry state is the M ain state States can own the following objects Displays Reports M essages Rules Parameters Types Processes Classes and the class hierarchy model the relationships between data and the procedures to manipulate that data Classes contain primarily slots which are data definitions methods which define procedures and instances which contain the actual data values C lasses can also access external databases Classes can own the following objects Displays Parameters Functions Processes Instances Reports M essages Sl
164. dge base W hat to do To close a knowledge base 1 Select File Close 2 AionDS prompts you to save objects with unsaved changes To save all changes made to an object click Save To close a Knowledge base without saving the changes click Discard Reult AionD S clears the knowledge base from memory Closing a knowledge base does not end an AionD S session M Tip You can change the default sizes and positions of object editor windows T he new default sizes and positions are not saved automatically For more information see C hapter 10 C ustomizing AionDS 3 8 User s Guide Running a knowledge base Running a knowledge base W hat to do To execute a Knowledge base select File Run or select the Run icon in the button bar The Run window displays A AM Execution trace Debugger C off Disabled On C Enabled Explanation only F Running trace Display device Pcz5 Load KB profile For moreinformation Seethe Run Settings dialog in Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S for details about the defaults that control the execution of a knowledge base U se the execution trace radio buttons to specify whether the trace is on or off and what type of trace to write For moreinformation See Chapter 19 Trace File of the G neal Reference to learn more about the execution trace In the D ebugger group enable or disable the debugger For more information See Chapter 9 D ebuggin
165. dialog box groups logically related controls in a single dialog The Dialog Box class is actually a subclass of the Standard W indow class You must make a subclass of the WIN LIB DialogBox and its subclasses AskD ialog and ShowD ialog in the knowledge base before creating customized instances W hile standard windows often display actionsin pull down menus a dialog box typically displays only one set of values and represents the users options with push buttons instead of menus An ask dialog is a specialized dialog box that the application displays when the inference engine isin control of processing A show dialog is a specialized dialog box that the inference engine displays when it isin control of processing For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference to learn more about ask dialog and show dialog To build dialog boxes use the W indow editor 1 Create and resize a dialog box with a new class 2 Doubleclick in the dialog box The Dialog Box Slots dialog displays Working with the Window Editor 6 29 Building ask show and other dialog boxes 6 30 User s Guide Dialog Box Slots Instance Name aa CtC lt i CS S S SSSSCS Owning Class basicdialog Initial State G Basic Window Styles 5 ae I Disabled I Invisible Maimizen F No Open C Minimized Standard Window Styles ____ l Border l Maximize Button l No System Debug K ea l Minimize Button l No
166. display the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 8 Click OK Theinstance changes and the specified graphic file links to the instance Working with the Window Editor 6 111 Deleting instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers Deleting instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers Overview To delete an instance linked to a bitmap icon or mouse pointer file open the mage Slots dialog and click D elete W hat to do 1 Select Screen O pen Image The O pen Image dialog displays 2 Select the image instance from the I mage Instances list 3 Click Open Thelmage Slots dialog for the selected image displays 4 Click Delete A confirmation pop up window displays Cut or Delete Object Q Deleting bitmap will delete its hot regions 5 To delete theinstance click Continue You return to the AionD S primary window 6 To return to the Image Slots dialog without deleting the instance click Canca 6 112 User s Guide Changing the mouse pointer in a window Changing the mouse pointer in a window Creating a mouse pointer image file W hat to do W hen the mouse pointer enters a window it changes to the specified mouse pointer image You can change the shape of the mouse pointer to indicate the type of action that the user performs For example when the user is required to enter a name into a text window
167. displays only graphics does not havea Font property You can modify the properties for an OCX in the W indow editor or at runtime Using the Window 1 Doubleclick on theOCX to open its Properties dialog The properties editor you see are specific to the O CX In this case the Button Control Properties dialog displays Working with the Window Editor 6 91 Building OLE controls and objects Runtime Keyboard support 6 92 User s Guide Button Control Properties General 2 Enter the caption in the text window 3 ClickOK AionD S supports all mnemonics and accelerator keys defined by theO CX If the O CX does not have any mnemonics or accelerator keys AionD S does not provide a way to define them Exception Accelerator keys are not supported for OC Xsin dialog boxes AionD S does not support tabbing to the O CX because you cannot assign a Tab Stop style to an OCX Any styles would be represented as properties defined by theO CX Similarly you cannot assign a D efault Push Button style to a button type OCX that supports push button behavior At runtime the user cannot press ENTER to select an OCX unless theOCX already has focus T he effect of pressing ENTER also depends on the O CX s definition Building OLE controls and objects Building an OLE object instance Example First create a frame or window for the O LE object then insert a new or existing object You can also insert an OLE object at runtime At
168. ds from the first group of the Settings pull down menu to control how AionD S windows display T he values changed using these commands are saved in the AION INI file These commands are Fonts controls the fonts that AionD S uses to show you text in various windows the Font Settings window displays D isplay controls the tab width auto save interval 3 D appearance of windows and the button bar and message bar locations the D isplay Settings window displays Set window template sets the layout of O bject editor windows object list windows and the W indow editor Save settings Saves changes to window settings in the AION IN file 10 2 User s Guide Customizing AionDS windows Changing screen fonts Overview It is convenient to have different windows display different fonts When fonts differ you can quickly tell where the information in a window comes from For example suppose you have an object editor open with the U sed By and the M essage T ext properties opened as shown in the following example If the fonts are different you can visually determine that AionD S supplies the text for Used By while a developer supplies the text for M essage T ext Message ShowShoppingList ShoppingList gg amp skl cShopping List br amp tbl center lt ShoppingList Item ShoppingList PackagesNeeded ShoppingList PackageSize gt Used By Customizing AionDS 10 3 Customizing AionDS windows Types of
169. dure 1 Set a breakpoint on the Changed Instances property of the rule 2 Set abreakpoint on the Bindings and M atches property of the rule 3 Execute the Go command T he execution proceeds to the first breakpoint the C hanged Instances property 4 Check to see that the appropriate instances are listed An ifmatch rule considers the set of changed instances and determines if the rule can be fired with any of them When AionDS encounters the rule it shows the list of changed instances as well as the rule s source text 5 Executethe Step Into command The Bindings and M atches windows display T he Bindings and M atches windows show you a complete list of matches made alist of successful binding sets and the selected bindings 6 Check whether the appropriate bindings were made 9 24 User s Guide Aborting execution Aborting execution W hat to do gt To abort the execution select Run Abort Reult The execution is aborted and you are returned to the development environment Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 25 Saving objects Saving objects W hat to do To save objects that you change while running the knowledge base perform the following procedure 1 After you make the changes to the objects abort or complete the execution 2 Select the appropriate object editor 3 Select Object Save A confirmation pop up dialog displays 4 Click Save Reult The object is saved Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each object you want
170. e C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the bitmap window s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 To attach an object to the bitmap window click Attach The Attach O bject dialog displays Enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 Click OK AionDS applies the changes and the bitmap window displays Creating and editing hot regions Creating and editing hot regions A Hot region is a transparent rectangle that you lay over a portion of a bitmap A H ot Region detects mouse movement and mouse clicks You can graphically select values by clicking on a region of the bitmap that the H ot Region overlays It appears that you are clicking on the bitmap image but you are actually clicking on the H ot Region through which the application processes the input If your application displays a city map for example you can set up H ot Regions for major points of interest in the city You select these points by clicking on them T he knowledge base may respond to a click by displaying information about the selected site The mouse clicks that select H ot Regions process through the W hen InstanceN ame C hosen demons of the H otRegion class To create or edit H ot Regions firs
171. e Po I Pointer SSS 8 5 Toreamean icon window instance enter anew namein the Instance Name field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new icon instance name You can assign an icon instance to another icon subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionDS automatically updates parent and child links with the new icon instance name In the Basic Window Styles group you can specify whether the icon window bepart of a group a behidden temporarily cannot be selected until the disabled property is removed isnot to be opened until the O penApp command is issued For moreinformation See the BuildingGU Applications Reference for details about the different styles 10 11 12 13 Building icons In the Icon Window Styles group specify whether or not the icon window has a border or is inverted For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles For the Image field select the icon image instance Link the icon image instance to the icon image to display in the icon window In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the icon window For more information See the Changing the mouse pointer in a window section on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by theicon window s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropri
172. e rule is fired the debugger places you in the Rule D efinition property of the rule Execute the D isplay command on the parameters in the premise of the rule to check the parameter values T he D isplay command shows a description of the current state of the parameter W hen the premise of the rule ismet the rule fires If the rule is out of scope it cannot fire If you encounter an out of scope rule on the Effects list set a breakpoint on the D elayed Rules property of the state that owns the rule When AionD S enters the state the debugger displays the D elayed Rules list AionD S steps through the list one item at a time and attempts to fire the rules Debugging objects in which errors most commonly occur Debugging on request rules To debug the behavior of on request rules W hat to do 1 Set a breakpoint on the Forward Fire Agenda T he Forward Fire Agenda shows a list of rules and their priority The higher priority rules are tried first If the rule does not appear on the Forward Fire Agenda set a breakpoint on the Effects list of the parameters present in the premise of the rule W hen the parameter is assigned and AionDS encounters the rule in the Effects list AionD S adds it to the Forward Fire Agenda Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 23 Debugging objects in which errors most commonly occur Debugging pattern matching rules W hat to do To debug a knowledge base with pattern matching rules use the following proce
173. e Change M anagement Enable This will create the change set and begin the tracking process After you enable C hange M anagement AionD S records all changes to the knowledge base Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 17 Change Management menu commands Stopping Change Management Disable W hat to do gt To disable Change M anagement select File C hange M anagement Disable Any changes made to the knowledge base when Change M anagement is disabled are not recorded amp Caution Change M anagement can be disabled at any time H owever if you are using Change M anagement to integrate changes into a master knowledge base you should never disable Change M anagement If you do all changes made while it is disabled are lost when you check your changes back into the master knowledge base 8 18 User s Guide Checking out a working copy with unapplied change sets Checking out a working copy with unapplied change sets You might want to check out anew working copy before all the checked in change sets have been applied to the master When you check out a working copy and there are unapplied change sets in the master AionD S automatically copies the unapplied change sets to your working copy To minimize potential problems with conflicts apply the change sets to your working copy in the order in which they will be applied to the master For example suppose a change set contains a modification to Rule 1 in the knowledge base If
174. e are any errors AionD S displays a window listing all the errors Save the changes to the knowledge base by selecting File Save Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 13 Change Management menu commands Comparing change sets Compare Overview Use the Compare command to identify conflicts before change sets are applied The Compare command compares the objects in one change set with the objects in others If any conflicts are reported you can investigate the reason for the conflict and see which change to apply For moreinformation See Resolving change set conflicts on page 8 23 W hat to do To compare changes in one or more change sets perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base containing the change sets 2 Select File Change M anagement List The Change Sets window displays M T ip Compare changes in change sets that are not part of this knowledge base copy the change sets from the knowledge base in which they exist to your knowledge base You need not apply them to compare them Select the change sets to check for conflicting changes 4 Select File C hange M anagement C ompare AionD S searches the changes in the selected change sets and generates a file containing information about any conflicts The information indicates the change sets that contain the conflict and the object and property that are in conflict W hen the compare process is complete a confirmation pop up window displays 5 To view
175. e changes and the H ot Region editor displays 18 Select a method and add a function to the H ot Region For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Deleting a H ot Region gt TodedeteaH ot Region select the H ot Region then select Edit D dete GUI window Working with the Window Editor 6 73 Building push buttons Building push buttons Overview A push button is a button you can click to execute logic You can display text or a graphical image on a push button Example T he following example shows textual and graphical push buttons Standard Yindow la W hat to do 1 Create and resize a push button 2 Doubleclick on the push button The Push Button Slots dialog displays 6 74 User s Guide 3 4 Building push buttons Push Button Slots Instance Name newpush Owning Class PushButton Window Styles Group X Tab Stop l Disabled Invisible l No Open Push Button Type Text Push Button Graphic Push Button Text Push Button euibutes Text PushButton Pointer ne e To rename the push button instance enter a new name in the Instance Name field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new push button instance name You can assign a push button instance to another push button subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child
176. e knowledge base G RO CERY lets you concentrate on AionD S features and how to use them You need not understand fully the design of GROCERY to complete the tour of AionD S successfully After a default installation of AionD S version 0 01 of GROCERY is E S DOC GROC available in the AionD S main directory under the ExamPL subdirectory TheAionD S convention for version numbers starts with 0 01 and is incremented by 0 01 for each consecutive version number For example the version number following 0 01 would be 0 02 2 2 User s Guide ERY Knowledge base example GROCERY What does GROCERY do Purpose of GROCERY GROCERY creates a shopping list for a summer camp based on your meal selection H ere is some general information about the GROCERY knowledge base Thecamp using the GROCERY knowledge base serves three meals a day five days a week m TheGROCERY knowledge base allows users to plan one week of meals based on predefined menu selections For each meal you select dishes from several lists Depending on the meal the lists available are main dish side dish beverage dessert appetizer soup vegetable and starch You can add new dishes to each list Based on meal selections the knowledge base a determines the grocery items to purchase a determines quantities needed a converts these quantities into standard package sizes Cafeteria meals work in the following way o breakfast lunc
177. e length is 66 lines and the default page width is 76 characters a Indicate the printer type Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 23 Printing object information Use the following five check boxes under O ptions to modify the way the knowledge base prints Check box If checked Compress compresses the output into as few lines as possible Index adds an index to the end of the printout Table of Contents adds a table of contents to the end of the printout Extended T able of C ontents adds an extended table of contents containing entries for all objects to the end of the printout Summary adds a summary of all the objects printed to the end of the printout Print Sort window From the Print Sort window you can select the first second and third order in which objects sort for printing The Print Sort window has three drop down list boxes U sing the list boxes you can sort the knowledge base objects alphabetically by their parent type and name T he default is to sort objects alphabetically by parent name type within parent name and object name within type To change this order change the values in the drop down list boxes 3 24 User s Guide Browsing a file Browsing a file W hat to do 1 To browse text files select FileBrowse AionD S displays the Browse window 2 Select afile from the window AionD S starts a session of the Browser for that file In AionDS 2 AionD S 2 calls the system
178. e of graphic file that will be linked to the instance The class can be bitmap icon or mouse pointer or a subclass of one of these 4 IntheNamefidd enter a name for the instance 6 108 User s Guide 5 10 Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances Click New Thelmage Slots dialog displays Image Slots Instance Name Newbit Owning Class Bitmap File Name fi To renamean image instance enter a new name in the Instance N ame fidd AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new instance name Delete You can assign an image instance to another image subclass by entering a new subclass name in the O wning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new image instance name In the File N ame field enter the path and graphic file name to which you want to link this instance To modify slot values owned by the instance s parent class click U ser Slot to display the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Click OK Theinstance is created and the graphic fileis linked to the instance Working with the Window Editor 6 109 Changing instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers Changing instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers Overview You can change the name of an image instance parent class of an image instance and fi
179. e the conversation The conversation is deleted and you return to the Client Conversation dialog 3 Click Cancel to cancel the deletion T he conversation is not deleted and you return to the Client Conversation dialog This section describes how to create a Link instance A link provides a connection between a knowledge base object in the client and datain the server There are two types of links warm link notifies AionD S when the requested data item s value changes hot link sends the new value when the requested data item s value changes Also set up knowledge base logic to activate the D DE link For moreinformation See Building GUI Applications Reference for details about logic used to activate the D DE link Working with the Window Editor 6 125 Building a DDE system W hat to do 6 126 User s Guide Displaying the N ew Link dialog 1 Select Screen DDE Links The Links dialog displays Links Conversation Link Item Linked Object 2 Tocreatea subclass of Link instead of using the Link class click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays 3 Complete the N ew Class dialog For more information See Creating windows dialogs and controls on page 14 In the N ame field enter a name for the new class In the O wner field select the parent class of your new class Click New You return to the N ew Conversation dialog N oO fF In the Links dialog click N ew TheN ew Link dialog displays
180. e utilities 3 Select Passwords AionD S displays the Passwords window Se AES ADS Lsa cme her 4 Click Owner U ser or Runtime AionD S displays the Enter new AD S password or Enter new AES password window Caution Always assign an owner password Without an O wner password the U ser password is not set Enter new ADS password Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 43 Knowledge base utilities 3 44 User s Guide 5 Enter the new password and click OK T he Retype the new password window displays Retype the new password 6 Reenter the password AionD S confirms your password and displays the Passwords dialog Caution If you insert spaces while entering the password the spaces become part of the password 7 Click Set If you don t want to set a password click Cancel M Tip You can enter a password for the owner user and runtime and then click Set Organizing windows with the Window pull down menu Organizing windows with the Window pull down menu Overview You can control how AionD S places the W indow editor and object list O bject editor and Screen editor windows within the AionD S primary window with the W indow pull down menu The Property pull down menu controls the Property windows within an O bject editor The Screen pull down menu controls the W indows within the Screen editor or Window editor When the Interface field in the Environment
181. e with Read only access selected Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 37 Knowledge base utilities Preparing a knowledge base W hat to do Use Prepare to strip your knowledge base of any text not needed for the production version To ensure the integrity of your original knowledge base be sure to change the version number To prepare a knowledge base 1 Open the knowledge base 2 Select File Utilities Prepare The Prepare K nowledge Base window displays Prepare Knowledge Dase Please specify where to create the prepared KB Name SYBTST Version om CAADS7Oq Knowledge Gases M Readily access 3 38 User s Guide Name field Version field Knowledge base utilities 3 Changethe version number in the Version field To prepare a different knowledge base use the D irectories list box to select the directory in which the knowledge base is located 5 Select the knowledge base 6 Click Prepare Reult AionDS prepares and opens the knowledge base T he knowledge base hierarchy window does not display You can run but cannot edit the knowledge base T he knowledge base name displays in the N ame field To change the knowledge base name select from the Knowledge Bases list box or enter the full path and name To change directories enter the full path name to the directory including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash Check that the
182. e zeder credo Tedeetcheibive EEA A AE E E EEE EEEE EEE 6 118 Building a DDE SyS O aaa aa E e a Ea EE naa dase ANANALAR sateen ta 6 120 AionDS as theclent ene aa aaa ea a ei ae E EEEE 6 122 Building AionDS as the SCrVel ssssssessssirnesssirrrssrrirrnssttiirntstrnnnnnstrrnneent 6 129 Work with External Databases Database MONUS sii niin n EE ein aie aaaea 7 2 Access method Configuration 0 cccccccecceeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeecceeeeeetecieeeeeeeenaeeeeeseenaaeeeeenee 7 3 Defining an ACCESS MethOd cece eeeeeeeee teen eee eee cae e eset eee tt tea aaaeeeee eee ttneaaaaeeeeeeetteeee 7 6 Changing the access Method c cccceeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeesseesenaeeeeeees 7 7 Generating a class definition and SlOtS cccceececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeetenenaeeeeees 7 8 Generating an external database cccccecccceseeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeteessnaeeeeeees 7 9 Properties available in the ClaSS ccceseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesecaaaeeeeeeseecaeeeeseneneeeeeess 7 10 Access String SQL only 0 ceeeeeee eect terete aaee eee eteeaaeeeeeeneecaaeeeeeteee 7 11 Alternate File Name VSAM Omnly cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeesencaeeeetees 7 12 Alternate Key Field VSAM Only ccccesecceeeeeeccneeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeentnaaes 7 13 Class Definition property 0 0 00 cceccesceeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeiaaaes 7 14 COMMit MOde
183. ead INITIAL WRAP MODE controls whether words are wrapped to the next line in AionD S on the PC The default ison This option can have one of the following values OFF words cannot be wrapped characters are not accepted after you fill up the line ON words are wrapped to the next line when you fill up the original line 10 42 User s Guide INSERT MODE JOIN AT END KEEP ENTRY MODE Customizing profiles controls how characters are inserted in AionDS on the PC T he default is ON T his option can have one of the following values OFF characters are inserted at the cursor replacing any existing characters T his modeis also known as typeover mode ON characters are inserted to the left of the cursor existing characters are not replaced controls where text strings are joined in AionDS on the PC T he default is OFF This option can have one of the following values OFF text is joined at the position of the cursor ON text is joined at the end of the line controls whether the current insert mode is kept after a function key is pressed in AionDS on thePC Thedefault ison T his option can have one of the following values OFF insert mode is returned to the setting of INSERT MODE after a function key is pressed ON insert mode is not returned to the setting of INSERT MODE after a function key is pressed Customizing AionDS 10 43 Customizing profiles MATCH PARENTHESIS controls whether AionD S checks for unmatc
184. ecause of this limitation you should customize the O bject editor templates at 50 characters wide for KD L properties and 76 characters wide for TSL properties 10 12 User s Guide Customizing AionDS windows Saving customized settings W hat to do gt Tosave your settings before exiting AionD S select Settings Save Reult The settings are saved in the aion INI file When you exit AionD S if you changed settings you are prompted to save your settings gt Tosavethe current settings click Save in the pop up confirmation window Reult The current settings are saved until the next time you change them M Tip You can distribute a standard set of default window settings by copying AION IN I from machine to machine Customizing AionDS 10 13 Customizing profiles Customizing profiles Overview A profile contains specifications for the development runtime and system environments and database interfaces Use the group 2 commandsin the Settings pull down menu to change the current profile Each command displays a window in which you change profile information Select Settings Save core profile to write the changes to a specified profile file or create anew one Select Settings Load core profile to replace the current profile with another profile D efault profile names T he following tables show the default profile file names for AionD S and AionES AionDS Platform System profile User profile KB profile 0
185. ect the Stretch I mage check box to stretch the image to fit the entire push button area For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the PBS_STRETCHIMAGE style From the Image pull down menu select the bitmap instance to display on the push button For moreinformation See Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances on page 6 108 Click OK Theimage displays on the push button and stretches to fit the push button s dimensions From the pull down menu in the Pointer field select the mouse pointer Shape to display when entering the push button area For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the push button s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Working with the Window Editor 6 77 Building push buttons 14 To change the text font click Font TheFont dialog displays For more information See Building GUI Applications Reference for details about fonts 15 Select a method and add a function to the push button For moreinformation See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 6 78 User s Guide Building icons Building icons Creating an icon graphic W hat to do An icon window defines a location where an icon instance displays You
186. ects can own knowledge base objects so when you modify objects in a library you might also need to modify the knowledge bases in which the library is included You can create instances and subclasses of included library classes and you can create substates of included library states T hese objects are placed in the knowledge base not in the included library Caution When the parent of a knowledge base object is an included library object that has been deleted or renamed AionD S deletes the knowledge base object because AionD S cannot find the parent of the knowledge base object The following restrictions apply to libraries ma A library can contain up to 65 535 objects You cannot change included library objects from within the knowledge base Working with Objects 5 3 Creating an object Creating an object Overview To create objects you use object editors to define and develop objects You can also create objects by copying existing objects For moreinformation See the Copying objects section W hat to do To create a knowledge base object use the N ew O bject window 1 Select O bject N ew TheN ew O bject window displays rr Ob jeet Type fi Name Se Owner eed 2 F Open object Lew cence hee 2 Specify the object type name and owner in this window amp Reninde Included library objects can own instances substates and subclasses 3 Specify whether to open t
187. ed object can set a value are displayed The selected object writes or sets a value to the graphed objects selects an object When the selected object executes the O bject List window displays the slots parameters and instances from which the selected object reads values T he selected object reads or uses the values of the graphed objects selects a slot parameter or instance The O bject List window displays the objects that read values in the selected object The selected object is read by or used by the values of the graphed objects selects an object The O bject List window displays the objects that the selected object calls including function calls message passing or agenda statements message report graph state The selected object calls the graphed objects selects an object The O bject List window displays the objects that call the selected object M Tip Object list by graph does not give an overview of an entire knowledge base but views relationships between portions of the knowledge base Keep the relationships as simple as possible To analyze multiple relationships use multiple object lists by graph In addition you can use collapse nodes to simplify graphs Work with Object Lists 4 23 Object listing by graph W hat to do 1 Select the G raph list format from the Select O bjects window Objects display as alist of mini iconsin an object graph window Select the objects to graph 3 Select a relat
188. editor E EXE T he browse session is independent of AionDS TheAionD S primary window does not own the system editor You can edit files using the system editor M Tip Oneway to take advantage of the system editor is to add commentary before printing the browse file In AionD S Win AionD S W in calls the AionD S W in Browser The AionD S W in Browser isa child of the primary window called You cannot edit files using the AionD S W in Browser Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 25 Tracking changes in a knowledge base Tracking changes in a knowledge base Overview To track document and control changes to a knowledge base use the Change M anagement sub menu You can use Change M anagement to incorporate changes made simultaneously by several developers Change M anagement The following table lists each Change M anagement command and its commands function Command Function Check out creates a working copy of the master knowledge base Check in moves the change set from the current knowledge base to the master Compare checks for change set changes to the same object property and lists those changes Apply makes the changes in the selected change sets to the current knowledge base List lists the change sets in the current knowledge base O pen opens one or more change sets in the current knowledge base Print prints modified objects in change sets or saves them in text format in a file Enable D isable starts or stops record
189. eeded slot owned by the Recipe class T he function W henRecipeN ewM IC hosen_ dynamically attaches the IngredientsN eeded slot to the Ingredients N eeded list box Click Attach The Attach O bject dialog displays Check Answer in the Window T ype group Check N o Empty in the Answer W indow Attributes group Click OK to return to the List Box Slots dialog Click OK in the List Box Slots dialog You are returned to the Ingredients N eeded list box Resize the list box to the size shown in the Recipe dialog figure on page 2 28 Place the tip of the arrow on the side of the text window to resize so that the arrow turns into a double headed arrow D rag the mouse to pull or push the side in the desired direction Changing the knowledge base Adding the Cancel 1 To add the Cancel push button select N ew Push button from the tool push button palette and click the cursor displayed as the push button icon in the Recipe dialog box It must be named RecipeC anca PB Resize and display the Cancel push button name by using the same techniques as for the Recipe dialog 2 Add statements to the function body of the Cancel push button When you right double click Cancel the M ethods screen displays Click OK to create and display the W henRecipeC ance PBC hose M ethod and Function editors Method WhenRecipeNewMlChosen GroceryStandardWindow i Function YWhenRecipeNewMlChosen_ GroceryStandardYyindow ggi Function Arguments Local Va
190. eeecneeeeeeeeecceeeeaeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeees 6 48 Building group boxes 000 e cece cece e cece eee eeeeecaaee nett teat eeeeeceaaaaeeeeteeeaaaaeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeaaeess 6 52 Building pull down MeNUS cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneee eee ee ee eeceeecaaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaaaes 6 55 Creating tool bars 2 0 eccceeeeeeeeeecenee teste eeenaee tees ee etteeee eset eetteceeeeeeetgeeaaeeeeesneessaeeeees 6 59 Building tools on a tool DaM cccccececcceeee eect cette eee e teense eee eteaee sees eeeaaeeeeeedeecaaeeeennee 6 62 Displaying bitmap WINGOWS ccccccceeeeeeececeee ee eeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaaaeeeeeetecccaaeaaaeeeeeees 6 66 Creating and editing hot regions 00 cece eececeeee eee eeecceeee sees teste etteeaaaeeeeeeeeecaaeeaaes 6 69 Building push buttons 000 000 eee e cece eeeee ee eee ee teat ee etter rete aa aee eee eneeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaes 6 74 Building ICONS iaaea aea ana aaa a A Ate aaa eet 6 79 Building scroll bars cece ee eeeecee eee ee eee eeecaaee eee ee eeteeeeeceaaaeeeeseeecaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 6 82 Building OLE controls and objects cceeceeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeneneaaaes 6 85 AionDS and KO E A 6 86 OLE CONCEPtS mannanna aei a a a a eet 6 87 How AionDS implements OLE ccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeenaaaes 6 88 Building an OleControl cceeccceceee cece ee eeceee eee eee eeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeeaaaes 6 89 A
191. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 6 14 Opening windows and ialOQS cccceceeeeeeeecceeeeee este eeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeteeecaaaeeeeeeeeeteneaaaes 6 16 Resizing and moving windows dialogs ANd controls cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeettneeeeeees 6 17 Copying cutting pasting and deleting WINGOWS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeeeeeteeeaaees 6 21 Building standard WindOWG 2 cc eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 6 23 Building an application WINdOW cccccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeccaeeeeeeeeeeteecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 6 27 Building ask show and other dialog DOXES ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 6 29 Building label and text WINGOWS cccccci eee e cence eee eeeecccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaaaeeeeeeeeceaaaaaaes 6 33 Building list DOX S cccccceeceeee eee eeeecee eect eeeea aaa aaaee sees eeeeecaaeeeeectgeeseeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 6 36 Building multi column list DOX S cccececcec ee eeceeee eee eeeecccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaaaeeeeeeeeneeeaaaaes 6 38 Creating a multi column list DOX cccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeteeeaaeneee 6 39 Configuring a multi column list DOX 0 eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeteeeaes 6 42 Building combo DOXES cece cece ee eeceeee eee ee eeccae atest eee tere ete a anaes eeeteeaaaaeeaaeeeeeeeeeneeeaaaes 6 45 Building radio buttons and check DOXES cccceeeeeeeeee
192. eeees 9 23 Debugging pattern matching ruleS ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeteeessaeeeeeees 9 24 Aborting CXCUTION 0 2 2 cee cc cceeee cece ee eeeeceee eee ee eetteaaaeee sees etteaaaaaeeeeeeeteeeaaaaaeeeeeeeteeeeaaaes 9 25 Saving Re 0 6 ee ee 9 26 Saving the knowledge base cccececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeedaaeeeeeeeeseeeeaaaes 9 27 Rerunning the knowledge base to verify COrreCtiONS cceecccssesseeeeeeeeeeesesesnnnatenes 9 28 Customize AionDS Customizing AionDS Windows ccccceeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 10 2 Changing sereen font seceviseseheevieesittia eee venti FOTRA Ki KARENS EEEE 10 3 Customizing the message and button bars seesseeessereeseeeeeeeerereeeennn 10 6 Displaying windows with a 3 dimensional appearance essseeeeeeseessrereeeesee 10 8 Customizing the auto save time ccceececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeetaeeeeeeeaaes 10 9 Customizing the most recently used knowledge base liSt cceeeee 10 10 Customizing the tab width cccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeseenaaeees 10 11 Customizing window Size and POSItiON ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeteee 10 12 Saving customized settings eee eeeeee cece eee e eect eeeeeee eee eteetaaeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeteee 10 13 Customizing ProtileSia centies eiee eee ei 10 14 TROACING olro leS feck etre saves sche
193. elected region For example if the Title radio button is selected the Foreground Background Bright Blink controls and the sample area reflect the colors of the selected window s title A 34 User s Guide Building character based applications 4 TheForeground and Background list boxes contain the colors available for the foreground and background of the window region selected by the Region radio buttons Select one color from each list box for each region of the window T he sample area shows how text for the selected window will look based on the current selections in the W indow Colors window You do not directly edit this part of the W indow Colors dialog it reflects the current settings 5 Usethe Bright and Blink check boxes to indicate whether the color of a particular region is bright or blinking OnthePM desktop Blink does not work the same as in a full screen execution of AionD S on the PC or mainframe On thePM desktop Blink sets the background color to bright For example if the background color is yellow and blink is selected the window has a bright yellow background on the PM desktop but is normal yellow and blinking when you run the consultation in full screen mode 6 Select Screen Refresh Alternative Select File Save Reult TheLayout window displays the window with its new colors Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 35 Building character based applications Ordering windows
194. em before another one create menu items as separator lines m delete a menu item delete all menu items To modify the values of slots owned by the menu iten s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information Building pull down menus For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 15 Click OK Thechanges are applied to the menu items which are added to the menu bar The parent window displays 16 To select methods and add functions to the menu items first select the applicable menu item For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Creating pull down menu selections 1 Tocreatea menu item as a selection in a pull down menu select the menu item in the M enu Item List to add to a pull down menu selection 2 Enter the Instance N ame M enu Item T ext and attributes for the new pull down menu 3 Click Add Child Reult Themenu item is created as a selection in the specified pull down menu Changing menu items 1 To change a menu item select the menu item in the M enu Item List Its attributes display 2 Changethe desired attributes 3 Click Change Reult The menu item s attributes are changed Appending one menu item after another 1 To append one menu item after another select the menu item in the M enu Item List after which you want the new menu item to be placed 2 Enter the Instance N ame M enu Item T
195. engine does not contain any application specific knowledge and is separate from the knowledge base For example the inference engine determines the execution order for if then rules based on known information If your knowledge base has the following rule CA a eee if residence then taxrate Before processing this rule the inference engine must find another rule that determines the value of residence or ask the user for the value of residence f no such rule exists For more information See Appendix A Porting Knowledge Bases of the G eneral Reference for a detailed description of the inference engine In AionD S knowledge bases can have either a graphical or character based user interface T his manual assumes that you are building and running knowledge bases with graphical user interfaces Throughout the rest of this manual the term knowledge base is assumed to mean a knowledge base with a graphical user interface AionD S 2 In AionD S 2 Version 6 2 or newer you can build and run knowledge bases with graphical or character based user interfaces In AionD S 2 Version 6 11 and older you cannot build knowledge bases with graphical user interfaces nor can you run knowledge bases that have graphical user interfaces AionDS concepts AionD S Win Version 6 2 You can build and run knowledge bases with graphical and character based user interfaces AionD S Win Version 6 4 and 7 0 T hese versions of AionD S W in con
196. er based applications Updating the Layout window W hat to do To show all current changes in the Layout window gt Select Screen Refresh or press F6 Reult All current changes display in the Layout window Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 43 Building character based applications Hiding and showing selected windows or Displays Overview Sometimes you want to hide the windows or Displays shown in the Layout window You might want to do this so you can see a particular window you are designing Or you might want to see what the screen would look like without the windows Hidingwindowsor 1 Tohide windows or Displays select the windows or Displays from one of displays the following places a Displays window a Windows dialog 2 Select Screen H ide Reult Theselected windows and displays are hidden All of the windows that the selected D isplay owns are also hidden H ide does not delete windows or displays Showing a window or 1 To showawindow or display that is hidden select it from oneof the display following a Displays window a Windows dialog 2 Select Screen Show Reult The selected window or display is shown M Tip By default the Explain window and window are not displayed initially Use Show to display these windows A 44 User s Guide Building character based applications Modifying Layout window characteristics The Screen Settings dialog controls the display characteristics
197. erarchy can be seen clearly and customized objects are separated from the W indowO bject class library Create a subclass of DialogBox Click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays New Class Name eT Owner S Enter RecipeDialogBox in the N ame field Enter DialogBox in the Owner fied Click N ew to create the RecipeD ialogBox class and return to the N ew Window dialog Touring AionDS 2 29 Changing the knowledge base 5 In theN ew Window dialog enter recipeDig in the N ame field and click N ew 6 Resize the Recipe dialog to the same size as the Recipe dialog figure on page 28 Place the tip of the arrow on the side of the dialog to resize so that the arrow turns into a double headed arrow D rag the mouse to pull or push the side in the desired direction 7 Change the name displayed in the title bar of the RecipeD Ig window Double click in the RecipeD Ig window to display the RecipeD Ig window dots Dialog Box Slots Instance Name RecipeDlg Owning Class RecipeDialogBox 4 Initial State Normal Maximized Minimized Basic Window Styles O Disabled O Invisible J No Open Standard Window Styles O Beeder C Maximize Button amp Dialog Border O Minimize Button L No System Debug L No System Explain L No System Trace O Size Barder J System Menu C No System Unknown d Title Bar C No System Abort CJ No System PasteLink Text Source __ Title Plain Text ican
198. es in the data retrieval process TO automatically set commits set the Commit M ode property to AutoC ommit W hen a commit or a rollback is issued the current SQL unit of work is committed or rolled back that is all classes that have current SQL connections are committed or rolled back to the lat commit point A unit of work consists of the changes made by the knowledge base to databases since the last commit 1 In the class set the Commit M ode property to O nRequest Setting Commit M ode to O nR eques ensures that no action is taken on update If Commit M odeis set to AutoC ommit a commit is issued after an update is completed 2 In the appropriate class set the conditions under which you want a commit or rollback to occur and include the DBM S statement with either the commit or the rollback option Setting SQL commits and rollbacks Setting up SQL error handling W hat to do To set up error handling for SQ L generated errors you can add the W henU pdateError and the W henError methods create the corresponding functions and attach the functions to the W henU pdateError and W henError methods In the functions you can write KD L to handle SQ L generated errors For example you can write KD L to issue rollbacks on specific errors In response to SQ L generated errors AionD S sends the W henU pdateE rror demon while updating an SQ L database and the W henError demon while connecting to or reading data from an SQ L
199. es in a Knowledge Base Change Management procedures cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeesetesenaaeeeeees 8 2 Change Management Menu COMMANAG ccceeeeeeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeencaaeeeeeeeeeeeesnaaeeeeeees 8 5 Creating a working copy of a knowledge base Check out 8 6 View the knowledge base s change sets LiSt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 8 7 Editing the knowledge base s change Sets Open cccceeeeesteeeeeeeneeeeetees 8 9 Moving change sets to the master knowledge base Check in 8 11 Applying change set modifications to the knowledge base Apply 8 12 Comparing change sets COMpPaAre cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeetaaaes 8 14 Printing change sets Print ccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeteeetaaeeeennee 8 15 Starting Change Management Enable ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 8 17 Stopping Change Management Disable ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaes 8 18 Checking out a working copy with unapplied change Sets ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeetaees 8 19 Updating out of sync working copies with the NEW MASTET ccccceceseeeettteeeeeeeees 8 20 Integrating change sets before applying them to the MaSte ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseees 8 21 Resolving change Set conflicts ccccccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeecaaaaeeeteeeaes 8 23 viii User
200. es in the Path N ames property For example if the DATA directory on drive D contains the data file you can specify the following path name for the dBASE data file named PU RCH ASES D BF d data purchases dbf VSAM If the Access M ethod is VSAM this property contains the name of the base cluster or path KSD S or ESD S to access KSDS or ESDS With a KSDS or ESDS the D ata File N ame is used for updating records If an Alternate File N ame is not specified the D ata File N ame is used for loading records If a KSD S is being updated the D ata File N ame must identify a base cluster or path with a UN IQ UE key 7 16 User s Guide Data Integrity Check Valid values Properties available in the class The D ata Integrity Check property is user specified indicating whether AionD S must check each record in the external database AionD S can verify that the data remains unchanged before writing the records to the external database You can set the D ata Integrity Property to m YES AionD S checks each record for modifications before writing the record to the external database For example when AionD S loads a record from the database it copies the record to memory The original record still exists in the database and can be modified by other users or processes a NO AionD S checks the original database record and displays an error message for any changes found since the last copy AionD S does not maintain data integrit
201. etter in the menu bar to display a pull down menu Touring AionDS 2 5 Starting AionDS M essage bar At the bottom of the primary window is the message bar It provides a short phrase describing the action currently highlighted T he message bar also provides the text of error and informational messages that AionD S issues during knowledge base development For more information See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S to learn how to turn the message bar on and off or place it in another part of the primary window Button bar On the right side of the primary window the button bar shows you a number of graphical buttons These buttons are shortcuts to often used AionD S actions When you select a button it initiates an action The button bar shortcuts are introduced throughout this book as their actions are described From top to bottom these buttons are cut paste save object run knowledge base save knowledge base open an object select properties to open open an object list window open the Window editor or Screen editor task help 2 6 User s Guide Starting AionDS M Tip The button that opens the Window editor in GUI applications opens the Screen editor in character based knowledge bases U se the Screen editor to build screens for a character based knowledge base For moreinformation See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S to learn how to turn the button bar on and off or to place it in another pa
202. ext string 9 16 User s Guide An action is complete in itself An example of an action would be the assignment of a value to a slot or parameter as shown in the following example gt gt parameter is 5 Assignments are indicated by the double headed arrow T he value assigned is located at the end of the statement usually after the keyword is or are In the example statement 5 is the value assigned to the parameter T he parameter or slot name to which the value is being assigned is to the immediate right of the arrow gt To examinethe execution trace select Run T race TheT race window displays To copy part of the trace complete the following steps 1 Select the text to copy 2 Select Edit C opy in the T race window Reult Thetext is copied to the clipboard To search for a specific text string complete the following steps 1 Select Edit Search from the T race window 2 Enter the text string for which to search in the Search string field 3 Select the Case sensitive check box to search for the string exactly as you entered it including upper and lower case 4 Select the Wrap check box to start the search at the beginning of the trace when the end of the trace is reached 5 Click OK Reult AionDS finds the first occurrence of the specified text string after the cursor Displaying the execution trace Searching for next gt To search for the next occurrence of the same text string select Edit occurrence
203. f text can be entered text Reload contents of the window are updated whenever the screen is refreshed Assignment to afield in a record does not cause the window to be reloaded unless the assignment causes the record to be processed The window is not reloaded if the window is modified Input processing U ppercase input is converted to uppercase Trim AionD S trims leading or trailing blanks from input Check length length of user input is checked Disallow unknown user cannot press F5 or PF5 to enter UNKNOWN Disallow empty list empty list or set cannot be entered A 26 User s Guide Building character based applications Modifying the selected window properties Overview T he Window Properties dialog lets you control the properties of the window currently selected Whattodo 1 Select a Display window using the W indows dialog or the Layout window 2 Display the Window Properties dialog by selecting Screen W indow Properties The W indows Properties dialog displays Window Properties Type ET Device x i ie Outline Full box Link code Field name Title PROMPTI Set relative to bottom C Row J Depth 3 Change the fiddsin this dialog See following sections for information about each field 4 Select Screen R efresh Alternative Select File Save Reult The Layout window displays the window with its new attributes Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 27 Bu
204. f your company has a few sales managers who are good at assigning optimal quotas for their sales agents you can build a knowledge base that contains their expert knowledge Instead of asking for a sales manager s expert advice other sales managers can run the knowledge base to set optimal quotas for their sales agents Types of information Theinformation structure is organized into the following categories Application knowledge includes facts judgments procedures and interface specific information Control knowledge orders the steps that the knowledge base takes in order to reach the final result To build aknowledge base you create a structure of AionD S knowledge structures that models specific application and control knowledge Knowledge structures or objects are reusable modules of knowledge They separate knowledge into discrete elements that AionD S can manipulate 1 2 User s Guide Libraries AionDS concepts T his table shows the objects that can represent certain types of knowledge Typeofknowledge Objects high level controls states agendas judgments or business logic rules facts or data classes slots types instances hierarchy of classes parameters procedures functions methods interface specific information displays messages graphs groups processes reports U se the W indow0 bject class library to build graphical user interfaces T hese objects are only valid for character based
205. fonts You can use the Font Settings window to change the following types of fonts System represents the font in any window where AionD S presents the information about a knowledge base such as system supplied list boxes and the message bar KDL represents the font in any window where you enter KDL such as the Rule D efinition property of a rule or the Facts window of aslot TSL represents the font in any window where you enter TSL such as the M essage T ext property of a M essage or the Prompt property of a Parameter or Slot T ext mode represents the font in the consultation window a consultation is a knowledge base execution W hat to do To change the fonts for displaying text in windows perform the following steps 1 Select Settings Fonts The Font Settings window displays 2 Select aFont radio button to indicate which type of font to change Font System OKDL OTSL Textmode Typeface Font sample Small Fonts The quick brown fox 12345 Mv MS Serif Courier MS Sans Serif Host Presenter MS Dialog 10 4 User s Guide Customizing AionDS windows 3 Select the style and size of the font in the T ypeface and Size list boxes The Font Sample box shows you a sample of the currently selected font A Reminder To maintain compatibility GUI AionD S has the same property widths as character based AionD S T ext in objects such as rules and messages can only be 50 characters wide for KD L text and 76 characters w
206. formation The procedure for changing these defaults is described in Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S 5 34 User s Guide Opening property windows Editing an object You cannot make changes to a property until its property window isthe current window By default AionD S opens commonly used properties for each knowledge base object The rest of the properties are hidden To open hidden property windows W hat to do 1 Select Property O pen Alternatives a click open m pressF4 In theO pen Property window constrain the list of properties by selecting a List radio button By selecting a different radio button you can display a different set of properties in the Properties list box Radio button D isplay All lists all properties available in the selected object whether their windows are open or closed Hidden lists all properties available in the selected object but does not display them at the bottom of the Properties pull down menu M odified lists all properties modified since the last time you filed the knowledge base object Unspecialized lists all properties inherited from a parent and not yet specialized Specialized lists all properties inherited from a parent class and specialized For more information See Specializing and unspecializing object properties on page 5 42 Working with Objects 5 35 Editing an object W hat happens 5 36 User s Guide 3 From the Properties list box se
207. from and starts a new change set in your working copy This ensures that any changes you make are copied to the master only once To avoid working on out of sync working copies frequently apply the change sets to the master Check out new identical working copies more often Assign a change administrator to apply the change sets to the master For more information a See U pdating out of sync working copies with the new master on page 8 20 a See Integrating change sets before applying then to the master on page 8 21 Because changes cannot be undone after being applied and saved back up the master by exporting it before applying changes MI Tip Keep change sets small in size and modular H aving each person make changes to a different part of the knowledge base reduces the chances that they will modify the same object property For example make logic changes in one change set and make user interface changes in a separate change set T he compression and apply processes are simplified when dealing with smaller units of data K eeping change sets small and modular reduces the number of conflicts when you apply change sets Consequently change sets can be checked in and applied to the master more frequently and with less effort Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 3 Change Management procedures W hat to do To track the changes you make to a knowledge base use the following procedure 1 Place the master in a l
208. from the knowledge base If the object isa context and you want to remove the other objects below it in the hierarchy check Include subtrees To delete a graphical instance use the W indow editor Caution If you delete or rename a library object the following changes are made when the library is updated to a knowledge base a Thelibrary object s owned objects and child objects in the knowledge base are deleted a AnyKDL TDL and TSL references to the included library object and the object s owned objects are invalidated For more information See Chapter 6 Working with the Window Editor to learn how to delete graphical instances Working with Objects 5 17 Deleting objects Cutting to the To place a copy of selected objects on the clipboard select Edit C ut object or clipboard click the scissors button in the button bar U sing Cut is safer than using D elete because you can Paste the object back 5 18 User s Guide Cutting and pasting objects Cutting and pasting objects W hat to do To cut and paste objects 1 U sing the mouse or keyboard select the object or objects to cut or copy If you select icons or mini icons from any O bject List window you can extend the selection across multiple objects If you select an object by highlighting its O bject editor window you can select only one object Caution When you make changes to objects in a knowledge base that has been included as a library in
209. g Knowledge Bases to learn how to use the debugger Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 9 Running a knowledge base 4 Usethe Display device field to indicate the type of display the knowledge base execution simulates on the desktop Select the field to display the following screen types DeviceType Terminal Rows Columns all any any PC PC any any PC25 PC 25 80 PC 43 PC 43 80 PC50 PC 50 80 M 3270 any any M2 3270 24 80 M3 3270 32 80 M4 3270 43 80 M5 3270 27 132 5 When you check Load KB profile AionD S automatically loads the profile associated with this knowledge base If you do not check this check box AionD S does not load the associated profile even if the profile is available in the knowledge base directory 6 Click Run to execute the knowledge base Execution does not begin until the knowledge base is saved If you try to execute a knowledge base before saving AionD S prompts you to save the knowledge base with a confirmation pop up window 3 10 User s Guide Viewing knowledge base objects Editing knowledge base objects Running a knowledge base You can switch to other AionD S editor windows while running a knowledge base Any window you open while running a knowledge base reflects its current state This means that you can view changes AionD S makes to a running knowledge base For example you may want to view instances created during knowledge base execution For more information See
210. g OC Xs you can use AionD S To register an O CX using AionD S 1 Select FileRegister OCX The Register OLE Control dialog displays Register OLE Control File Name Directories List Files of Type Drives OLE Controls ocx c disk1_yvol1 2 Select the drive directory and filename for theO CX 3 Click OK To install an OCX 1 Select Screen Install OCX Thelnsert O bject dialog displays the O CXs found in the OLE Registration D atabase Working with the Window Editor 6 89 Building OLE controls and objects Insert Object Object Type a O Creste New ChartFX Control Circ3 Control O Create from pie er Insert Control Result M Tip The Create N ew and Create from File radio buttons are not available because these functions apply to the O leO bject class 2 Select theOCX then click OK Reult AionD S creates a subclass of O leC ontrol for that specific O CX Inserts a new object into your document Adding theOCX toa 1 Select theO CX tool from the tool palette or select Screen N ew Window window The N ew W indow dialog displays 6 90 User s Guide Building OLE controls and objects ButtonControl ChartFXControl Circ3Control OleControl 2 Select the subclass for the OCX and specify an instance name 3 Click New Accessing property values Overview Unlike other controls an OCX does not have slots or styles but its own specific properties For example an object that
211. g open property windows active W hat to do You can change information only in an active property window To makea property window active click within its window Sometimes an object property completely covers another and you cannot click on the covered property In this case make the property window active by cycling through open property windows of the active object editor by pressing SHIFT F6 electing an open property from the window list at the bottom of the Property pull down menu 5 38 User s Guide Editing an object Setting scroll bars in property windows W hat to do Property windows that are text editing windows have scroll bars To turn them on and off select or deselect H oriz scroll bar or Vert scroll bar from the property s system menu Working with Objects 5 39 Editing an object Specializing and unspecializing object properties W hat to do To specialize an unspecialized property in a Class Slot or M ethod activate the unspecialized property of an object editor lect Property Specialize To unspecialize a specialized property activate the specialized property of an object editor Sect Property U nspecialize For more information See pages 26 27 for information on specializing and unspecializing class slots and methods Specializing inherited If a property is inherited from a class above it in the knowledge base properties hierarchy the default color of the text in the property window is
212. g the name of the SQL table AionD S accesses AionD S uses this name to locate and establish a connection with the specified SQL table 7 38 User s Guide Update Mode Properties available in the class In the U pdate M ode property you can specify whether to use NOUPDATE AUTOUPDATE Or ONREQUEST NOUPDATE You cannot modify any data accessed by AionDS This entry is the default AUTOUPDATE W hen knowledge base execution terminates AionD S automatically writes your modifications to the database ONREQUEST W hen encountering a dbms load command while executing a knowledge base AionD S loads only the selected data into memory T he following figure shows the actions of the three possible entries Working with External Databases 7 39 Properties available in the class NOUPDATE AUTOUPDATE Ers Modifications Dalib ia Awcord Fleld 1 Abiy ONREQUEST iid At Pad 3 1i sep Bd fone vation Pieced oats bn diefiahses of AUTHORIZED ta TALE Consultation Ends it AUTHORIZED is TRUE Then DEtSitadate AiontS writes Elan DEMS Flugh J modifications to database NOUPDATE You cannot make modifications to the database with NOUPDATE selected Since NOUPDATE does not maintain as much database information in memory it is the most efficient option NOUPDATE isthe default entry ONREQUEST You have write access when AionD S executes the dbms update statement for the specified access method class As shown ab
213. ged since you enabled C hange Management print the change set Change Management menu commands Moving change sets to the master knowledge base Check in What to do W hen you have completed the changes in your working copy and you want to include them in the master knowledge base the first step is to check the changes into the master W hen you check in changes AionD S moves the change set to the master knowledge base and deletes it from the working copy This transfers all changes recorded in your change set to the master knowledge base To check in changes to the master knowledge base perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base containing the change set you want to check in To verify the name and directory of the master knowledge base before you check in the change set open the change set M Tip It is also agood idea to update the comments of the change set to indicate any final changes you have made 2 Select FileC hange M anagement Check In T he change set is moved to the master and deleted from the copy Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 11 Change Management menu commands Applying change set modifications to the knowledge base Apply Overview To incorporate the changes made in a working copy into the master copy Apply the change set U sually before applying change sets check them in from the working copy and compare then to other change sets to make sure there are no conflicts You
214. h and dinner are served daily a one week of meals is planned at atime a breakfasts have a main dish side dish and beverage a lunches havea main dish side dish beverage and dessert a dinners have a main dish beverage appetizer soup vegetable starch and dessert Recipes are consulted to determine grocery needs Recipes are based on a single serving a A database file contains a list of all ingredients you can purchase at a local grocery store Touring AionDS 2 3 Knowledge base example GROCERY T he following objects and logic are defined W hat is implemented so far 2 4 User s Guide TheM ain state agenda starts up the Grocery knowledge base and displays the application window The GrocerySW instance is the application window The CreateShoppingList state is defined lasses are defined for M enu ShoppingList Recipe Ingredient and Selections The M enu subclasses Breakfast Lunch and Dinner are defined The G lobalP arameters vocabulary is defined To create menus a Select M enu O pen in the application window to open the M enu O pen Selection dialog boxes a lect M enu O pen All to open all the dialog boxes for each meal and day a select M enu Add Dish to open the Add Dish dialog boxes a lect ShoppingList O pen to open the Shopping List dialog boxes Various windows and dialog boxes have been created as follows a theGrocery KB application window from which you can select the dishes for a specific
215. hapter 3 Chapter 4 Work at the Knowledge Base Level Creating a knowledge base c cscccceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeetessnaaeeeeees 3 2 Opening a knowledge base cc ccccceeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeetesenaaeeeeeees 3 5 Saving a knowledge base ccccesceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaaeeeeeeeeeegeaaaaaeeeeeesteesesaaaeeeeees 3 7 Closing the current knowledge base cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeseeeenaeeeeeees 3 8 Running a knowledge base cccccccccccceeeeeee eee eeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeecdaeeeeeeeeetnee 3 9 Aborting and restarting knowledge base ExeCution cccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeees 3 12 Managing libraries cc cecccceeeeeeeeecneee eee eee teecaaaaee scene eeenaaaaaeeeeeeetegecaaaaeeeeeeeeteneeaaees 3 13 AGING MIDFANGS E E P T O OOO OO N E 3 14 Deleting libraries 2 2 0 0 cece cece cece eee eeeee cette eee teeeeaaaeee sees ettgaaaaaeeeeeeeeteeenaaaaes 3 15 Updating modified libraries to knowledge bases cccccceesseteeeeeeeeeeeeetaees 3 16 Importing a knowledge base ceeeecceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeseeesiaaeeeeeees 3 17 Exporting a knowledge DASE ceeeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeseessaeeeeeees 3 20 Printing object information ccccccceeecccceeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeettgeeeeeeeeettnea 3 21 Browsing a fil
216. haracter Based Applications in AionDS A 9 Building character based applications Saving the appearance of windows A 10 User s Guide Tile arrange all open Screen editor windows so that they appear side by side and top to bottom within the Screen editor Cascade arrange all open Screen editor windows so that they appear layered oneon top of another with only the title bar showing Close All close all open Screen editor windows T his choice does not save or discard the contents of the Screen editor windows To save the appearance of the various windows in the Screen editor including the D isplays window select Settings Set window template For moreinformation See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S Building character based applications Creating new Displays W hat to do To create a new Display to attach to the object in the Screen editor perform the following steps 1 Select Screen D isplay N ew The N ew Display window displays New Display Please select the objects for which you wish to create displays Objects 2 Inthe Objects list box select the object for which to create a display W hen editing a screen for Group or Instance you can select multiple objects for which to create a display 3 Click OK Reult AionD S creates D isplays for the selected objects The name of the Display object is the same as the name of the first object in the O bjects list box Building and Running Character Based A
217. he Add Dish dialog 4 Changethe Recipe class to create and access a database file that contains alist of recipes 5 Closeall editors and save the changes 6 Test the new knowledge base To find out how the knowledge base works after completing these changes see the GRO CERY2 knowledge base The following sections give you step by step instructions for each task Touring AionDS 2 21 Changing the knowledge base Adding the New menu item Overview In this step you use the W indow editor to add the N ew menu item to the Recipe pull down menu in theGROCERY Knowledge base main window GrocerySW and include the method and function that open the Recipe dialog W hat to do 1 Click the Window editor window to activate it 2 Open theGrocerySW window Select Screen O pen Window TheOpen W indow dialog displays Open Window Window Instances aes Ask fASkDiabog nnn aes_ Show ShowDialog DishDlg DishDialogBox GrocerySW GroceryStandardYindow MenuDlg MenuDialogBox MenuOpenDlg MenuOpenDialogBox ShopListDlg ShopListDialogBox O List Child Windows 2 22 User s Guide Changing the knowledge base 3 Doubleclick the Grocery KB window instance T he GrocerySW window instance displays Grocery KB Menu Recipe Ingredient ShoppingList Help Exit Touring AionDS 2 23 Changing the knowledge base 4 Add theN ew menu item to the Recipe pull down menu Select Screen M enu Items TheM enu Items dialog displays
218. he location is given in dialog units for all instances of windows except for H ot Region windows For H ot Region windows the location is given in pixels Working with the Window Editor 6 19 Resizing and moving windows dialogs and controls 6 20 User s Guide W idth H eight If a top level window is currently open in the Window editor this field displays the width of the currently selected window T he width is given in dialog units for all instances of windows except for H ot Region windows For H ot Region windows the width is given in pixels For Icon windows and Vertical Scroll Bar windows this field is blank and cannot be modified If a top level window is currently open in the Window editor this field displays the height of the currently selected window The height is given in dialog units for all instances of windows except for H ot Region windows For H ot Region windows the height is given in pixels For Icon and H orizontal Scroll Bar windows this field is blank and cannot be modified Copying cutting pasting and deleting windows Copying cutting pasting and deleting windows Copying a child window into another window Moving a child window into another window You can copy or move a window from one window into another by using Edit Cut GUI window Edit Copy GUI window and Edit PasteG U window You can also delete a GU window by using Delete GU window Select the child window Selec
219. he object editor by checking or unchecking O pen object 4 Click New 5 4 User s Guide Type field Owner field Open object check box New push button Creating an object U sethe T ype field to indicate the type of knowledge base object to create You can enter the full text of the object type select a type from the drop down list or enter the two letter abbreviation of the object type For more information See the G eneral Reference and online help for alist of object type abbreviations Usethe N ame field to enter the name of the knowledge base object to create The object name can be up to 24 characters long starting with an alphabetic character and containing only alphanumeric characters and underscores No other characters such as spaces dashes or ampersands are allowed Use the O wne field to indicate the context to own the new object The default owner is the context currently selected when you select O bject N ew The default owner displays in the O wne field If no context is selected or to change the default owner select from the pull down menu You can also enter the entire context name in the O wner field After AionD S creates the object check O pen object to open an object editor for the new object If you do not check O pen object AionD S creates the object but does not open the editor for that object TheO pen object selection stays the same until changed For example if you uncheck O pen objec
220. he order of the child windows in a group listed in the Child Windows fields complete the following steps 1 Highlight oneor more child window name instances in the group 2 Move your cursor to the place in the group where you want to move the an highlighted instances As the cursor moves between items its image changes 3 Click on the space between items while the cursor is displaying the altered cursor image and the instances you highlighted are inserted in the new position Reult The group is now in the defined order Once you click O rder and save the application this group order is set W hen you press the Right or D own Arrow keys on the last radio button in the group the first radio button in the group is selected Working with the Window Editor 6 105 Adding mnemonics to controls Adding mnemonics to controls W hat to do 6 106 User s Guide A mnemonic is the ALT key and a letter key Pressthe ALT key and a letter key simultaneously to move the cursor to the control The letter used in the mnemonic is underlined You can create mnemonics for the following controls a label windows push buttons radio buttons check boxes group boxes menu items gt Tocreateamnemonic for a control insert a tilde in front of the letter to make a part of the mnemonic in the T ext field of the control s Slots dialog Mnemonics for label windows When you issue the mnemonic for alabel window the curs
221. he original if your changes make the copy unusable 1 Select File U tilities U pdate T he U pdate Knowledge Base window displays Update Knowledge Base Please confirm the new version Name GROCERY2 Version joo 02 CAADS7004 Knowledge Bases GROCERY2 v0 01 Directories 2 Read only access For moreinformation See the U pdating a knowledge base section in Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level to learn more about using the fields in the U pdate K nowledge Base window 2 Notethat GROCERY displays in the N ame field and 0 02 displays in the Version field Click U pdate to make a copy of GROCERY with the incremented version number Reult After you select U pdate note that the title bar now says AionD S GROCERY v0 02 AionD S has created an updated copy of the knowledge base closed the original and opened the updated copy Touring AionDS 2 11 Exploring the Knowledge Base Hierarchy window Exploring the Knowledge Base Hierarchy window Overview Before you run this knowledge base use a few features of the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window described in the following sections All features of this type of window are discussed in Chapter 4 Working with O bject Lists 2 12 User s Guide Exploring the Knowledge Base Hierarchy window What objects does a state own W hat to do gt To seewhat objects the CreateShoppingList state owns hold down CTRL and click the mini ico
222. hed parentheses when you edit a text property This option can have one of the following values ON AionD S notifies you of unmatched parentheses T his isthe default on the PC OFF AionD S does not check T his is the default on the mainframe MOUSE SUPPORT specifies whether to activate a mouse i ststi i s sS ON specifies mouse support is activated OFF specifies no mouse support Thedefault isoFF If you change this option restart AionD S for your change to take effect PASSWORD PROGRAM specifies the program AionD S uses to replaces the security component of AionD S when a protected knowledge base is loaded RERUN specifies rerunning a consultation after recording user sourced answers during a consultation Rerunning a consultation relies on the answers recorded by using the BACKUP option RULE TYPE specifies the text to be put in the Rule T ype property when a rule object is first created There is no default This option can have any of the Rule T ype attributes For more information See Chapter 13 Rule in the Aion D evelopment System G eneral Reference 10 44 User s Guide SAVE DELETED LINES SEPARATORS TAB WIDTH Customizing profiles controls whether deleted lines are kept in the paste buffer in AionD S on the PC Thedefault is OFF T his option can have one of the following values OFF deleted lines are not saved in the past buffer ON deleted lines are saved in the paste buffer a DECIMAL Specifies
223. hows a sample selection criteria statement purchased yes Specifying multiple Using the AND statement you can combine selection criteria statements criteria purchased yes and pay_method is cash Using theor statement you can set multiple conditions one of which must be met purchased no or pay_method is credit You can combine the OR and AND statements purchased no or pay_method is credit and credit is good Only those records where the field purchased S no or the value of the field pay_method iS credit and the value of the field credit is good are selected and copied into AionD S AionD S does not select or copy into memory any record that does not meet these criteria Access method is If the Access M ethod is VSAM and you retrieve records from a KSDS you VSAM can write the Selection Criteria to limit the number of records retrieved from the file Specify a field in the K ey Fields or Alternate K ey Field property 7 34 User s Guide Properties available in the class Consider the following properties Class Definition file vsam noattr of record firstname is string 10 lastname is string 30 department is string 20 salary is real 8 2 end Selection Criteria department SALES and salary gt 50000 00 Key Field department With this Selection Criteria AionD S first selects all records from the file where the department field is sales After retrieving these records AionD S app
224. ic 7 20 User s Guide Properties available in the class Remote requests travel acrossa VTAM link before CICS or IM S executes them These requests are synchronized with message traffic and can be recovered in the event of a system failure T he following requests are always local m AionDS MVS requests to D B2 Oracle and IDM S m AionDS VM requests to SQ L D S and O racle Working with External Databases 7 21 Properties available in the class Database SQL only Purpose jo The D atabase property is user specified and indicates the default name of the SQL database AionD S uses this name to locate and establish a connection with SQL 7 22 User s Guide Properties available in the class External Source Specification Generating the statement When AionD S generates a class definition use the External Source Specification property to specify asource The External Source Specification property contains a statement that specifies the kind of source and its location For example you can use the following specification to generate a class from a COBO L copy file that contains a record definition cobol import from ce371xx cobol copy prog_l1 For more information See Appendix A of the 1 0 Reference for external sourcing syntax To generate the statement automatically specify a D ata File N ame for dBASE or T able N ame for SQL and select the Import definition command W hen executing the D atabase mport defini
225. ick on the Directories list boxes directory name All knowledge bases available in the selected directory display in the Knowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base FN ote If you check Read only access you can only browse not modify the knowledge base 3 6 User s Guide Saving a knowledge base Saving a knowledge base W hat to do gt Tosavework in progress to disk select File Save or click the save icon in the button bar AionD S saves to disk any changes to knowledge base objects you saved with O bject Save AionD S also prompts you to save any unsaved objects Alternative AionD S prompts you to save your work To specify prompt intervals select Settings D isplay and specify the interval in minutes in the Auto Save field To deactivate auto save enter 0 Save your knowledge base periodically U sing O bject Save to save changes to objects does not update the knowledge base stored on disk Export your knowledge base periodically Exporting a knowledge base saves it in an external file format For more information See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S for details about the D isplay Settings dialog Caution If you save objects with syntax errors AionD S does not prompt you to resolve the errors before saving the knowledge base Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 7 Closing the current knowledge base Closing the current knowle
226. ide for T SL text Because of this limitation we recommend that you use 10 point System monospace type for the KDL and T SL properties Check All Resolutions to list all fonts available to your system along with sizein points and character size in parentheses Check Outline to list all fonts available to your system including outline fonts T he outline fonts have an asterisk next to them in the T ypeface list box 6 Click Set T extW indows using T extW indows using T SL display with the Sytem monospaced font by TSL default To override this default 1 Create your text windows as instances of a subclass of the T extW indow Class Specialize the W henO pened method to set the font to proportional Include the following in the W henO pened method GetFontInfo Typeface FontStyle Width Height SetFontInfo FN_SYSPROPORTIONAL Fontstyle Width Height Customizing AionDS 10 5 Customizing AionDS windows Customizing the message and button bars W hat to do You can control whether the message bar and button bar are on or off and where they display on the screen To set these options 1 Select Settings D isplay The D isplay Settings window displays Display Settings Button bar Message bar Oof OLeft Right Ooff OTop Bottom C Hide on run C Hide on run Use 3D controls Tab width 4 MRU O 9 4 st ae Auto Save J At run time 2 In the button bar group click one of the following radio buttons
227. ield AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new menu item instance name Working with the Window Editor 6 55 Building pull down menus 6 56 User s Guide oN O oO A 10 11 12 13 14 To create a new class for the menu item you are creating click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays In the N ame field enter a name for the new class In the O wner field select the parent class of your new class Click N ew to return to the M enu Items dialog In the Instance N ame field enter the menu item s instance name In the M enu Item Text field specify the text that displays for this menu item in the pull down menu M Tip To make letter in the menu item text part of a mnemonic enter a tilde directly in front of that letter See Adding mnemonics to controls on page 106 In the Short Cut Key field select the short cut key combination you can press to execute this menu item In the Styles group define the type of menu item such as a separator line or whether the menu item can be immediately selected when displayed Check the Edit System M enu check box to add menu items to the system menu TheM enu Item List shows the current order of the menu itemsin the pull down menus You can use the M enu Item List and push buttons on the right side to do the following change menu items create pull down menu selections append a menu item after another one Insert a menu it
228. ilding character based applications Valid values Outline Valid values A 28 User s Guide Identifies the purpose of the window such as to display a prompt answer or constraint The window type determines several characteristics of a window such as when it displays and whether the user can enter information in the window You can specify one of the following values T hese types are explained in the Creating new windows on pageA 18 ANSWER EXPLAIN OPTIONS MENU BROWSE FUNCTIONKEYS PROM PT BROW SEFILE GRAPHIC SELECTION CERTAINTY INFORMATION SELECTIONIN PUT CHOICES INPUT SUMMARY COMMAND LINE KDL TEXT CONFIRM MENU MESSAGE TEXTEDITINGKEYS CONSTRAINT MESSAGE LINE DESCRIPTION OBJECTS MENU The Outline field specifies the kind of border you want around the window For example you can specify FULL BO xX to place a full box around the window or NONE to hide the outline T his property can have one of the following values Value Description BOTTOM LEFT lines display on the bottom and the left side of the field BOTTOM LINE _line displays on the bottom of the field Continued Continued Value Building character based applications Description BOTTOM RIGHT FULL BOX TOP LINE HORIZONTAL LINES LEFT LINE NONE OPEN BOTTOM OPEN LEFT OPEN RIGHT OPEN TOP RIGHT LINE TOP LEFT TOP LINE TOP RIGHT UNDERLINE VERTICAL LINES lines display on the bottom and the right
229. ile option 10 34 User s Guide Customizing profiles Changing system settings W hat to do User Name 1 To change the system settings select Settings System The System Settings window displays System Settings User Name Anonymous Graphics Driver GREN ADS Swapper Threshold o Print Page Length 66 Page Yvidth 76 Error Message C Off C On Code only Text only Load All States Check All Auto Export O 2 Change the desired settings 3 Click Set Reult The current system settings are replaced specifies the name of the user T he default is the name of the last user to perform a save or export If the U ser N ameis blank AionD S prompts you for a user name during the first knowledge base operation This field sets the USER NAME profile option Customizing AionDS 10 35 Customizing profiles Graphics D river specifies the name of the graphics driver For AionD S graphical development use GRPM ADS Without this as the driver AionD S graph objects are not displayed when running under AionDS For other environments use one of the following drivers GRCO ADS with the letter O not zero specifies the BM Color Graphics Adapter CGA or compatible board Graphs display in red yellow and green on a blue background GRCOI ADS with the letter O not zero specifiesthe BM Color Graphics Adapter CGA or compatible board This driver is recommended for monochrome monitors Graphs di
230. in the spreadsheet application in which it was created During runtime you can click the right mouse button on the OLE frame A pop up menu displays The first menu item is for inserting OLE objects the remaining menu items are specific to the current OLE object Tool bars When an OCX or OLE object is active AionD S displays the OLE application tool bar if one exists H owever make sure the tool bar does not overlay any other controls in the container window Selecting methods and adding functions Selecting methods and adding functions Overview You can add customized methods and functions to controls For example you may select a method and add a function to a menu item to open another window Whattodo 1 To display the M ethods dialog for a window double click theright To display the M ethods dialog for a window double click the right mouse button on the window To display the M ethods dialog for a menu item select the menu item with the mouse Edit Method Method Class Selected 2 In theEdit M ethod group select the method to modify M Tip Only certain methods are available for each object 3 Click OK TheM ethods and Function dialogs display Working with the Window Editor 6 97 Selecting methods and adding functions Method WhenHecpeNewMiChosen GreceryStandar Functee WhecaRietipeNcwMiChese GrocerySteedendWindaw ae Feaction Arguments Locet Variables is pointer to Monultem
231. include such interface elements as push buttons menu items radio buttons text windows and scroll bars Controls open when the top level window in which they display opens Desktop window T he parent window for top level windows is the D esktop window which represents the physical screen AionD S automatically creates and opens the Desktop window when required by the system This usually occurs when a standard window starts T op level windows created without a parent are children of the D esktop window The Desktop window opens child windows You can customize the D esktop window for error processing as well as define the initial size of standard windows and dialog boxes as a fraction of the Desktop window s size For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about customizing D esktop windows Working with the Window Editor 6 5 Procedure for building the graphical user interface Procedure for building the graphical user interface Overview T his section contains general procedures for building the graphical user interface windows dialogs and controls Building the To build the graphical user interface graphical interface create the knowledge base build the knowledge base s application window build other windows and dialogs 6 6 User s Guide Procedure for building the graphical user interface Procedure for building new windows dialogs and controls To build new windows
232. indow shows sets of instances that match the criteria of a pattern matching rule Each Selected Bindings entry shows the following information Orderby shows the integer expression from the orderby clause Recency shows the relative point at which an instance in a binding was changed H igher numbers indicate that an instance in the binding has changed more recently than instances in a binding with a lower number Inhibited shows bindings blocked by an exists clause T he following example shows a Selected Bindings entry 9 12 User s Guide Changed instances property Matches property Effect of Assignment property Delayed Rules property Forward Fire Agenda property Displaying an object Selected Bindings node_0001 flight_0001 orderby 2154 Recency 138 lt lt Inhibited node_0003 flight_0020 orderby 2257 Recency 138 node_0003 flight_0022 The C hanged instances property is available only if dynamic instances are used The property lists changed instances O ften the changed instances are newly created dynamic instances The M atches property is only available if pattern matching rules are used The property lists all the instances that match the criteria specified in the pattern matching rule at the time AionD S tries the rule T hese instances match the criteria for individual instances T hese instances are used by AionD S to form bindings or groups of instances that together meet all the cr
233. ing GUI Applications T utorial Aion product The AionD S documentation set uses the following abbreviations for Aion abbreviations products Aion product Abbreviation Aion Development System AionDS Aion Execution System AionES Component Aion Execution System CAES M ultitasking Aion Execution System MAES Aion D evdopment System Application AD SAPI Programming Interface Aion High Peformance O ption H PO Aion Cooperative Processing O ption CPO Callable Aion Building System CABS Aion Code Integration O ption CIO xii User s Guide Conventions TheAionD S documentation set uses the following conventions Typeface T he documentation set uses these typeface conventions Style of type What it represents Boldface new term and its definition Italic manual titles m syntax variables emphasis m _foraign language phrases Monospace code examples m prompts and messages m examples of user input in procedures for example The documentation set uses these icons Symbol Meaning Alternative identifies an alternative to the previous procedure choice is usually a matter of personal preference neither offers a distinct advantage Caution helps you avoid mistakes that can produce unexpected or undesirable results runtime errors and losing work for example fl Exception indicates an exception to common functionality or behavior For more information identifies a
234. ing automatically 6 44 multiple line text attribute 0 27 N name field new object window 5 5 of new object window 2 40 select objects window 4 6 new display 0 11 window in screen 0 21 new display window 0 11 objects list box 0 11 new hot region command 6 13 new image command 6 13 new image dialog 6 108 new object window 2 40 new window command 6 13 dialog 6 14 new window dialog definition 0 21 no relation in graph 4 22 noupdate specification 7 39 O object close 5 15 close without saving 5 16 collect 4 2 4 29 creating 5 4 cut and paste 5 19 delete 5 17 determining if changed 5 25 editing 5 33 editor 1 14 editor open 5 9 editor opening more than one 5 10 list 4 2 open object window 5 10 properties close 5 37 properties definition 1 9 properties opening 5 35 saving 5 6 saving with errors 5 6 specialize 5 40 object list by details 4 16 by graph 4 22 by hierarchy 4 18 listing parents 4 20 concealing owned objects 4 19 instances 4 20 listing knowledge base hierarchy 4 20 navigating 4 20 owned objects 4 19 dots methods 4 20 by icon 4 14 by name 4 15 expand collapse branches 4 19 O bject List window definition 4 1 object lists change format 4 28 object pull down close 5 15 collect 4 29 export object 5 47 import object 5 49 new 2 40 5 4 open 5 9 save 5 6 screen 0 7 objects and controls 6 87 changing in included library 1 3
235. ing changes to the change set For more information See Chapter 8 T racking Changes in a Knowledge Base to learn about Change M anagement procedures and menu commands as well as to see an example of using C hange M anagement 3 26 User s Guide Knowledge base utilities Knowledge base utilities Use the File U tilities to perform the following functions on an existing knowledge base Command Function Page Copy makes a copy of the knowledge base you can specifya 3 28 new name version and path U pdate creates a copy of a knowledge base and incrementsthe 3 31 version number you can specify a new path or name Delete deletes a knowledge base from disk 3 33 M ove moves a knowledge base to anew path or renamesitin 3 36 the current directory Prepare strips a knowledge base of any unnecessary text in 3 38 preparation for a production version of the knowledge base Attributes sets a title for the knowledge base and displays 3 41 information such as when the knowledge base was last modified Passwords sets runtime and edit time passwords 3 42 Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 27 Knowledge base utilities Copying a knowledge base W hat to do To makea copy of a knowledge base 1 Open the knowledge base to copy 2 Select File Utilities Copy AionD S displays the C opy Knowledge Base window Copy Knowledge Base Please specify where ta copy the knowledge base Name Yersion pm CHDS70M Knowledge
236. ing procedure 9 2 User s Guide Continued Topic Page Saving objects 9 26 Saving the knowledge base 9 27 Rerunning the knowledge base to verify corrections 9 28 Debugging procedure Debugging procedure Overview To correct the errors in a knowledge base effectively complete the following procedure 1 Run the knowledge base with the debugger For more information See Running a knowledge base with the debugger on page 9 4 2 Find and fix errors in the knowledge base For more information See Finding and fixing errors in the knowledge base on page 9 7 3 Periodically abort the execution save the changed objects and knowledge base and run the knowledge base to verify that the errors are fixed For more information a see Aborting execution on page 9 25 a see Saving objects on page 9 26 a see Saving the knowledge base on page 9 27 see Rerunning the knowledge base to verify corrections on page 9 28 To perform most debug operations you execute the commands in the Run pull down menu Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 3 Running a knowledge base with the debugger Running a knowledge base with the debugger Procedure To run the knowledge base with the debugger complete the following steps 1 Select FileRun TheRun window displays 2 Select the Enable debugger radio button 3 Click Run Reult The following actions occur a the knowledge base is executed a theRun pul
237. ionD S adds the selected libraries to the Include Libraries list Click Done AionD S imports the knowledge base and adds the libraries found in the Include Libraries list Managing libraries Deleting libraries W hat to do 1 Select FileLibraries The M anage K nowledge Base Library List dialog displays Manage Knowledge Base Library List Available Libraries Include Libraries DYNAMIC v0 01 GROCERY v0 01 WINLIB SYBTST v0 01 Add gt Remove 2 In thelnclude Libraries list select the libraries to delete 3 Click Remove AionD S deletes the selected libraries from the Include Libraries list 4 Click Done AionDS removes the selected libraries from the knowledge base and the knowledge base is rermported Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 15 Managing libraries Updating modified libraries to knowledge bases Overview Changes made to objects in libraries are not automatically updated to the same libraries included in knowledge bases W hen you open a knowledge base with modified libraries AionD S does not update the knowledge base s included libraries To update the included libraries import the knowledge base or include the libraries in the knowledge base again W hat to do To import a knowledge base 1 Open the knowledge base 2 Select File mport to import the knowledge base and update the libraries To include libraries again 1 Open the knowledge base that includes the modified libraries 2 Selec
238. ionship to the graph from the View pull down menu W hen you select knowledge base objects in an object graph window the View pull down menu displays the possible relationships AionD S grays any relationships that you cannot graph for the selected objects Review To review how to open and change an object list by graph window open a window like the one in the previous example using the following steps 1 Open a knowledge base 2 Select the List O bjects button from the button bar 3 In the Select O bjects window indicate the states in graph format 4 24 User s Guide Object listing by graph 4 Select the states to graph 5 Select the relationship to the graph from the View pull down menu Owns relationship To look at the O wns relationship for the selected states select V iew O wns In the following example note how the object list displays the objects that each selected state owns Object Graph fyprekesel ai m i fe poadsel fe cessMenuMainDish are cessMenuBeverage I Pe cessLunchSideDish i pe cessLunchDessert pPracessDinner Vegetable iProcessDinner Starch i cessDinnerSalacsoun cessDinnerDessert cessDinner Appetizer cessBreaktastSideDish TheM ain state owns the makesel and loadsel functions The CreateShoppingList class owns 11 rules Work with Object Lists 4 25 Object listing by graph Uses relationship You discovered that the C reateShoppingLis
239. isplay Device Type Pc25 Strings Masks Input Yes Vee Date Unknown Unknown ke No Time ie Select s ae Separators _ _ _ File Yes T File Date Decimal i File No F File Time Thousands f 2 Change the desired settings 3 Click Set Reult Thecurrent environment settings are replaced Comparison Comparison T olerance specifies the tolerance used in the comparison of real Tolerance numbers T he default is 0 0000000000 AionD S stores real numbers with a floating point representation which can cause numbers to be stored in a slightly different way than they are entered in the knowledge base For example 10 may be stored as 09999998 The Comparison T olerance option specifies the threshold within which AionD S considers real numbers to be equal 10 20 User s Guide Interface Customizing profiles On the mainframe AionD S also uses the comparison tolerance when displaying real numbers in the Consultation monitor For example with a comparison tolerance of 0001 AionD S displays the number 09999998 as 10 Setting the Comparison T olerance option ensures that comparisons are compatible in different environments For example you can set this option to 0001 for compatibility between the PC and the mainframe This field sets the COM PARISON TOLERANCE profile option Interface indicates the type of user interface that knowledge bases should use at runtime and edit time
240. ist window File name A BAES EXE Directory is CAADS 700 Directories A7BAPI DLL A7BCABS DLL A7BCAES EXE A7BCULEXE A7BDB4 DLL A7BDDE DLL A7BGUI EXE L Append to file O Include External 2 UsetheFilename field to specify the file in which to save the object information You can enter a path name or use the D irectories list box to specify a path 3 To print out the object information you can enter the name of your printer which in many installations is LPT 1 or PRN See your operating system documentation to determine the exact name of your printer 4 Toappend the object information to the end of afile select the file then check Append to file 5 To overwrite the contents of a file with the object information select the file and make sure Append to file is unchecked 5 50 User s Guide Printing selected objects 6 To arrange the order in which the object information prints click Sort The Print Format window displays W hen you have changed the print format attributes click O K to return to the Print window 7 To perform any of the following tasks click Format enter header and footer text for each page change page width and length indicate printer type compress output into as few lines as possible add an index to the end of the printout add a table of contents to the end of the printout add an extended table of contents containing entries for all objects to the end of the printout
241. iteria in the rule premise For example the M atches property can show the dynamic instances of the node and flight classes that match the premise of the expand rule The Effect of Assignment property lists the rules associated with the sourced parameter or slot T hese rules fire when the parameter or slot has been assigned a value The D elayed Rules property lists the rules that are delayed because all the premises could not be met within the current scope The Forward Fire Agenda property lists the rules that fire when a forwardchain on request statement is encountered in the Agenda Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 13 Displaying parameter instance and function values Displaying parameter instance and function values Overview For parameters the Value property displays in the Parameter editor For instances and function the Values property displays in the Instance and Function editors For the Function editor Values property the input arguments output arguments and local values properties display M Tip To display these properties change the editor template by setting up the O bject editor property windows in the desired format then select Settings Set Window T emplate and Settings Save Settings For moreinformation See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S to learn about setting up object editor templates W hat to do To display parameter instance and function values complete the following steps 1 Select the par
242. itions For automatic data integration at runtime set up the following definitions at edit time an access method for the class properly defined class properties matching external database and database related class properties 7 4 User s Guide Access method class Persistent data Access method configuration Any class meeting these requirements is called an access method class The figure on page 7 10 shows a rule AionD S uses to process an access method class When executing arule AionD S accesses the specified external database and reads specified records matching the selection criteria The record fields correspond to sots in the access method class Persistent data is the instances of an access method The slots holding the record fields are available for use by AionD S in the same way as normal slots and parameters Instances of an access method class reside in an external database AionD S does not delete these instances after the application terminates Persistent data is available after an application terminates and remains available to AionD S as if the persistent data were an AionD S object For example fields held in slots are used in a rule or displayed in a message After the application terminates AionD S erases or returns the previously accessed records to the database depending on what you specify in the U pdate property Working with External Databases 7 5 Defining an access method Defining an access
243. itions for both the row and depth of the same window Building character based applications Modifying the selected window s text properties T he Window T ext dialog lets you edit the fixed text of the window currently selected The Window T ype must be T ext Whattodo it 1 Select a text window using the Windows dialog or the Layout window 2 Display the Window T ext dialog by selecting Screen W indow T ext The W indow T ext dialog displays Ca ka gt Enter the text to appear in the window 4 Select Screen R efresh or press F6 Alternative Select File Save Reult The Layout window displays the window with its new text Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 33 Building character based applications Modifying window colors Overview The Window Colors dialog controls the colors of the currently selected window Whattodo 1 Select a window using the W indows dialog or the Layout window 2 Display the Window Colors dialog by selecting Screen W indow C olors TheWindow Colors dialog displays Window Colors Region Text Title Outline Foreground Background Cyan t K Bright Red Blue O Blink i Magenta Green Cyan FTite _ White Red PemeSample text 3 Indicate the area of the window in which to set colors by selecting a Region radio button T he other controls in the W indow Colors dialog reflect the color characteristics of the s
244. itor 6 3 Overview Overview Knowledge base s application window Other windows and dialogs 6 4 User s Guide W hen you start a knowledge base the knowledge base s entry state executes Use the entry state to open the application window from which to access all knowledge base functions T he knowledge base application window serves the same purpose as the AionD S primary window From the application window you can open other windows to perform specific functions For example you can select File O pen in a graphics program to open a dialog from which you can select a file to open and modify AionD S knowledge bases distinguish between the following types of windows m top level windows control windows desktop window This distinction is based on the way AionD S opens the windows Top level windows st tst i i SC S Top level windows are opened directly by knowledge base logic There are two types of top level windows Standard windows have menu bars and allow the user to choose between anumber of application features or functions Generally Dialog boxes do not have menu bars and exist to prompt the user for specific types of information Dialog boxes open in response to user selections from a standard window menu bar or other dialog boxes Overview Control windows Control windows or controls display in top level windows Controls allow users to select options or enter information Controls
245. ix ODBC and Oracle AionD S does not map the key fields automatically when importing from Sybase T he following is the syntax for SQ L key fields keyy key2 keyn key nameof theSQL table columns that an index specifies If the index specifies more than one column insert a plus sign between the column names Example An SQL table has the following columns intl int2 txtl txt2 Access method is VSAM Properties available in the class T hese columns are indexed as follows Index Columns indxl intl indx2 int2 txt2 To map these indexes and columns into the K ey Fields property correctly intl int2 txt2 If the Access M ethod is VSAM and thefile isa KSD S you can specify one key field To update the file use the key field Thekey field must reference a mapped slot in the access method W hen loading records use the Key field to limit the number of records retrieved from the file see the Selection Criteria property W hen updating records use the key field to locate the record to update Working with External Databases 7 31 Properties available in the class Load Mode Purpose TheLoad M ode property is user specified and indicates whether AionD S automatically loads data or uses the DBMSLOAD command Valid values You can have the following values AUTOLOAD AionD S automatically loads the data for aclass into memory This entry is the default ONREQUEST W hen encountering aDBMS L
246. ject and returning to the calling object Going to the next break point or default interruption point Continuing execution gt To execute the current object and return to the calling object select Run Pop Reult Execution is topped immediately after the call statement in the calling object M Tip If the current object was not called by another object execution continues until a breakpoint or default interruption point is reached or an action is required of the user Example If function A calls function B and you are currently in function B selecting Pop executes function B and stops just after the call statement in function A gt Togo to thenext breakpoint default interruption point or the point at which an action is required of the user select Run Go Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 11 Displaying an object Displaying an object Overview Certain objects display properties that are only available when the debugger is running The following table shows the properties that are available only when the debugger is running and the corresponding object Object Properties Rules Bindings Bindings and matches C hanged instances Slots Effect of Assignment Parameter Effect of Assignment States Delayed Rules Forward Fire agenda Pending list Functions Values property locals input and output parameters Bindings property T he Bindings property is only available when pattern matching rules are executed The w
247. knowledge bases A library isa collection of objects that you can include in a knowledge base You can include any knowledge base as a library in another knowledge base A library can include all types of objects In a knowledge base you can create objects that are owned by library objects such as a subclass of a library class U sing knowledge bases as libraries is an easy way to reuse objects and quickly build other knowledge bases Restrictions The following restrictions apply to libraries a Thenumber of objectsin alibrary must be equal to or less than 65 535 m A knowledge base can include up to 255 libraries a Libraries are always external to the knowledge base a When you include a library in a knowledge base you cannot change the objects in the included library from within the knowledge base a When you include a library in a knowledge base the library s entry state and the entry state s objects are not included Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 3 AionDS concepts Inference engine Knowledge base user interfaces 1 4 User s Guide The other part of AionD S is the inference engine T he inference engineis an integrated collection of problem solving algorithms T hese problem solving algorithms process the knowledge base according to its application and control knowledge to compute application results The inference engine can be applied to many different kinds of applications and cannot be modified Theinference
248. l down menu displaysin the menu bar a theCall stack object list displays m theBreakpoints window displays a theTrace window displays a the execution stops at the beginning of the entry state agenda 9 4 User s Guide Run menu summary Run menu summary Step I nto Step O ver Pop Go Set Breakpoint Clear Breakpoint List Breakpoint Call Stack TheRun pull down menu contains the following commands executes current statement and stops on the first statement of called object executes current statement executes called object and stops on next statement in the current object completes execution of current property and stops on object that called the current object executes knowledge base until a subsequent breakpoint is reached or it completes execution To set abreakpoint specify an object property at which the debugger should stop when executing an application First select the object on which to stop then select Run Set breakpoint Clear Breakpoint clears a previously set breakpoint M ultiple breakpoints can be cleared by selecting multiple objects and selecting Run Clear Break Point To quickly clear all breakpoints select Run List Breakpoint select Edit Select All and select Run Clear Breakpoint List all the breakpoints that are currently set Display the current call stack The default call stack view is a details view which will display the object property and row col information Debugging
249. le name of the bitmap icon or mouse pointer that is linked to an image instance W hat to do 1 Select Screen O pen Image The O pen Image dialog displays Open Image Image Instances bit Bitmap chkbtn Bitmap PTR_ARROW MousePointer PTR_IBEAM MousePointer PTR_SIZE MousePointer PTR_SIZENESW MousePointer List Option X Bitmap X Icon IX Mouse Pointer Select the image instance from the I mage Instances list 3 To limit thelist of image instances according to the type of graphic bitmaps icons mouse pointers select the appropriate check boxes in the List O ption group 6 110 User s Guide Changing instances linked to bitmaps icons or mouse pointers 4 Click Open Thelmage Slots dialog for the selected image instance displays Image Slots Instance Name biti Owning Class Bitmap File Name c bitmaps example bmp User Slots 5 Toreamean image instance name enter anew name in the Instance N ame field and the file name and path of the graphic file in the File Name field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new image instance name Delete 6 You can assign an image instance to another image subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the Owning Class field AionDS automatically updates parent and child links with the new image instance name 7 You can change the slot values owned by the instance s parent class Click User Slot to
250. lect the TSL radio button you can enter T SL text into the T ext field If you select the Attached O bject radio button attach an object with the desired text to display in the label or text window To attach an object to the label or text window click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 In the T ext field change the text to the name that you want displayed in the label or text window You can also add mnemonics to a label window For moreinformation See Adding mnemonics to controls on page 6 106 10 11 12 13 14 Building label and text windows In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the label or text window For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the label or text window s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Click Back Color to select the background color for the label or text window For more information See Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 Click T ext Color to select the color for the text in the label or text window For moreinformation See Changing window
251. lect the properties to open You can select more than one 4 Click Open AionD S opens windows for the selected properties You can change information in the object properties To change inherited properties specialize them For more information See Specializing and unspecializing object properties on page 5 42 Some property windows represent multiple properties Some property windows consst of operating system controls representing more than one property The Property List window displays the names of individual properties In some cases more than one entry in the Properties list box opens the same property window Property window names display on the Property pull down menu The dynamic list at the bottom of the Property pull down menu shows all open properties and the selected property is checked Editing an object Closing property windows W hat to do W hat happens To close a property window double click on the system menu icon of the property window Alternative Press SHIFT F4 To closeall open property windows in the active object editor select Property C lose All W hen you close a property window changes are not saved or discarded You have hidden the property window If you reopen that property window the changes you made remain current You cannot save individual properties T o save changes to object properties save the object itself Working with Objects 5 37 Editing an object Makin
252. ledge _ F Read only ac cas Use the D irectories list box to select the directory in which the knowledge base is located Select the knowledge base Click Delete The confirmation dialog displays Reult If you click D elete on the confirmation dialog AionD S deletes the selected knowledge base from disk and returns you to the primary window If you click Cancel from the confirmation dialog AionD S returns you to the D elete K nowledge Base window Name field Current path Knowledge Bases and Directories list boxes Knowledge base utilities To enter the name of the knowledge base in this field a select a knowledge base name from the K nowledge Bases list box or a typethe full path and knowledge base name To change directories enter the full path name to the directory including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash Check that the Version field is correct then click D elete Enter the verion number of the knowledge base to delete If you select a knowledge base to delete from the Knowledge Bases list box that version number displays in the Version field The current path displays to the right of the Version field To change the current path use the Directories list box or the N ame field When you enter the full path and knowledge base name AionD S ignores the current path By default the current path is one of the following from the command
253. les In the List Box Styles group define the display properties of thelist box such as allowing multiple selections and sorting the list alphabetically For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles To attach an object to the list box click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape you want displayed when the mouse pointer enters the list box For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the list box s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Click OK Thechanges are applied and the list box displays Select a method and add a function to the list box For moreinformation See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 37 Building multi column list boxes Building multi column list boxes Introduction A multi column list box displays instances in a class The columns display the dots within the class while the rows display the instance data During runtime you can select rows but you cannot enter or change the text in the rows
254. lies the remaining criteria for example consider only those records where the salary field exceeds 50000 00 Alternatively consider the following Selection Criteria property department gt SALES and salary gt 50000 00 AionD S selects and retrieves all records whose department field is greater than sales a KSD S stores records in key sequenced order AionDS applies the remaining criteria to these retrieved records T he use of the Selection Criteria property on aKSDS file is as follows f you do not specify a key field in the K ey Fields or Alternate K ey Field properties AionD S applies the Selection Criteria to all records in the file Working with External Databases 7 35 Properties available in the class 7 36 User s Guide If you specify a key field in the K ey Fields or Alternate K ey Field properties AionD S uses the key field to select the records to retrieve AionD S retrieves only those records whose key field complies with the following keyfield gt gt keyvalue equals keyvalue gt is greater than or equal to keyvalue gt is greater than keyvalue Properties available in the class SQL Select SQL only Purpose t S TheSQL Select property is the string used by a class to acquire its data from a server Working with External Databases 7 37 Properties available in the class Table Name SQL only Purpose TheT able N ame property is a user specified property indicatin
255. ll Stack and Breakpoints windows display For moreinformation See Chapter 9 Working with the D ebugger A 48 User s Guide Running character based applications Backup Rerun In the Run window the following options in the Backup Rerun group are available only when you run a character based knowledge base Store Answers Preload Answers specifies whether user sourced answers are recorded during knowledge base execution The ability to back up and the ability to rerun a knowledge base both rely upon answers being recorded If you select the check box answers are recorded AionD S saves answersin memory For very long knowledge base executions saving this information slows the speed of the execution If you deselect the check box answers are not recorded This field sets the BACKUP ENABLE profile option specifies whether to load and display answers to questions during the back up or rerun of a knowledge base If you deselect this check box prior answers are not displayed T he knowledge base execution only stops to display messages and graphs If you select this check box prior answers are loaded in the window and the object displays The user can change the answer before continuing This field sets the PRELOAD AN SWERS profile option Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 49 Running character based applications A 50 User s Guide Index 6 600 export profile option 10 46
256. ls to add to the group box and specify the group box as the parent window of each control Setting the tabbing order i stst lt isS gt Tose theinitial tabbing order for controls in a group box add the controls to the group box in the desired sequence To change the tabbing order use the O rder Children dialog to organize the controls in the group box in the desired order For more information See Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups on page 6 103 Building pull down menus Building pull down menus Overview A menu item is a command in a pull down menu that executes an action You build pull down menus to perform complicated tasks Pull down menus contain a series of menu items When you select a menu item a method and function executes The method and function usually open another window or execute a sequence of actions such as printing a file or searching for a specific string W hat to do 1 Select Screen M enu Items TheM enu Items dialog displays A Reminder M ake sure that a standard window or dialog is selected Owning Class Menultem New Class Styles F Checked Menu Item Text l Disabled F Separator Short Cut Key e l No Open Menu Item List _F Ole iPMenu Ole IP Menu Instance Name I Append Change Delete Add Child l Edit System Menu Delete All 2 Toassign amenu item instance to another class enter a new class name in the Instance N ame f
257. m at runtime adding any new data items in SystemT opic Specify the data item name in the Item field Select the data format in the Format field M Tip The format is either text dde FORMAT TEXT or AionDS binary dde FORMAT AIONBINARY Select the linked object type in the T ype field M Tip Thetypeis either a slot or parameter Specify the linked object s name in the N ame field Select the linked object s parent in the O wner field Click OK Working with the Window Editor 6 131 Building a DDE system Modifying data items Usethe Topics dialog to edit or delete data items 1 To edit a data item select the item name and click Edit Item The Edit Item dialog displays 2 TheEdit Item dialog contains exactly the same fields as the N ew Item dialog Change the desired fields and click OK Reult Theitem fields change and you return to the T opics dialog 1 To deete a data item select the item name and click Deleteltem A confirmation window displays 2 Click Delete to delete the item Reult The item is deleted and you return to the T opics dialog 3 Click Cance to cancel the deletion Reult The item isnot deleted and you return to the T opics dialog 6 132 User s Guide In this chapter Chapter 7 Working with External Databases This chapter shows you how to define database access methods to store and retrieve information from databases external to AionD S You can access QSAM dBASE SQL and VSAM databases T
258. method W hat to do To use the Automatic D atabase Interface AD I to store and retrieve information from an external database define a database access method To definean access method 1 Specify the access method of a class Specify the database file to access 3 Map the external record to AionDS through the Class D efinition property and through slots in the class The Class D efinition property maps the external data structure and the slots map the individual fields of the record Use one of the following methods to map the external record to AionDS through the Class D efinition property and the slots in a Class m Create the external database Generate the Class D efinition and corresponding slots from the external database Specify the access method and database attributes Generate the Class D efinition and slots Create the external database from the Class D efinition and slots 4 Specify Selection Criteria to limit the number of records read into AionD S memory during data access 5 Specify any pertinent load update or integrity information 7 6 User s Guide Changing the access method Changing the access method W hat to do 1 Open the appropriate class 2 Select the new access method from D atabase access in the D atabase menu Caution AionD S might delete information specific to the previous access method If so perform the following steps 1 Map thenew external record to AionD S through the Clas
259. ming information is written to the trace file T he default option is off unchecked If unchecked Timing information is not written to the system log file If checked each entry in the trace file is preceded by a system timestamp The time displays in milliseconds This field sets the TRACE TIMING profile option Trace and the AionD S profile If the trace filename in the Run Files window has pound signs in the filename AionD S creates a unique trace file for each knowledge base execution and for each session of AionD S running concurrently If the trace file name in the Run Files window is blank AionD S does not produce a file even if the trace is turned on D ebugger controls whether the user can enter debug mode during knowledge base execution T he default is D isabled T his option can have one of the following values Disabled cannot enter debug mode during knowledge base execution Enabled can enter debug mode during knowledge base execution This field sets the DEBUG MODE profile option HPO emulation controls whether checking for H PO compatibility is performed during knowledge base development The default is OFF unchecked If unchecked H PO compatibility restrictions are not applied to knowledge base development and execution If checked H PO compatibility restrictions are applied to knowledge base development and execution T his field sets the H IGH PERFORM ANCE profile option Customizing AionDS 10 29 C
260. n for the CreateShoppingList state not the text CreateShoppingList The rules CreateShoppingList owns are listed AionDS GROCERY2 v0 02 File Edit Object Settings Window View Help Knowledge Base Hierarchy BEWINLIB sti E ConvertPackages ProcessDinnerDessert ProcessDinnerVegetable EjProcessBreakfastSideDish JProcessDinnerSaladSoup JProcessLunchDessert jProcessDinnerAppetizer JProcessDinnerStarch ProcessLunchSideDish BUpdateRecipeValueList DishDialogBox DialogBox Touring AionDS 2 13 Exploring the Knowledge Base Hierarchy window What slots and methods does a class have W hat to do You just used the mouse to see the objects a state owns Now usethe keyboard to look at a class hierarchy 1 Press the arrow keys to move the focus the dotted box to the M enu Class 2 Pres ALT V to see the view pull down menu N ow use the up and down arrow keys to select a viewing option 3 Select Slots M ethods and press ENTER Alternative Press ALT and click the M enu class mini icon Reult TheM enu class slots and methods display Knowledge Base Hierarchy BAINLIB BIGROCERY2 main ElCreateShoppingList EUpdateRecipevalueList DishDialogBox DialogBox W GroceryStandardWindow StandardWindow Ingredient fenu Beverage MMenuDlgPtr M OpenAl MhenDeleted Day Servings PP OpenMenu MMainDish MGetMenuPtr MResetSelections Meal Pe NextMeal MWhenCreated Breakfast Menu Dinner Menu Lunch Men
261. n select View I nstances T he class instances display in the hierarchy Alternative Point to the class icon or mini icon and press SHIFT CLICK or SHIFT PLUS on the number keypad To conceal instances select View N o O bjects Alternative To conceal instances for a single class press ALT CLICK or SH IFT MINUS on the number keypad To list an object s parent in the K nowledge Base H ierarchy window select View Show Parent The object s parents display in the hierarchy To list a knowledge base object hierarchy displaying a library or class structure select one of the following View H ierarchy Library to view the library hierarchy View H ierarchy C lass to view the class hierarchy Use the mouse to move the selection from object to object or use the following keys to move the focus T he focus is the dotted box or a raised Object listing by hierarchy box in three dimensional mode that surrounds a selection before you highlight it by clicking or pressing the space bar Up and Downarrow moves the focus from context to context up and down the knowledge base hierarchy Right arrow moves the focus into the set of owned objects or the set of class member objects O nce the focusisin a set the right arrow moves through each object in the set Left arrow moves the focus up to an object s parent Work with Object Lists 4 21 Object listing by graph Object listing by graph Overview The most powerful wa
262. nDS 10 23 Customizing profiles Unknown Select contains the string that AionD S recognizes as an unknown response T he default unknown string is Unknown in AionD S T his field sets the UNKNOWN INPUT profile option specifies the character string to use to select values in selection input windows Thestring cannot contain more than five characters T his field sets the SELECT IN PUT profile option Separator 10 24 User s Guide D ecimal T housands specifies a single character to display as the decimal point in a real number T his field sets the DECIM AL SEPARAT OR profile option specifies a single character to display to separate thousands 000 in anumber T his field sets the TH OU SAN DS SEPARAT OR profile option Customizing profiles Changing database settings W hat to do dBase Version 1 To change the database settings select Settings D atabase T he D atabase Settings window displays Database Settings dBASE Version iv SQL Interface Database Access String IDMS Database Dictionary Node Name Subschema Maximum Record Length 4096 2 Change the desired settings 3 Click Set Reult The current database settings are replaced dBase Version specifies the version of the dBASE software used with AionD S The default is IV This option can have one of the following values I specifies use of dBASE IIl IV specifies use of dBASE IV This field sets the DBASE V
263. nd adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 47 Building radio buttons and check boxes Building radio buttons and check boxes Overview Radio buttons are graphical buttons that represent a set of related but mutually exclusive options you can select only one button at atime You can use group boxes or the Group style to organize radio buttons A check box is a graphical button that represents a single option that you can turn on or off W hat to do 1 Create and resize a radio button or check box 2 Doubleclick on the radio button or check box The Radio Button Slots or Check Box Slots dialog displays 6 48 User s Guide 3 4 Building radio buttons and check boxes Check Box Slots Instance Name ftest1 Owning Class CheckBox Basic Window Styles Group l Invisible l Disabled IX Tab Stop No Open l Initially Chosen Text Source Plain Text OTSL Attached Object Text CheckBox Pointer e Font User Slots Attach To rename a radio button or check box instance enter anew namein the Instance N ame field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new radio button or check box instance name You can assign a radio button or check box instance to another radio button or check box subclass by selecting a new subclass name in the Owning Class field AionD S automatically updates parent and child links with the new r
264. ndow displays 2 Enter the number of spaces to insert with the T ab key 3 Click Set Customizing AionDS 10 11 Customizing AionDS windows Customizing window size and position Overview You can customize the size and position of an O bject editor and property windows object List windows and the Window editor To customize and save a window s size and position save it to a template You can set a window template for each type of window For example suppose you customize the C lass editor window and save it as a template The next time you open the Class editor the C lass editor window has the same property windows open The property windows are the same size and in the same place within the Class editor and the state of the scroll bars is the same W hat to do 1 To set awindow template make the window active and customize it 2 Select Settings Set window template The next time you open another window of the same type it looks the same as when you saved it For more information Setting a window template during an AionD S session does not save the changes after you close AionD S To save changes between sessions of AionD S select Settings Save See Saving customized settings on page 10 13 amp Caution To maintain compatibility GUI AionD S has the same property widths as character based AionD S T ext in objects such as rules and messages can only be 50 characters wide for KD L text and 76 characters wide for T SL text B
265. ndow that can act as an anchor for DDE messages from client applications T his section describes how to create topics and data items You can also customize the default processing for server requests for data items For more information See BuildingGU applications Reference to learn how to customize default processing AionD S provides information about its D D E implementation through a System topic You can add data items to the System topic Working with the Window Editor 6 129 Building a DDE system W hat to do Use the T opics dialog to access the N ew Item dialog 1 Select Screen D D E T opics The T opics dialog displays Topics Topic Item Name Item Linked Object DDESystemTopic Formats Formats parameter DDE DDESystemTopic Sysitems Sysitems parameter DDE DDESystemTopic Topics Topics parameter DDE Edit tem Name CA Parent o H Item SSS Format D H n bject Name A Owner M B 6 130 User s Guide 10 11 12 Building a DDE system Specify the instance name for the topic class in the N ame field To create a new topic class for this data item click N ew Class The N ew Class dialog displays Complete the N ew Class dialog For moreinformation See Creating windows dialogs and controls on page 6 14 Select the topic name in the Parent field M Tip To add adata item to SystemT opic select SystemT opic in the Parent field AionD S updates the Sysl tems data ite
266. ndows Displaying bitmap windows Overview A bitmap window defines a location and area in which a bitmap instance displays When you create a bitmap window or dialog box in a standard window and identify the bitmap instance to display the bitmap instance links to abitmap graphic The only type of input that bitmap windows accept is moving the bitmap with scroll bars so there is no processing for you to define You can also display bitmaps as graphical images on push buttons and tools For more information See Building push buttons on page 6 74 and Building tools on atool bar on page 6 62 Creating a bitmap To display graphics in AionD S the graphics must bein a BM P format To graphic create a bitmap graphic you can use any software program that creates graphics in a bitmap BM P format W hat to do 1 Create the bitmap graphic to display 2 Link the bitmap graphic to an instance For more information See Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances on page 6 108 3 Create and resize a bitmap window Double click on the bitmap window T he Bitmap W indow Slots dialog displays 6 66 User s Guide Displaying bitmap windows Bitmap Window Slots Instance Name Owning Class BitmapWindow Basic Window Styles Group l Disabled Invisible No Open Bitmap Window Styles Half Tone Invert l Horizontal Scroll l Stretch Window l Yertical Scroll Stretch Bitmap Border
267. ndows and dialogs desktop window 1 6 User s Guide Knowledge base structure Knowledge base object hierarchy To integrate knowledge base objects that contain application and control logic into a working knowledge base system organize the knowledge base objects in hierarchical structures Knowledge base objects contained in the hierarchies are the following States M ethods Classes Parameters V ocabularies Processes Displays Reports Functions Rules Instances Slots M essages Types independent context Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 7 Knowledge base structure Example O bject hierarchies of the GRO CERY2 knowledge base are shown as follows M GROCERY2 fl Main CreateShoppingList UpdateRecipeValueList f DishDialogBox DialogBox f GroceryStandardVWindow StandardVVindow ilngredient Breakfast Menu f Dinner Menu Lunch Menu f MenuDialogBox DialogBox f MenuOpenDialogBox DialogBox MonoTextV indow TextVVindow Recipe fRecipeDialogBox DialogBox Selections f ShopListDialogBox DialogBox f ShoppingList GlobalParameters States classes and vocabularies are contexts As contexts they are the only objects that can be independent that is start at the top of a tree and not exist under another object For example the M enu class is an independent class the M ain state is an independent state and GlobalParameters is an independent vocabulary You can also create depen
268. ng AionDS 2 17 Running GROCERY Application window Overview AionD S displays the application window and provides you with an execution system that mirrors what the user sees when the knowledge base is delivered For more information See Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level for notes on running a knowledge base on the AionD S desktop Grocery KB Menu Recipe Ingredient ShoppingList Help Exit 2 18 User s Guide What to do Running GROCERY Select M enu O pen TheM enu O pen Selection dialog displays From the M enu O pen Selection dialog select the day of the week and meal time breakfast lunch or dinner for which to select the dishes and click OK The dialog box for that day and meal displays Select the number of servings servings must be greater than or equal to 10 to serve for this meal Select the dishes for this meal T o set up the menu for the next meal time click N ext and repeat this step If you are done setting up the menu for the week click OK The application window displays again You can display a shopping list that shows the amount of each ingredient needed T he shopping list is based on the menu you created for the week To display the shopping list select ShoppingList 0 pen The Shopping List window displays Touring AionDS 2 19 Changing the knowledge base Changing the knowledge base Overview This section contains an exercise that gives you hands on experience cha
269. nging a knowledge base The camp director asks you to modify the GROCERY knowledge base so you can add new recipes to the camp menu You and the director decide on the following concepts Add the N ew menu item to the Recipe pull down menu The N ew menu item displays the Recipe dialog m Usethe Recipe dialog to add new recipes to the camp menu and specify the required ingredients Knowledge base Since you are the knowledge base developer the director has left the exact design design and implementation in your expert hands After a day of designing you decide upon a Knowledge base structure that contains the following a theRecipeN ew menu item which opens the Recipe dialog Camp personnel use the Recipe dialog to enter the new recipes and select from a static list recipe ingredients When an employee completes and exits the Recipe dialog the rules in an independent state are executed an independent state with rules to allow new recipes to be selected from the Add Dish dialog adatabasefile linked to the Recipe class to store new recipes 2 20 User s Guide What to do Changing the knowledge base To build the knowledge base structure and implement this function complete the following tasks 1 Add the N ew menu item to the Recipe pull down menu and include the method and function that open the Recipe dialog 2 Create the Recipe dialog Create an independent state with rules to allow new recipes to be selected from t
270. nging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To define the background or text color of your window click Color The Select Background and Foreground Colors window displays For moreinformation See Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 10 11 12 Building multi column list boxes To change the text font click Font The Font dialog displays For more information See C hanging fonts on page 6 118 To modify slot values owned by the multi column list box class click U ser Slots to display the U ser Slots dialog For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 To configure the multi column list box click Configure Select a method and add a function to the multi column list box For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Working with the Window Editor 6 41 Building multi column list boxes Configuring a multi column list box Overview W hen you create a multi column list box AionD S attaches the multi column list box to the data class you specify By default all slots are columnsin a multi column list box You can select specific slots to display You can also control each column s visual appearance how information updates and how to select rows at runtime Selecting slots 1 From the Slots dialog click Configure The ColumnLB Attachment Configuration dialog controls the appearance of the specific columns
271. ny object that needs to resolve one of these objects such as a group object or a display object T he appearance of the Consultation monitor varies and is determined by the display object associated with the information being presented or solicited Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 47 Running character based applications Customization You can customize the Consultation monitor in the following ways use the Screen editor to create displays and associate them with one or more slots parameters classes or messages a usetheKDL command cM to add remove and modify windows at runtime and execute system commands based on information from the screen For moreinformation See Chapter 4 of the AionD S Language Reference W hat to do To run acharacter based knowledge base perform the following steps 1 Select FileO pen The O pen Knowledge Base window displays 2 Select the knowledge base and any appropriate options For more information See Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 Click Open Theknowledge base opens Select FilaRun The Run window displays 5 Select the appropriate options For more information See Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level 6 Click Run Reult The Consultation monitor displays and the knowledge base is executed If you enabled the debugger and selected the Running trace option the D ebugger is activated and the Run pull down menu Ca
272. objects To remove the selected text to the clipboard select Edit C ut text To copy the selected text to the clipboard select Edit C opy M Tip Depending on the current selection the cut copy and paste actions in the Edit pull down menu change If you select text the Edit menu has a text choice If you select a knowledge base object the Edit menu has a Cut object choice Place the cursor where you want to paste the clipboard text Select Edit Paste Alternative press SH IFT IN S n select the paste button from the button bar Alternative U se the cut and paste buttons on the button bar instead of selecting Cut text and Paste from the menu bar Working with Objects 5 43 Cutting and pasting text between applications Cutting and pasting text between applications Overview AionD S shares the clipboard with other applications AionD S can place text in the clipboard while any other application that supports the clipboard can paste the information into its application files AionD S can paste text placed on the clipboard by another application into each knowledge base Caution Library objects can own other objects in a knowledge base Cutting and pasting library objects may produce unexpected results in the knowledge bases in which the library objects are included From within a knowledge base you cannot delete or change included library objects Example T he following gives some examples of how you can take adv
273. objects that require repair and save the knowledge base Check in the change set to the master knowledge base D elete the working copy 6 Apply the conflicting change sets in the same order as before Apply the change set with the repairs W hen you apply multiple change sets the contents of the first change set are overlaid with the contents of the second change set This can cause problems if any conflicts exist in the change sets Because of change set conflicts the order in which change sets are applied can beimportant For example if Change Set 1 adds a significant amount of code to a state Agenda while Change Set 2 contains a one line change to the same and both changes are desired applying 1 after applying 2 results in asmaller repair effort For this reason when multiple change sets must be applied it is often desirable to control the order in which they are applied W hen the desired order isnot the listed order apply the change sets one by one using separate apply commands Two change sets with a single conflict If there is only a single conflict one of the following conditions exists The change from one change set overlays the change in the other Thisis the case if a change was made in error and the second change set corrects the error in the first This can also be the case if one developer applies changes from another change set and then modifies an object that had been previously modified In other words
274. ocation that is accessible to everyone who will be making changes to the master 2 Check out a working copy of the master Apply any unapplied change sets to the working copy M ake changes to the working copy The changes are recorded in a change set 5 After completing all changes and testing your working copy check the master and other people s working copies for unapplied change sets 6 If the master contains unapplied change sets copy them to your working copy 7 If any other person is ready to check in their working copy s change set copy their change set to your working copy 8 Compareall change sets 9 Resolve any conflicts 10 Check in all change sets to the master 11 Periodically export the master and apply all change sets 8 4 User s Guide Change Management menu commands Change Management menu commands Overview This section contains information on the commands that are available from File C hange M anagement Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 5 Change Management menu commands Creating a working copy of a knowledge base Check out Overview To begin the process of modifying a knowledge base when using Change M anagement you usually start by creating a copy of the master knowledge base This is also called checking out a working copy of the master knowledge base When you check out a copy Change M anagement is automatically enabled in the working copy All changes you make are automatically rec
275. of the Screen editor W hat to do 6 To open the W indow Settings dialog select Screen W indow Settings The Screen Settings dialog displays Screen Settings Device type Ea O Format TSL text O Load object text O Show system displays Usethe D evice T ype pull down list box to indicate the type of display to use Valid entries are available by selecting one from the drop down list or by entering a valid entry into the field Select the Format T SL text check box if the text in the Layout window should be formatted by the T SL commands Select the Load object text check box if the text from the object should be loaded into the Layout window Select the Show system displays check box if you want the Screen editor window to include system D isplays in the D isplays Window and Layout windows M Tip Selecting all three check boxes previews what the screen looks like at runtime Click Set Reult Thenew settings are applied to the Screen editor Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 45 Building character based applications Reorganizing the windows in the Screen editor A 46 User s Guide You can reorganize the open windows in the Screen editor Select one of the following options from the Screen pull down menu Tile arrange all open Screen editor windows to appear side by side and top to bottom within the Screen editor Cascade arrange all open Screen editor windows in the active Sc
276. om 0 to 32 767 inclusive In the Increment group specify the following Line H ow far the scroll box moves when you click on one of the scroll bar arrows Page H ow far the scroll box moves when you click in the scroll bar area Valid values can be integers from 0 to 32 767 inclusive In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the scroll bar For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To attach an object to the scroll bar click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 To modify the values of slots owned by the scroll bar s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See C hanging user slot values on page 6 101 Click OK The changes are applied and the scroll bar displays Select a method and add a function to the scroll bar For more information See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 Building OLE controls and objects Building OLE controls and objects Introduction An OleC ontrol instance represents an OLE Custom Control OCX You can extend the graphical user interface in an AionD S W in application by adding O C Xs purchased from a third party vendor For example you can add documents charts
277. on 6 27 description 6 4 Index l 1 example 2 18 apply change sets 8 12 AskD ialog definition 6 29 use of 6 29 Assigning a password 3 42 attach display window 0 13 attach object dialog 6 99 attaching parameters slots messages to windows attach object dialog 6 99 attributes knowledge base setting for 3 41 authorization setting 5 31 Authorization feature 5 31 authorization push buttons 5 32 authorize command 0 3 AutoC ommit option commits setting 7 42 autoload mode specification 7 32 automatic data interface load mode 7 32 updates 7 39 Automatic D atabase Interface AD I access method class 7 5 database access method 7 6 definitions required 7 4 persistent data 7 5 automatic updating multicolumn list boxes 6 44 auto popup attribute 0 26 auto save description 3 7 auto skip attribute 0 26 autoupdate specification 7 39 Available Libraries list 3 14 I 2 User s Guide B background color change 6 115 background list box window colors dialog 0 36 bindings property inhibited 9 12 orderby clause 9 12 recency 9 12 bitmap creating 6 66 displaying 6 66 bitmaps instance link to 6 108 BitmapW indow see also bitmap definition 6 66 blink check box window colors dialog of 0 36 Boolean values displaying 6 48 break points collection setting on 9 9 default 9 8 definition 9 7 deleting 9 9 listing 9 9 object setting on 9 8 property setting on 9 8
278. on to find the file 3 Click OK Reult The object s application opens If you select Create N ew the application window is empty If you select Create from File the file displays for editing 4 After you create or edit the object select U pdate from the File menu then select Exit Reult The object displays in the object frame on the standard window or dialog box Working with the Window Editor 6 95 Building OLE controls and objects Empty frames Runtime Runtime editing 6 96 User s Guide You might not want to insert an OLE object at edit time You might not know which object file or which application you need For example at runtime you may select a graphic from either a drawing or paint application You can insert an object by clicking the right mouse button on the frame Alternatively you can insert an OLE object at edit time and select another at runtime You cannot save runtime changes after the application closes W hen creating empty frames you cannot dynamically insert an object for runtime based on application logic a save the object inserted at runtime The 0 leO bject class also handles runtime input differently than the OleC ontrol class Unlike OleC ontrol O leO bject has no methods or events to customize The most direct way to edit an OLE object during runtime is to double click on theOLE frame The object displays in its native editing environment For example a spreadsheet object displays
279. ook caes A ects atag sete ceca eed agua oetetec 10 15 SAVING PPOTISS his es ere hates hea hid cdl hes ened thee AEE ce ed ed de od dd 10 18 Creating and editing profiles using a text editor ceeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeteeees 10 19 Changing environment settings ececeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeteee 10 20 Changing database SettingS ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeteeecaaeeeeeeeetneee 10 25 Changing MIN SettingS vi eicicietesse stot chehehehedetatetstebebvhedet tetstobehvbedet tetetebedvbeletaes 10 27 Changing file S ttingS na in ae aa ae Saa EAEan 10 31 Changing run program settings eeeeeseeeeeeeeessirrrretesstirrnrttnssennnnnnnssent 10 33 Table of Contents ix Appendix Index X User s Guide Changing system settings ccccecceececeneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeenaaeees 10 35 Profile options not available from the Settings pull down menu 200 10 40 Build and Run Character Based Applications in AionDS Building character based applications ccccceccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeteed A 2 Procedure for building SCrEeNS ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeteesniaaeeeeees A 4 The Screen editor eee eeeeceeeecccneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeesnaaaeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeeesenaaes A 5 Opening the Screen editor 0 2 2 ee cece eeeeceee eee eeeccaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeetenenaaees A 7 Summary of Screen edito
280. opic Page D atabase menus 7 2 Access method configuration 7 3 Defining an access method 7 6 Changing the access method 7 7 Generating a class definition and slots 7 8 Generating an external database 7 9 Properties available in the class 7 10 Working with External Databases 7 1 Database menus Database menus Overview W hen you are editing a class the D atabase pull down menu is available Summary iw T he D atabase pull down menu contains the following commands Access method lets you select one of the following database access methods None SQL Q SAM VSAM dBASE Import definition lets you import the database definition from an external source and generate AionD S T ype Definition Language T DL statements for the database Export definition lets you export the class definition property into an external database When the access method is SQL or dBASE AionD S generates the external database Generate slots lets you generate the slots for an AionD S class AionDS uses the Class D efinition property to generate the slots Generate class lets you generate the Class definition property from the slots of the class 7 2 User s Guide Access method configuration Access method configuration Access method configurations An Access M ethod describes the database structure and coordinates the integration of the data within an AionD S class AionD S can access a single database or multiple external databases by using single
281. or is not moved into the label window The cursor is moved into the next window with the Tab Stop style as shown in the Order Children dialog You can change the order of the controls in the Order Children dialog For more information See Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups on page 6 103 Adding mnemonics to controls Mnemonics for group boxes W hen you issue the mnemonic for a group box the cursor is moved to the first child window of the group box that has the T ab Stop style For more information See Building group boxes on page 6 52 See the Group Box chapter in the Building GUI Applications Reference Working with the Window Editor 6 107 Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances Linking bitmaps icons and mouse pointers to instances Overview You can link a bitmap icon or mouse pointer graphic outside of AionD S to an instance An instance linked to a graphic is called an image instance To display the graphic in AionD S link the image instance to the bitmap or icon window or specify the image instance in the Pointer field in the window s Slots dialog You use the N ew mage dialog to create an image instance to link to the graphic Use the mage Slots dialog to link the image instance to the graphic file W hat to do 1 Create the bitmap icon or mouse pointer from outside of AionD S 3 In theClass field select the class to own theinstance The class must match the typ
282. orded and can later be applied to the master W hat to do To check out a copy of a knowledge base perform the following steps 1 Open the master knowledge base 2 Select File C hange M anagement Check out The Check O ut Knowledge Base window displays For more information The Check O ut Knowledge Base window is similar to the C reate Knowledge Base window See Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level to learn more about using the fields in this window Specify the name directory and version of the working copy 4 Click Check Out If any unapplied change sets exist in the master copy AionD S copies them to the working copy Then apply them See Change M anagement procedures on page 8 2 8 6 User s Guide Change Management menu commands View the knowledge base s change sets List W hat to do Change M anagement records information about the types of changes you make but it cannot record information about why you are making the changes U pdate the comment property of the change set to indicate the reason for changes To list the unapplied change sets in a knowledge base perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base that contains the change sets 2 Select Fila hange M anagement List The Change Sets window displays Change Sets Name Last Action PaJGROCERY v0 02 Changes Modify 14 Feb 94 4 07pm alexs The Change Sets window displays the name of the change set and the last ac
283. ot required By default the runtime edits to an OLE object or control do not persist after the application closes To save changes to an OLE object use the SaveO bject method Fa Important Although the O leC ontrol and O leO bject classes are part of the W indow0O bject class hierarchy O LE support is not available in AionD S 2 OLE concepts Linking and embedding Controls and objects Visual editing Building OLE controls and objects O bject linking refers to creating a reference to the external object or application W hen the object is updated in its own application the link also updates the version in the container application O bject embedding refers to placing a copy of the object physically in the container application Although the copy can be edited within the container application it is not updated if the original object changes OLE 1 0 included the ability to link and enbed objects An object usually is a graphic representation of one application s file in another application To interact with the object the user must start acommand such asEdit One example is a drawing embedded in a word processing file O bjects are often executable files although they also can be dynamic link libraries AionD S represents objects with the O leO bject class OLE 2 0 includes support for OLE Custom Controls OC Xs An OCX is similar to an object but often includes another level of control for the application developer
284. ots M ethods Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 9 Knowledge base structure Vocabularies Vocabularies can own the following objects Displays Processes Functions Reports M essages Types Parameters For more Topic Refer to information a Instructions on displaying various object Chapter 4 relationships in lists Instructions on building editing listing Chapter 5 exporting importing and printing objects A description of each object General Reference 1 10 User s Guide WindowObject class hierarchy Knowledge base structure The W indow0O bject class hierarchy consists of predefined classes that you use to build a graphical user interface for your knowledge base W indow0O bject class hierarchy BD WindowObject Bitmap indowObject BHotRegion WindowObject leon Window EMenuitem Win MousePonter Window Object Wind WindowOhbject ct ject Bitmap Window Window fi CheckBox Window E CoumnLE Window ComboBox Window E Desktop Window Window Group Box Window Blcon Window Window ListBox Window 0leContror Window E 0le0bject Window PushButon Window RadioButton f ScrollBar Window Standard Window Window fiDialngGox Standard indow DAskDialog Diaiagfox ShowDialog Ojaiog 80x Text Window Window Tool Wind ToolBar Window TheWindowO bject class hierarchy includes the following classes Introduction to AionDS
285. out the different styles Use the Pointer field to select a mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the tool bar For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the tool bar s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 To define the background color of your tool bar click Color T he Select Background and Foreground Colors window displays Enter the appropriate changes For moreinformation See Changing window background and text colors on page 6 115 10 Click OK AionDS applies the changes and the tool bar displays Working with the Window Editor 6 61 Building tools on a tool bar Building tools on a tool bar Overview A tool is a graphical button you can click to execute an action or set the status of an option You can only place a tool on a tool bar A tool can represent three kinds of behavior m push button radio button m check box Example T he following is an example of the three kinds of tools built on a tool bar StandardVvindow zla Push button tool D epressed Tool bar Check box tool Radio button tool W hat to do 1 Create and resize a tool 2 Doubleclick on thetool TheT ool Slots dialog displays 6 62 User s Guide 3 4 Building tools on a tool bar Tool Slots
286. ove you can use ON REQUEST to limit write access to a database You can use onrequest UPDATE in combination with other D BM S statements to limit write access to certain stages of knowledge base execution For more information See Chapter 4 of the Language Reference 7 40 User s Guide Properties available in the class AUTOUPDATE You can use AionD S to make modifications to the database records The previous figure shows that field 2 and field 3 are modified At the end of the knowledge base execution AionD S writes these modifications to the database Working with External Databases 7 41 Setting SQL commits and rollbacks Setting SQL commits and rollbacks Setting commits and rollbacks Changes committed or rolled back W hat to do 7 42 User s Guide You can control exactly when commits and rollbacks are performed for SQL connections In addition you do not have to know the syntax of the SQL statement for that specific database You can manually set commits and rollbacks using the DBMS KDL statement and the Commit M ode property For moreinformation See the Language Reference to learn about the DBMS statement See thel O Reference to learn about executing commits and rollbacks for specific SQL databases Commits and rollbacks can be established using one of the following methods To manually set commits and rollbacks set the Commit M ode property to OnRequest and specify DBMS statements at the appropriate plac
287. owledge base and do not enter a version number the knowledge base enters 0 01 as the default version number AionD S uses 0 01 to identify Version 1 To work on anew version of a knowledge base use Copy or U pdate to make a copy of the knowledge base and give it a version number AionD S increments version numbers by 0 01 For example the second version of a knowledge base is 0 02 Current path The current directory displays to the right of the Version field When you enter the full path and knowledge base name AionD S ignores the current path By default the current directory is one of the following from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionD S in its program group Knowledge Bases and To select a directory name from the Directories list box double click on the Directories list boxes directory name All available knowledge bases in the selected directory display in the K nowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base Fs Note You cannot create a knowledge base with read only access 3 4 User s Guide Opening a knowledge base Opening a knowledge base W hat to do a fF W N To open a knowledge base use the O pen K nowledge Base window You can open only one knowledge base at a time 1 Select FileO pen The O pen Knowledge Base window displays O
288. ows in all Displays attached to the current object in the Screen editor Attributes lets you control the attributes of the window currently selected The Window Attributes dialog displays A 8 User s Guide Other Screen commands Building character based applications Colors lets you control the colors of the window currently selected The Window Colors dialog displays Position toggles the W indow Postion dialog on and off The W indow Position dialog shows you the position of the mouse cursor in the Layout window as well as the coordinates of the currently selected Display window Properties lets you control the properties of the window currently selected The Window Properties dialog displays Text lets you control the fixed text of the window currently selected The Window T ext dialog displays This option only applies to T ext windows This is a summary of the rest of the commands that are available in the Screen menu Layout toggles the Layout window on and off TheLayout window is the place where you draw the screen and look at its layout Refresh refreshes the Layout window reflecting its current attributes H ide hides a window or Display that you select from the Windows dialog or Displays window Show shows a window or Display that you select from the W indows dialog or Displays window Settings displays the Screen Settings window where you control the display characteristics of the Screen editor Building and Running C
289. pen Knowledge Base Please specify the knowledge base to be opened Name aaa Version CAADS7 00 Knowledge Bases SYBTST v0 01 Directories l Read only access If necessary change the directory in the D irectories list box Enter the name and version of the knowledge base to open Click O pen If the knowledge base has a password set AionD S prompts you to enter the password Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 5 Opening a knowledge base Name field Enter the name of the knowledge base in this field select a knowledge base name from the Knowledge Bases list box or enter the full path and knowledge base name To change directories enter the full path name including a backslash after the last directory To access the root directory enter a backslash If the Version field and the Read only access check box are correct click Open Version field Enter the version number of the knowledge base to open If you select a knowledge base from the Knowledge Bases list box that version number displays in the Version field Current path The current path displays to the right of the Version field By default the current path is one of the following from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionD S in its program group Knowledge Bases and To select a directory name from the D irectories list box double cl
290. pen the Screen editor for that object If you select an object that cannot have a Display attached the Screen command is grayed out Alternative Select the Edit Screen button from the Button bar Reult The object s Screen editor displays and the Screen pull down menu displays in the menu bar Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 7 Building character based applications Summary of Screen editor commands Overview This is a summary of the commands available in the Screen pull down menu Display sub menu T his is a summary of thecommandsin Screen Display 0 New creates and attaches a new D isplay to the current object in the Screen editor Attach attaches existing D isplays to an object D etach detaches a D isplay from an object Build builds a default D isplay for the current object in the Screen editor T he default D isplay depends on the type of object List toggles the D isplays window on and off T he D isplays window shows a list of all of the displays attached to the current object in the Screen editor Window sub menu T hisis a summary of the commands in Screen W indow N ew creates a new window in the D isplay currently being edited in the Screen editor The N ew Window dialog displays This command is available only if a Display has already been associated with an object via N ew Attach Build and so on List toggles the W indows dialog on and off The Windows dialog shows alist of all wind
291. perty 7 24 key fields property 7 30 load mode property 7 32 mapped slots property 7 33 Selection criteria property 7 34 update mode property 7 39 I 6 User s Guide DBMS statement commits setting 7 42 rollbacks setting 7 42 DDE AionDS asclient building 6 122 AionD S as server building 6 129 client 6 121 client instance creating 6 124 command 6 13 conversations modify 6 125 data item 6 129 data items modifying 6 133 introduction 6 120 library 1 13 link instance creating 6 127 link instances modifying 6 128 links 6 125 server 6 121 topic 6 129 warm vs hot link 6 125 D DEO bject class library 1 13 D D ESystem vocabulary 1 13 debugger abort 9 25 bindings property displaying 9 12 break point 9 7 break point go to next 9 11 break points default 9 8 break points deleting 9 9 break points listing 9 9 call stack displaying 9 18 changed instances property displaying 9 13 description 9 1 effect of assignment property displaying 9 13 errors most common 9 20 execution trace displaying 9 15 execution continuing 9 10 forward fire agenda displaying 9 13 function values displaying 9 14 immediate rules 9 22 instance values displaying 9 14 knowledge base saving 9 27 knowledge base verify corrections 9 28 matches property displaying 9 13 object properties changing 9 19 objects displaying 9 12 objects saving 9 26 on request rules
292. play the desired object editor 1 Do not select an object 2 Select Object 0 pen Alternative Press ENTER or F3 or click the edit icon on the button bar Reult The Open O bject window displays O Type l a Name p I owe fo 5 10 User s Guide 3 4 5 Opening object editors Specify the type name and owner of the object to open in theT ype N ame and O wne fields Fidd D escription Type selects the object type If you do not know the object type select Any Any Selects all object types matching the criteria in the N ame and O wne fields Name entersthe object name If you only know the first few letters of the object s name substitute the wild card symbol for the remaining letters Owner selects the object s parent If you do not know the object s parent leave this field blank Click O pen If you do not specify the object s type name or owner another dialog displays with a list of objects that match the specified criteria rr Object Selected object in definitions AskDialog sl aversion cyborg cl Text indow Window cl ShowDialog DialogBox cl Menultem indowObject 6 Select the desired object from the Selected object field Reult The specified O bject editor displays Working with Objects 5 11 Going to another object Going to another object Overview You may need to edit an object related to the object you are currently editing
293. plications Reference to learn more about a knowledge base asa DDE client and server Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 13 Procedure for building knowledge bases Procedure for building knowledge bases W hat to do 1 14 User s Guide To build a knowledge base you use the various object editors and the Window editor An Object editor is a tool that you use to create and modify objects For example to create a class you use the Class editor You use object editors to build a hierarchy of objects that contains the knowledge base s application knowledge facts judgments procedures and high level controls The Window editor is a tool you use to create and modify GU windows In conjunction with the object editors you use the W indow editor to build the GUI windows and their underlying logic You can also build windows that use D DE using the Window editor and object editors T he process of building a knowledge base is divided into the following tasks T hey are arranged in the most logical order To build a knowledge base complete these tasks create the knowledge base a include libraries a build the object hierarchies a build the application window a build other windows and dialogs You must create the knowledge base first You should create the application window before you build other windows and dialogs Otherwise you can concurrently build the object hierarchies application window and other windows and dialogs Fo
294. pplications in AionDS A 11 Building character based applications Alternative 1 Tocreatea Display with a different name than the attached object create a Display object with O bject N ew 2 Select Screen D isplay Attach to attach the D isplay to another object For more information See Attaching Displays to objects on page A 13 Reult The Display is created and attached to the specified object A 12 User s Guide Building character based applications Attaching Displays to objects W hat to do To attach one or more existing Displays to the object in the Screen editor perform the following steps 1 Select Screen D isplay Attach The Attach D isplay window displays Attach Display Please select the objects to which you wish to attach displays 2 In theO bjects list box select the objects to which to attach a D isplay Click OK TheAttach window dialog displays In the Attach window there is alist of valid displays you can attach to the selected object Select one or more displays to attach to the object 5 Click OK Reult The selected displays are attached to the selected object Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 13 Building character based applications Detaching Displays from objects W hat to do To detach one or more Displays from the current object perform the following steps 1 Select Screen Display D etach The D etach D isplay window displays Detach Display
295. properties multiple line text 0 27 W indow properties read only 0 26 W indow properties reload 0 27 W indow properties scrollable 0 26 W indow properties trim 0 27 W indow properties uppercase 0 27 W indow properties use menu 0 27 W indow properties visible 0 26 window pull down 3 45 window settings dialog 0 46 window text dialog 0 34 window type property 0 29 W indowO bject class library 1 11 windows adding OCXs 6 90 application 6 4 build 6 7 building 6 6 colors change 6 115 controls 6 5 copy 6 21 create how to 6 14 cut 6 21 delete 6 22 D esktopW indow 6 5 KB hierarchy window opening 2 10 move 6 17 open how to 6 16 parameters slots messages attaching to 6 99 paste 6 21 resize 6 17 StandardW indow 6 23 T extW indow 6 33 top level 6 4 types of 6 4 windows dialog definition 0 23 W indowSystem vocabulary 1 11 working copy 8 6 writes in graph 4 23 Index 1 23 1 24 User s Guide
296. r AionDS features and utilities 1 16 User s Guide Debug your application when you execute it For more information See Chapter 9 D ebugging Knowledge Bases to learn about finding and fixing errorsin your application using the debugger Customize your development and execution environments by modifying your profile For more information See Chapter 10 C ustomizing AionD S to learn about customizing AionD S windows and profiles Build and run character based applicationsin GUI AionDS For more information See Appendix A Building and Running Character based Applications in AionD S Chapter 2 Touring AionDS This chapter provides an overview of AionD S by taking you on a tour of a sample knowledge base If you are a new user this chapter helps you get a broad overview of AionDS You need not read this chapter to use the Introduction information in the rest of this book T his chapter does not provide detailed explanations of each feature but it does reference chapters containing more information on each topic In this chapter Topic Page Knowledge base example GROCERY 2 2 Starting AionD S 2 5 Quitting AionDS 2 8 Importing GROCERY 2 9 Updating GROCERY 2 11 Exploring the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window 2 12 Running GROCERY 2 16 Changing the knowledge base 2 20 Touring AionDS 2 1 Knowledge base example GROCERY Knowledge base example GROCERY Overview Working with the simpl
297. r COMMANAG ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceteeeeeeeeetaeeeeeteeseeeeeees A 8 Creating new DisplayS cccceeeceeee eee eeeceneee eee eee eeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeneecaaeeeeeeeeeneee A 11 Attaching Displays to ODj CHS cccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeneeeeeees A 13 Detaching Displays from objects cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeectaeeeeeeteeceeeeeeetees A 14 Building default Displays cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeneenaaaes A 16 Listing the Displays in the Current screen ceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeieeeeees A 18 Creating NeW WINCOWS cccceeeee cece eee eeeccaee eee e eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeeetteetaaaeeeeeeeeenees A 19 Listing and selecting windows in the current SCr N cceeeeeeeeeteeeeeneteees A 23 Modifying window attributes cccececeeee cece ee eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeniaaaes A 25 Modifying the selected window properti S cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes A 28 SY OG sei ss ase ate E gucci DaaGnaccnaneaauaiauenancnnntedauy a ais geen A 29 210 lel eee rerer eer eter ae re eer nee ae ata a me er a er ee A 29 DJ OVICO Sc cescetecetetvnveatatcnetctetvertatatcnetctetveet atatcnrt ctetvertatatctetctytvartsyatett ts A 31 EMK COJO ite A 32 Field NAMGO cccceeeceeeee cece ee eeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeecdaaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes A 32 Titlen fit etter eet a a a aaa AA A 33 Set relative to DOttOM
298. r PA1 window The Display object PA2 is attached to PA2 and owns the Prompt for PA2 window a Type Dev Field Title Display ti Prompt PromptforPA2 pa Prompt PromptforPAl pal j Le Mii T he Windows dialog lists the windows attached to the current display You cannot edit the contents of this property directly Instead usethe Screen editor or the W indow Properties editor to change the contents of the individual windows A 22 User s Guide Selecting a window Building character based applications The following fields are shown T ype identifies the type of window Dev displays the D evice T ype property value of the window Field identifies the record or field name Title identifies the title of the window Display identifies the window s attached display T hisis useful when the Screen editor shows groups of displays To select a window from the W indows dialog gt Click on the window Alternative In the Layout window click on a window to select it Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 23 Building character based applications Modifying window attributes Overview T he Attributes window controls the behavior of the currently selected window Whattodo ests 1 Select a window using the Windows dialog or the Layout window 2 Display the Window Attributes dialog by selecting Screen W indow Attributes The Windows Attributes dialog displays a Window Attributes
299. r example as you build the application window you might have to create a parameter in the object hierarchy to hold the login name from the login field in a dialog Other AionDS features and utilities Other AionDS features and utilities AionD S has other features that expand its functions and utilities T hese features are used in the development process Brief descriptions of these features and utilities and where you can find more information about them are listed as follows List of features and utilities Set up the knowledge base as aD DE client DDE server or both For more information See Chapter 6 Working with the Window Editor of the Building GUI Applications Reference and the Building GUI Applications utorial to learn about DDE Customize the D esktopW indow instance to specialize a knowledge base s error processing For moreinformation See the Building GUI Applications Reference to learn about customizing the D esktopW indow instance Access information in external databases from your application For more information See Chapter 7 Working with External D atabases and the I O Reference to learn how to set up your application to access external databases Track changes in an application using Change M anagement For moreinformation See Chapter 8 Tracking Changesin a K nowledge Base to learn how to implement Change M anagement effectively Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 15 Othe
300. r s Guide The following list describes the change set properties Property Description Title enter aname for the change set equal to or less than 50 characters Source KB shows the path and name of the master knowledge base M odified shows the time and date when the change set was last modified and by whom Checked in shows the time and date when the change set was last checked into the current knowledge base and by whom Applied shows the time and date when the change set was last applied to the current knowledge base and by whom Comment enter any text into the Comment property It serves asa notepad to describe the nature and purpose of the changes contained in the change set Reference enter any text into the Reference property Organizations often document changes to applications and refer to them by a change number T he Reference property serves as a place for you to enter any change number to refer to the changes in this change Set Changed Objects AionDS automatically keeps track of the objects that you change and lists then in the Changed O bjects Property This property is a selectable list In other words open the editor for an object by double clicking on the object name or by selecting the object and pressing ENTER AionD S refreshes this list each time you save the knowledge base This property lists only those objects that you changed since the last time you saved the knowledge base To view the objects that you chan
301. r working copy For moreinformation See Checking out a working copy with unapplied change sets on page 8 19 As you make changes to your working copy the changes are recorded in an external file which is called a change set T he change set contains an entry for each object that you change Changes to an object are stored and applied by property For example if you modify only the Facts of a parameter in one change set only the Facts are updated when that change set is applied If you modify the Prompt property of the same parameter in a later change set the Facts property is not changed Record information about why you are making changes by opening the change set and updating the Comment property of the change set Change Management procedures After completing all changes and testing your working copy resolve any conflicts between your changes and changes made by others When you apply change sets to a working copy or master a changein an object property made by one change set can overwrite a previous change to the same object property by the other change set T his situation is called a conflict because the two changes work against each other one change cancels the other To check the change sets for conflicts use the Compare command For moreinformation See Resolving change set conflicts on page 8 23 Checking in a change set copies the change set to the master When you check in a change set AionD S deletes it
302. reen editor to be layered one on top of another with only thetitle bar showing Close All close all open Screen editor windows does not save or discard the contents of the Screen editor windows it only hides them Running character based applications Running character based applications You can use AionD S to run character based applications T he character based application is executed using the Consultation monitor AionD S starts up the Consultation monitor automatically when you run a consultation Caution a In AionDS PM to run acharacter based application you need not set the Interface field in the Environment Settings window to GRAPHICAL H owever if there are GUI callsin the character based application errors are reported a In AionD S Win to run acharacter based application import the application with the U ser Interface field in the Profile monitor set to CHARACTER Importing the application with the U ser Interface field set to CHARACTER adds the W indow0O bject and D D EO bject hierarchies to the application With these hierarchies the character based application can be executed in AionD S W in The Consultation monitor is the runtime component of AionD S that displays information to and solicits information from the person running a consultation The Consultation monitor can solicit information to resolve parameters and slots It can also display parameters slots messages graphs classes instances or a
303. riables mi is pointer to Menultem lt _ External Library 3 Enter the following statement in the Function Body Delete the Recipe instance and Close the DialogBox xy Delete RecipePtr gt close Touring AionDS 2 37 Changing the knowledge base Creating the 1 Create a slot named RecipePtr in the RecipeD ialogBox class Select RecipePtr slot O bject N ew The N ew Object dialog displays New Object 2 Enter siot in theT ypefield Recipeptr in the N ame field and RecipeDialogBox in theO wner field 3 Click New AionDS creates the RecipePtr slot and displays the Slot RecipePtr Recipe Dialog Slot RecipePtr RecipeDialogBox Prompt 4 Enter the following in the Base T ype property pointer to Recipe 2 38 User s Guide Adding the OK push button Changing the knowledge base Add theOK push button Select N ew Push button from the tool palette and click the cursor displayed as the push button icon in the Recipe dialog box It must be named RecipeO KPB to match the corresponding namein the N ew menu item s Function Body property Resize and display the OK push button name by using the same techniques as for the Recipe dialog Add statements to the function body of theO K push button to exit to the next statement in the U pdateR ecipeV alueL ist state Doubleclick the right mouse button to create and display the W henRecipeO K PBC hosen M ethod and Function editors
304. ridden if the ADSLOG environment variable exists on the PC This field sets the LOG FILE profile option Customizing AionDS 10 31 Customizing profiles Auto Store 10 32 User s Guide specifies the file that stores the trace output For AionDS the default value for this option is AD S TRC A unique file is written for each instance of AionDS If you do not specify a file in this field the Execution T race controlsin the Run window are not available TheT race field is overridden if you assign a file for the AD STRACE environment variable on the PC This field sets the TRACE FILE profile option specifies the file name that receives the contents of the PRINT WINDOW command when it is issued from the Consultation monitor Component AionES also uses this file to print messages when you do not specify SH OW PROGRAM The value of the Print field is overridden whenever an AD SPRINT environment variable exists on the PC This field sets the PRINT FILE profile option the file name used by the Store command to store responses for a character based consultation BACKUP ENABLE must beon The Store field is overridden if an ADSRERUN environment variable exists on the PC T his field sets the STORE FILE profile option the file name used by the Store command to store the responses to a character based consultation BACKUP ENABLE must beon For AionDS the default is AD S HHHEANS T he Auto Store option is overridden if an
305. rmation See Chapter 4 Working with O bject Lists for a description of O bject List windows and the Select O bjects window How you can tell an object has changed How you can tell an object has changed Overview After an object has changed AionD S displays an asterisk next to the object namein the title bar of the object editor window If you minimize the O bject editor the asterisk appears next to the object icon sname AionDS deletes the asterisk when you file or save the object Which properties After changing a property AionD S displays an asterisk next to the property have changed name in the title bar of the Property editor window AionD S deletes the asterisk when you save or close the object All properties are not always displayed Whattodo tw To check all properties of an object for changes since the last save or close use the O pen Property window 1 Open the editor for the object Working with Objects 5 25 How you can tell an object has changed 2 Select Property 0 pen The Open Property window displays List Properties All Saas omment C Hidden Description C Modified Display Execution Conditions Explain C Specialized File Name Message Text Unspecialized 3 Select the M odified radio button The Properties list box displays the changed properties in the object Is an object invalid An exclamation point displays next to an invalid object s name in a thetitle bar of
306. rofile option defines the number of bytes in multiples of 1024K bytes that is the upper limit of the amount of physical memory that will be used to store the knowledge base in AionD S After this threshold is reached parts of the knowledge base not in use are swapped to disk If Swapper Threshold is 0 AionD S dynamically determines the amount of available memory and uses all of it The default value is 0 This field sets the SW APPER THRESHOLD profile option Page Length specifies the number of lines to print on a page T he default is 66 Thisfield sets the PRINT PAGE LENGTH profile option Page W idth specifies the width of the print output The default is 76 This field sets the PRINT PAGE WIDTH profile option If the width of the print output is greater than the specified Page W idth the output is wrapped onto the next line A Page W idth setting of zero specifies no wrapping Customizing AionDS 10 37 Customizing profiles Error Message Load All States 10 38 User s Guide specifies the content of the display when an error occurs The default radio button is T ext only Select one of the following radio buttons On both the AionD S error code and error text display Off AionDS error information is never displayed T his value is not recommended CodeOnly only theAionDS error code displays TextOnly only theAionDS error text displays AES ERRORNUM is set to the numbers listed in the Aion D evdopment System M essage
307. rrors Caution You are not prompted to resolve these syntax errors before saving the knowledge base Working with Objects 5 7 Saving an object Changing and deleting objects in a library Whattodo 1 Open the library as a knowledge base SS 2 Select the object from the knowledge base 3 Changeor remove the library object 4 Add thelibrary back into the knowledge base Caution Changing or deleting library objects with owned or child objects in the knowledge base may produce unexpected results in the knowledge bases in which the library object is included Effects amp Caution If you delete or rename a library object the following changes are made when the library is updated to a knowledge base a Thelibrary object s owned objects and child objects in the knowledge base are deleted a AnyKDL TDL and TSL references to the included library object and the object s owned objects are invalidated W hen the parent of a knowledge base object is an included library object that has been deleted or renamed AionD S deletes the knowledge base object because AionD S cannot find the parent of the knowledge base object 5 8 User s Guide Opening object editors Opening object editors O pening an object editor T his section discusses the different methods you can use to open an object editor for an existing object If you don t know the exact name type and owner of the object to open use the O pen O bject
308. rt of the primary window Touring AionDS 2 7 Quitting AionDS Quitting AionDS Whattodo i est gt ToquitAionDS sdectFileExt Alternative You can also quit AionD S using one of the following procedures a select Close from the system menu doubleclick on the system menu If you have not saved changes to knowledge base objects or AionD S settings a confirmation dialog displays Click Save to save the changes and terminate AionD S Click Discard to quit AionD S without saving changes Click Cancel to stay in AionD S without saving changes 2 8 User s Guide Importing GROCERY Importing GROCERY Overview T his section explains how to import and run the sample knowledge base GROCERY Importing a knowledge base opens it from the external import format Whattodo i ests 1 Select Filelmport The Import Knowledge Base window displays Import Knowledge Base Please specify the knowledge base to be imported Name GROCERY2 Yersion 0 01 CA ADS 700 Directories l Read only access M Tip As you select a choice on the pull down menu note that the message bar at the bottom of the screen gives you a short summary of the choice For help with a pull down choice press F1 when that choice is highlighted 2 Usethe Directories field to select the directory where the GROCERY knowledge base is placed C AION DS700 EXAM PLE DOC by default The knowledge bases available for import in this dire
309. runtime you can edit OLE objects to the extent that the OLE application Supports editing You cannot assign runtime input to an attached object Fa Important The OLE object must bein the Registration D atabase The following is an example of an OLE object StandardWindow ia Working with the Window Editor 6 93 Building OLE controls and objects Creating the frame 1 In theWindow editor select the O LE tool from the tool palette or select Screen N ew Window TheN ew W indow dialog displays Class foleobject Name fese s SCS Parent ocxtestfocxole Attached Class iii ia 2 Specify the class name and instance name on the N ew Window dialog Reult An empty frame appears on the standard window The frame not the OLE object to be inserted is the O leO bject instance 3 Click OK 6 94 User s Guide Building OLE controls and objects Insert Object Object Type 3 Media Clip Create New Microsoft Draw Drawing Microsoft Drawin Create from File Microsoft Graph 9 Microsoft Word 6 0 Document Microsoft Word 6 0 Picture MS WordArt Package Result Inserts a new object into your document 2 On thelnsert O bject dialog select one of the following radio buttons Create N ew to create a new object Select the application from the O bject T ype list box Create from File to insert an existing object Enter the file name in the File field or use the Browse push butt
310. ry specifying 3 4 current path default 3 4 customizing 3 dimensional look 10 8 auto save time 10 9 button bar 10 6 database settings 10 25 editor 10 12 file settings 10 31 message bar 10 6 run program settings 10 33 run settings 10 27 saving settings 10 13 screen fonts 10 3 system settings 10 35 tab width 10 11 window settings saving 10 13 window size and position 10 12 cut text 5 43 windows 6 21 cut and paste between applications 5 44 between knowledge bases 5 21 moving and cloning 5 22 objects 5 19 text 5 43 Index l 5 D data classes and ColumnLB classes 6 39 D ata filename property of access method 7 16 D ata integrity check property of access method 7 17 data item description 6 129 data items creating static instances 6 130 modifying 6 133 D ata location property of access method 7 19 database creating from AionD S example of 2 44 export class definition 7 9 import class definition 7 8 linking to example of 2 43 settings customizing 10 25 D atabase property of access method 7 22 database pull down 7 2 access method 7 8 7 9 export definition 7 9 generate class 7 9 generate slots 7 8 import definition 7 8 database settings window 10 25 date values displaying 6 82 dBASE data access Class definition property 7 14 data file name property 7 16 data integrity check property 7 17 external sourcing property 7 23 index file names pro
311. s The D atabase menu displays 2 Select a database access method from the D atabase Access M ethod menu Select an external database QSAM External Source Specification property VSAM External Source Specification property dBASE External Source Specification and D ata File property SQL External Source Specification T ablename Interface and Access String properties For more information See Appendix A of the O Reference for the appropriate syntax in the External Source Specification property See Properties available in the class on page 7 10 4 Select Database Generate class AionD S builds the Class D efinition property Alternative Open the Class D efinition property and specify the attributes in the C lass definition 5 Select Database Export Definition AionD S creates the external database Working with External Databases 7 9 Properties available in the class Properties available in the class Overview W hen you select a database access method for a class AionD S adds several database related properties to the class This section describes the properties and the entries available in each a Access String SQL only a Alternate File N ame VSAM only a Alternate Key Field VSAM only a Class Definition Commit M ode a Data File N ame dBASE QSAM and VSAM only a Data Integrity Check a Data Location a Databas SQL only a External Source Specification m Index File N ames dBASE only m Interface
312. s D efinition property and the slots in the Class 2 Specify Selection Criteria to limit the number of records read into AionD S memory during data access 3 Specify any pertinent load update or integrity information Working with External Databases 7 7 Generating a class definition and slots Generating a class definition and slots W hat to do To generate a Class definition and the corresponding slots from an external database 1 Open the appropriate class T he database menu displays Select a database access method from D atabase Access M ethod 3 Identify the external database by specifying the required attributes in the following properties QSAM External Source Specification property dBASE External Source Specification and D ata File properties SQL External Source Specification T ablename Interface and Access String properties VSAM External Source Specification property For more information See Appendix A of the O Reference for the appropriate syntax in the External Source Specification property See Properties available in the class on page 7 10 4 Select Database mport definition AionD S builds the Class D efinition property 5 Select D atabase G enerate slots AionDS builds the slots for the C lass 7 8 User s Guide Generating an external database Generating an external database W hat to do To generate an external database based on the Class definition 1 Open the appropriate clas
313. s Guide Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Debug Knowledge Bases Debugging DIOCCOU Cie cei isstsi ee Deiat eae erie nie ean een earns 9 3 Running a knowledge base with the debugger ccceeeeeeeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeetees 9 4 Run Menu SUMMANy wach ieee ee A ne eee ee 9 5 Finding and fixing errors in the knowledge DaSe ccccccceeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeeetnees 9 7 Suspending exec Mae ean Oe eee 9 8 Continuing execution cece eee eeccenee eee e eee teeeaaeee tees ee eteeaaaeeeeeeeeeegeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeiaaaes 9 10 Displaying an object c tnwen ene Aadntn aaa aa a iene 9 12 Displaying parameter instance and function values 0 cece eeeeeessenteeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnnaaees 9 14 Displaying the execution trace ceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseneneeeeees 9 15 Displaying the Call stack cccecceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeenaaes 9 18 Changing object properties eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeeecdaaaeeeeeeeeeneeaaaes 9 19 Debugging objects in which errors most commonly OCCUTL cceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 9 20 Debugging parameters and SIOtS ccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 9 21 Debugging immediate rules cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeesnnaeeeeeees 9 22 Debugging on request rules ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeteensaeee
314. s about the different styles To list the entries alphabetically select the Sort List Box check box in the Combo Box Styles group In the Combo Box T ype group you can define one of the following Combo box type Description Simple displays the entire list You can typein an entry that is not listed Drop Down List displays only the current selection U se the scroll button to display the entire list and choose another selection You cannot type in an entry Drop Down display only the current selection You can use the scroll button to display the entire list and choose another selection You can typein an entry that is not listed To attach an object to the combo box click Attach to display the Attach O bject dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Attaching parameters slots or messages to windows on page 6 99 In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape to display when the mouse pointer enters the combo box For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the combo box s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For more information See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 Click OK The changes are applied and the combo box displays Select a method and add a function to the combo box For more information See Selecting methods a
315. s and C odes When this field is set to On Off or Code O nly AES ERRORNUM isse to the number of the message in the message file This field sets the ERROR MESSAGE profile option controls whether AionD S loads all contexts states classes and vocabularies when knowledge base execution begins The default is O ff the check box is deselected If you deselect the check box only the entry state is loaded when you run the knowledge base other contexts are loaded as they are needed If you select the check box all contexts are loaded when knowledge base execution begins This field sets the LOAD ALL ST ATES profile option Check All Auto Export Customizing profiles controls whether invalid objects are checked when the Save or Run commands are executed If you deselect the check box invalid objects are not checked If you select the check box invalid objects are checked This field sets the CH ECK ALL profile option is a number that specifies the number of Save commands that AionD S executes before you are prompted to export your knowledge base The default is0 With this default you are never prompted to export your knowledge base This field sets the AUTO EXPORT profile option Customizing AionDS 10 39 Customizing profiles Profile options not available from the Settings pull down menu Overview T he following profile options cannot be changed using the Settings pull down menu Useatext editor to edit the profile
316. s at runtime In the Window editor when you edit windows that display at runtime they display in a 3 dimensional appearance only if you check At runtime 3 Click Set 10 8 User s Guide Customizing AionDS windows Customizing the auto save time W hat to do You can customize the auto save function At regular intervals auto save prompts you to save work in progress to disk You can control the number of minutes elapsed before you are prompted to save your work If you do not enter anumber auto save is not activated To set the auto save time 1 Select Settings D isplay The D isplay Settings window displays 2 In theAuto Save field enter the number of minutes to elapse before AionD S prompts you to save work in progress to disk 3 Click Set Customizing AionDS 10 9 Customizing AionDS windows Customizing the most recently used knowledge base list W hat to do You can list up to nine recently used knowledge bases in the File pull down menu by performing the following steps 1 Select Settings D isplay The D isplay Settings window displays 2 Enter the number of knowledge bases to display in the M ost Recently Used M RU field 3 Click Set 10 10 User s Guide Customizing AionDS windows Customizing the tab width W hat to do You can control tab width how many spaces are inserted in a text editing window when you press the T ab key To set the tab width 1 Select Settings D isplay The D isplay Settings wi
317. s list 2 Specify the column heading in the Title field The default is the Print N ame property If the Print N ame property is empty then the Name property is the default M Tip If you do not specify column titles no title bar appears If desired adjust the column width in the W idth field M Tip Adjust the individual column width by sizing the column with a mouse Usethe Width field to adjust multiple columns to the same width Select a radio button in the Alignment box to set the alignment of the dot values By default text fields are left aligned and numeric fields are right aligned Working with the Window Editor 6 43 Building multi column list boxes Automatic update W hen the slot values change you can control whether AionD S automatically updates the information in the multi column list box For automatic updates click Reload in the Attachment box To control updates with the Refresh method click N o Reload amp Caution T hese options apply to the entire multi column list box not to individual columns M Tip By default AionD S automatically assigns the N o Reload option For moreinformation See Building GU I Applications Reference for more information about the Refresh method 6 44 User s Guide Building combo boxes Building combo boxes Overview A combo box combines the features of alist box and atext window It displays a list of predefined text items for selection and also lets users type in
318. s most commonly occur Debugging objects in which errors most commonly occur Overview This section describes debugging the objects in which errors most commonly occur The following objects are described parameters and slots immediate rules a on request rules pattern matching rules 9 20 User s Guide Debugging objects in which errors most commonly occur Debugging parameters and slots W hat to do To find out how a parameter or slot received its value or why it did not receive a value 1 2 3 Set a breakpoint on the Sourcing property of the parameter Execute the Go command AionDS stops at the parameter Execute the Step Into command repeatedly AionD S examines each of the following possible sources to get a value for the parameter or slot W henN eeded demon Facts property of the parameter U ser sources System sources D efault Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 21 Debugging objects in which errors most commonly occur Debugging immediate rules To find out why an immediate rule did or did not execute W hat to do 9 22 User s Guide 1 Set breakpoints on the Effects list for every parameter or slot in the premise of the rule The Effects list shows the rules affected by the assignment of the parameter Execute the Go command and wait for the Effects list to appear Execute the Step Into command repeatedly to step through the list When AionD S encounters an Immediate rule it fires the rule When th
319. s of the slot or method For more information See pages 39 40 to learn how to specialize and unspecialize properties 5 28 User s Guide Unspecializing class slots and methods Unspecializing class slots and methods Overview You can unspecialize an object you no longer need The object returns to its original state unmodified You cannot specialize or unspecialize a slot owned by a library Whattodo Use the U nspecialize O bject window to unspecializeslots or methods M Tip You can unspecialize more than one object at a time by selecting multiple objects in the List O bject window 1 Select the specialized slots and methods The U nspecialize O bjects window displays Unspccialize Objects Selected objects l Safe information will not be lost 2 Highlight the specialized slots and methods by clicking the slot or method name Working with Objects 5 29 Unspecializing class slots and methods 3 To unspecialize only the slots or methods that are identical to the slots and methods in the parent class check Safe T he changed slots and methods containing modified properties from the slots and methods in the parent class do not change T he Safe option protects slots and methods a with specialized properties a bound to a local object a that are invalid 4 Click Unspecialize Reult AionD S deletes the highlighted slots and methods in the Selected O bjects list box 5 30 User s Guide Changing objec
320. ser slot dialog 6 101 user slot values modifying hot region 6 73 uses in graph 4 22 Index l 21 in jump 5 12 utilities submenu command summary 3 27 V value can change 10 46 values properties 6 91 view pull down detail options 4 17 format of object list 4 28 graph options 4 22 icon options 4 14 nameoptions 4 15 visible attribute 0 26 vocabularies definition 1 10 vocabulary 1 8 VSAM data access alternate file name 7 12 alternate key field 7 13 Class definition property 7 14 data file name property 7 16 data integrity check property 7 17 data location property 7 19 external sourcing property 7 23 key fields property 7 30 load mode property 7 32 mapped slots property 7 33 selection criteria property 7 34 update mode property 7 39 W window browse window 0 19 l 22 User s Guide build how to 6 9 customizing 10 2 window attributes dialog 0 25 window colors dialog 0 35 window editor definition 1 14 Opening 6 12 tool palette 6 12 window position dialog 0 42 window properties check length 0 27 disallow empty list 0 27 set relative to bottom 0 33 W indow properties auto popup 0 26 W indow properties auto skip 0 26 W indow properties disallow unknown 0 27 window properties editor device type 0 31 field name 0 32 Link code property 0 32 outline 0 29 title property 0 33 window type property 0 29 W indow properties lock cursor 0 27 W indow
321. smaller the distance between dots Check Show Grid to display the grid Check Align to Grid to place the borders of controls flush with the grid that is the controls can be moved and resized only in increments of dialog units Use the Position dialog to display the position and size of a window dialog or control Position dialog 6 18 User s Guide Resizing and moving windows dialogs and controls W hat to do gt Ifthe Position dialog is not displayed select Screen Position The Position dialog displays x Si Y a Width Height M Tip If you cannot see the Position dialog in the Window editor and the Position command is checked the Position dialog is outside the W indow editor borders You can enlarge the W indow editor to display the Position dialog T he Position dialog fields contain the following information Name T he name of the currently selected window X Coordinate If atop level window currently is open in the Window editor this field contains the location of the left border of the currently selected window from the left border of the screen T he location is given in dialog units for all instances of windows except for H ot Region windows For H ot Region windows the location is given in pixels Y Coordinate If atop level window is currently open in the Window editor this fidd contains the location of the top border of the currently selected window from the top of the screen T
322. specify whether the window is initially enabled or visible and whether it is opened automatically when its parent window is opened 6 24 User s Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Building standard windows In the Standard W indow Styles group define the display properties of a standard window such as whether the border of your window is resizeable whether the user of your application can maximize or minimize your window and how many options are displayed in the pull down systen menu For more information See the Building GUI Applications Reference for details about the different styles In the T ext Source group specify the source of the text displayed in the window at runtime In the Title field change the text to the name that you want displayed in the title bar In the Icon field specify an icon to display when the user minimizes the window If this field is left blank a default icon is supplied M Tip If the M inimize Button style is not selected the window cannot be minimized In the Pointer field select the mouse pointer shape that you want to display when the mouse pointer enters the window For more information See C hanging the mouse pointer in a window on page 6 113 To modify the values of slots owned by the window s parent class click the U ser Slots dialog and enter the appropriate information For moreinformation See Changing user slot values on page 6 101 To attach
323. splay in purple white and blue on a black background GREN ADS specifies the Enhanced Graphics Adapter EGA or compatible board with at least 128K B on board memory This driver is only used with enhanced color display monitors Graphs display in 16 colors GRENO ADS with zero not the letter O specifies the Enhanced Graphics Adapter EGA or compatible board with at least 128K B on board memory T his driver is only used with enhanced color display monitors Graphs display in 16 colors with a blue background GRENL ADS specifies the Enhanced Graphics Adapter EGA or compatible board This driver is used with either color display monitors or enhanced color display monitors Graphs display in 16 colors GRENB ADS __ specifiesthe Enhanced Graphics Adapter EGA or compatible board U sethis driver with monochrome monitors Graphs display in black and white 10 36 User s Guide Swapper Threshold Customizing profiles GRVGA ADS specifies the Video Graphics Array VGA or compatible board and aVGA compatible monitor Graphs display in 16 colors GRVGAO ADS with zero not the letter O specifies the Video Graphics Array VGA or compatible board and aVGA compatible monitor Graphs display in 16 colors with a blue background GRMCGA ADS specifies the M ulti C olor Graphics Array M CGA or compatible board and an M CGA compatible monitor Graphs display in black and white This field sets the GRAPHICS DRIVER p
324. st boxes Knowledge base utilities The open knowledge base name displaysin the N ame field To change the knowledge base name a select a name from the K nowledge Bases list box or enter the full path and name To change directories enter the path name to the directory including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash Check that the Version field is correct then click M ove The open knowledge base version number displays in the Version field You can change the version number of the knowledge base to move If you select a knowledge base to move from the Knowledge Bases list box that version number displays in the Version field The current path displays to the right of the Version field To change the current path use the Directories list box or the N ame field AionD S ignores the current path when you type the full path and knowledge base name By default the current path is one of the following from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionD S in its program group To select a directory name from the D irectories list box double click on the directory name All Knowledge bases in the selected directory display in the K nowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base F N ote You cannot move a knowledge bas
325. t Edit Copy The child window is copied to the clipboard O pen the window to which you want to copy the child window Select Edit Paste Reult The child window is pasted into the selected window 1 2 3 Select Screen O pen Window 4 5 Select the child window 2 Saec Edit Cut Thechild window is cut from the parent window and placed on the clipboard Select Screen O pen Window 4 Open the window into which you want to place the child window Select Edit Paste Reult The child window is pasted into the selected window Working with the Window Editor 6 21 Copying cutting pasting and deleting windows D eleting windows 1 Select the window to delete 2 S eect Edit Delete GUI window If the window being deleted has child windows a confirmation dialog displays 3 To dedete the window and all child windows click D dete Reult The window and all its child windows are deleted 4 Ifyou do not want to delete the window and all its child windows click Canca Reult You return to the open window and the window and its child windows are not deleted 6 22 User s Guide Building standard windows Building standard windows Overview A standard window is a major piece of the user interface A standard window logically and visually groups together controls such as menu items and push buttons in asingle window Userscan input complex information by choosing combinations of values and textual input with controls A standard
326. t File Libraries The M anage Knowledge Base Library List dialog displays 3 Click Done AionDS updates the included libraries 3 16 User s Guide Importing a knowledge base Importing a knowledge base To have AionD S reimport a knowledge base select Import when the knowledge base is open Importing an open knowledge base 1 Select File mport If you made changes to the knowledge base since the last export AionD S displays a confirmation window asking if you want to import the knowledge base j Unsaved Changes GROCERY v0 01 has changed since last Export Changes will be lost Do you still want to Import To import the knowledge base click Discard Reult AionD S imports the knowledge base If you decide not to import the knowledge base click Cancel Reult You return to the knowledge base Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 17 Importing a knowledge base Importing a closed 1 Close the open knowledge base knowledge base 2 Select Filelmport The Import Knowledge Base window displays Import Knowledge Base Please specify the knowledge base to be imported Name D Version C ADS 700 Directories 3 If necessary change the directory in the Directories list box 4 Select a knowledge base in the K nowledge Bases list box 5 Click Import Name field T o access a knowledge base use the name field in one of the following ways enter the name of the knowledge base select a n
327. t authorization Changing object authorization Overview You can protect objects from change or you can hideinformation If you use an owner password to open a Knowledge base you can change an object s authorization You can make an object writeable read only or hidden W hat to do 1 From a knowledge base hierarchy window or an O bject List window select one or more objects To select multiple objects press SHIFT and click each object 2 Select O bject C hange Authorization The Change O bject Authorization window displays Change Object Authorization Selected Objects WhenUpdateError syb_ tst Make Read Only Make Hidden Working with Objects 5 31 Changing object authorization 5 32 User s Guide 3 Click one of the following Authorization push buttons M ake W riteable object is write read only M ake Read Only object is read only M ake H idden object is hidden Confirm the authorization by displaying the objects in a detailed object list For more information See Chapter 4 Working with O bject Lists to learn how to view objects Editing an object Editing an object Overview To edit an object enter information into the object s properties This section explains how to select and work with AionDS properties From within a knowledge base you cannot change included library objects Summary The Property pull down menu has the following commands Command Description Open sele
328. t create and link an image file to an instance You use the Edit H ot Region dialog to display the image and overlay it with H ot Regions You cannot attach H ot Regions to other objects Working with the Window Editor 6 69 Creating and editing hot regions What to do 6 70 User s Guide Edit Hot Region Hot Region Instances redques Bitmap smiley Bitmap tubrush Bitmap tupencil Bitmap X List Parent Bitmaps Only In the H ot Region Instances field select the image instance to create H ot Regions or that contains H ot Regions to modify If you Know the name of the H ot Region instance but do not know the bitmap instance name uncheck the List Parent Bitmaps O nly check box TheH ot Region instance names display Click Edit The selected image instance or the parent image instance of the H ot Region instance that you selected displays To create a H ot Region select Screen N ew H ot Region The N ew Hot Region dialog displays Creating and editing hot regions New Hot Region Class HotRegion e Name fimaget Parent imagi Bitmap In the Class field select the class to own the H ot Region instance 7 IntheNamefiedd enter the name of the H ot Region instance 8 TheParent field displays the parent window of theH ot Region instance This is the image instance currently displayed 9 Click New You return to the image display and the new H ot Region displays in the image display
329. t list object name in the O wner field Any objects owned by the following display in the object list including objects in the O wner fidd and ancestors of the O wner fidd object Ancestors are the owner the owner s owner and so on all the way up the hierarchy object name in the O wner field Any objects owned by the following display in the object list including the object in the Owner fied and the descendants of the O wner field object Descendants are objects below the owner in the hierarchy objects in the entire knowledge base restricted by any constraints specified in the object selection window Work with Object Lists 4 9 Selecting objects for an Object List window Overview To explore O wner and Scope look at the GROCERY knowledge base As shown in the partial hierarchy in the following example GROCERY hasa M enu class with three subclasses called Breakfast Dinner and Lunch Knowledge Base Hierarchy fiver WM Opn Wateren MHsDish eierwfir BResetSeector BiSekctionlet Opener BiterDeleted_ Des hiec teresi MiGetMenPt BResetSelectons_ Merg Mien Opm BiterDeleted Werte BS etSedectons i HiSerng Oene WE Menu HihenCrested_ MwbonDish MSs Dish Beverage en Bi hen Created eDireer tenu Hi henCrested_ Beverage Danish Mssp Megrahi Appetizer Dessert wol Miach EB WhenCreated Mh Menu Hi henCrested_ MDesset MMs EB WhenCreated Beverage DMonDieh MSdeDish Bi MeruDialogBox i Berm OpenOobpiox 4 10 User s
330. t state owns a number of rules H ow can you find out what objects a rule uses To see what objects the ProcessM enuM ainD ish rule uses select the rule and then select View U ses As the following example shows the O bject List window displays all objects the selected rule uses Object Graph evra Rec i menu sa y akeShoppingList ieaProcessMenuMainpish Mah hokein i Mere enosn DrarediertsNeced T eae A Beconturtiten precessLunctDesst Poneman Si reateShoppinaList 4 26 User s Guide Object listing by graph Thenumber of relationships you explore at a time controls the complexity of the graph To explore many relationships at once collapse some branches of the graph to make the screen easier to read The O bject List window by graph can scroll horizontally and vertically Sometimes there are no results when you select a graph For example if you select an empty class and choose V iew O wns no graph displays because the class does not own anything Work with Object Lists 4 27 Changing the format of an Object List window Changing the format of an Object List window Overview You can change the format of the objects displayed in an O bject List window W hen any O bject List window is open you can change the window to any of the other four formats Whattodo gt To view objects in a different format select a new format from the View pull down menu Alternative You can also sele
331. t the Knowledge Base Level 3 29 Knowledge base utilities Current path The current path displays to the right of the Version field To change the current path use the Directories list box or the N ame field When you type the full path and knowledge base name AionD S ignores the current path By default the current path is one of the following from the command line the directory from which you started AionD S from the AionD S icon the working directory associated with AionDS in its program group Knowledge Bases and To select a directory name from the Directories list box double click on the Directories list boxes directory name All knowledge bases in the selected directory display in the K nowledge Bases list box To select a knowledge base in the Knowledge Bases list box click on the knowledge base FN ote You cannot copy a knowledge base with read only access 3 30 User s Guide Knowledge base utilities Updating a knowledge base U pdating a knowledge base is similar to copying except that U pdate closes the source knowledge base the knowledge base that was open when you chose U pdate and opens the new copy The U pdate K nowledge Base window automatically increments the version field by one number Typically you use defaults to make a copy of a knowledge base W hat to do O pen the knowledge base 2 Select File U tilities U pdate The U pdate Knowledge Base window displays Update
332. t when you create an object the next time the N ew O bject window displays O pen object remains unchecked After entering all the information in the N ew O bject window click N ew If you checked O pen object AionD S creates the object and displays the object editor Working with Objects 5 5 Saving an object Saving an object W hat to do gt To check the syntax of an object and add its changes to the knowledge base select O bject Save Alternative To savean object press F7 while its editor is active Result AionD S checks the syntax of the object If there are no syntax errors AionD S saves the object the following smile icon displays AionD S deletes the asterisk next to the object name in the title bar If there is a syntax error Saving an object with 1 errors 5 6 User s Guide AionD S does not save the object a frown icon displays pointing to the syntax error an edit error message displays in the message bar an exclamation point displays next to the object name in the object editor title bar an exclamation point displays in front of the object name in the object hierarchy window to indicate the object is invalid You can save an object with syntax errors by double clicking on the object editor s system menu AionDS displays an Errors confirmation dialog To closeand save the object click Continue Saving an object Reult AionD S closes and saves the object with the syntax e
333. tain a Graphical U ser Interface GU 1 development and execution environment GU I AionD S and a character based development and execution environment In GUI AionDS you can m build and run knowledge bases with graphical user interfaces m run Knowledge bases with character based user interfaces AionD S 2 only m build all parts of the knowledge base except for its character based user interface In character based AionD S you can m build and run knowledge bases with character based user interfaces m run knowledge bases with graphical user interfaces m build all parts of the knowledge base except for its graphical user interface For more information See the U s s Guide C haracter based to learn more about building knowledge bases with character based user interfaces in a character based development environment See Appendix A Building and Running Character based Applicationsin AionD S for details about building knowledge bases with character based user interfaces in a GUI development environment Introduction to AionDS Concepts 1 5 Knowledge base structure Knowledge base structure Knowledge base A GUI knowledge base consists of the following components components knowledge base object hierarchy application and control knowledge a WINLIB library which includes the W indowO bject class hierarchy and the D D EO bject class hierarchy a system library windows comprising application window other wi
334. te Recipe RecipeNameTW attach slot RecipeDlg RecipePtr gt Name RecipelIngredLB attach slot RecipeDlg RecipePtr gt IngredientsNeeded RecipeDlg Open end You cannot save the W henRecipeN ewM I Chosen function and method until you create the Recipe dialog referenced in the Function Body property Touring AionDS 2 27 Changing the knowledge base Creating the Recipe dialog Overview In this step you use the W indow editor to create the Recipe dialog as shown in the following figure In the Recipe dialog you need to create the following objects a label windows atext window a alist box OK and Cancel push buttons RecipePtr slot to hold the new recipe values an employee will create in this dialog You add a method and function for the OK push button to call the U pdateR ecipeV alueList state You also add a method and function for the Cancel push button to delete the Recipe instance 2 28 User s Guide Changing the knowledge base Creating the Recipe dialog 1 3 Activate the W indow editor tool palette by clicking the W indow editor window Select the N ew dialog box icon from the tool palette and click the cursor which displays as the dialog box icon in the screen The N ew Window dialog displays New Window Class SSS Name SSS ee Parent i 2 Attached Class o New Class T op level windows should reside in subclasses so that the class hi
335. ternative To expand a branch that has children that are not showing or collapse a branch that has children showing click on that branch s mini icon in the outline From an object hierarchy window you can list all objects owned by a context Select the context or contexts then select View O wned O bjects T he objects owned by the context display in the hierarchy Alternative Point to the context icon or mini icon and press CTRL CLICK Or CTRL PLUS on the number keypad To conceal owned objects select View N o O bjects Alternative Point to the context icon or mini icon and press CTRL CLICK Or CTRL MINUS on the number keypad Work with Object Lists 4 19 Object listing by hierarchy Listing slots and methods Concealing slots and methods Listing instances Listing a knowledge base hierarchy M oving around 4 20 User s Guide You can list all slots and methods in a class from an object hierarchy window Select the class or classes then select View Slots M ethods The class slots and methods display in the hierarchy Alternative Point to the class icon or mini icon and press ALT CLICK or ALT PLUS on the number keypad To conceal slots and methods select View N o O bjects Alternative To conceal slots and methods for a single class press ALT CLICK Or ALT MINUS on the number keypad From an object hierarchy window you can list all instances in a class Select the class or classes the
336. tes to assign a title to and display information about the knowledge base Whattodo To assign a title to a knowledge base ssts S 1 Open the knowledge base 2 SeectFile U tilities Attributes The Knowledge Base Attributes window displays Knowledge Base Attributes SYBTST v0 01 Last imported by Anonymous at 40ct 95 11 31am wi e nE 3 Toassign atitle to a knowledge base type a title in the T itle text entry fied AionDS limits the title to 30 characters including spaces 4 Click Set Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 41 Knowledge base utilities Setting a password You can set the following three types of passwords Owner If you use an O wner password to open a knowledge base you can change an object s authorization and set passwords User If you use a U ser password to open a knowledge base you cannot change an object s authorization set passwords see hidden objects or modify read only objects To makean object read only you must change the object s authorization Runtime If a knowledge base has a Runtime password you cannot run a knowledge base without the password For moreinformation See Chapter 5 Working with O bjects to learn how to change an object s authorization To assign an O wne User or Runtime password W hat to do 3 42 User s Guide 1 O pen the knowledge base 2 Select File Utilities The U tility sub menu displays Knowledge bas
337. the Grid command to help resize the window dialog or control To resize a window dialog or control place the tip of the arrow on the side top or bottom of the window dialog or control until the arrow turns into a double headed arrow called a resize handle D rag the mouse to pull or push the side top or bottom in the desired direction Reult Theside top or bottom of the window dialog or control is pulled or pushed in the desired direction To moveawindow dialog or control place the tip of the arrow inside the window dialog or control Click and hold down the mouse button T he arrow turns into a four headed arrow D rag the window dialog or control to the desired place Usethe Grid command to display and customize a grid of regularly spaced dots in a window or dialog You can usethis grid to position and size your controls accurately H orizontal and vertical spacing is measured in dialog units du Working with the Window Editor 6 17 Resizing and moving windows dialogs and controls W hat to do 1 2 Select Screen Grid The Set Grid dialog displays Set Grid Horizontal Spacing 2 du Vertical Spacing 2 du X Show Grid Align to Grid In theH orizontal Spacing and Vertical Spacing fields enter anumeric value to increase or decrease the distance between dots The default value is 2 M Tip The higher the number you enter in the spacing fields the higher the number of dots and the
338. the knowledge base contexts as in the following Knowledge Base Hierercky Bern BNesthestict Opna BiVvterCrested danish ecew BResetSeectur WSs Opeke BiVvterOeleted_ M Wheke ahe resed WHGrtMePi_ BBResetSeectons_ Merry WMimDkyfr BOn BivternOedeted Wto BSetSelections Hy Senn Opener Eresi Menu Whentrested_ MhbnDish MSideDish Beverage Den EeWhenCreated E Wirmer Menu Whentrested_ Beverage Manish Messio Megrahi Mappetirer Dessert Pol Mirch EB henCreated Blanch Menu HihenCreted_ Dessert New EB henCreated Beverage WibnDish MS deDish Meru DialogBox M wipri 4 18 User s Guide Expanding and collapsing branches Listing owned objects Concealing owned objects Object listing by hierarchy Contexts are states classes and vocabularies T hese are the only objects that can own other objects The outline shows the relationship between parent and child objects You can expand and collapse branches of the hierarchy in the object hierarchy window You can display objects owned by a context For more information Select H elp K eys for a summary of O bject List window keyboard options Select a branch or branches then select View followed by one of the following menu choices Expand OneLevel press PLUS on the number keypad Expand Branch press ASTERISK on the number keypad m Collapse branch press MINUS on the number keypad Expand All press CTRL ASTERISK on the number keypad Al
339. the object s editor a the object s minimized icon In the O bject List window the invalid status displays in the Flags column as an in 5 26 User s Guide Specializing class slots and methods Specializing class slots and methods Overview Child classes inherit the slots and methods of their parent class A slot or method copied from a parent class is an inherited slot or method A class can use but cannot modify an inherited slot or method To modify these objects specialize an inherited slot or method M Tip You can specialize a library method but you cannot specialize a library slot W hat to do Use the Specialize O bject window to specify the slot or method name the type of object to specialize and the name of the class that owns the slot or method 1 Select the class 2 Select O bject Specialize T he Specialize O bject window displays Specialize Object Type Meth od Name When0 pened Owner WindowObject 3 Specify the object type a method or slot in the T ype field Working with Objects 5 27 Specializing class slots and methods 4 Specify the name of the object in the N ame fied Alternative 1 Select aslot or method before selecting Specialize The object name displays in the Specialize O bject window 2 Specify the class in the O wner field then perform step 5 5 Click Specialize The slot or method editor displays From one of these editors you can specialize one or more propertie
340. the predefined O penApp method to the application window To build an application window 1 Build a standard window with anew class T he application window must be a top level window 2 Add controls including menu items with corresponding methods and functions For moreinformation See Selecting methods and adding functions on page 6 97 3 Customize the controls using the slots dialog Press F8 to save and close the window 5 Modify the entry state agenda to open the application window Double click on the entry state name in the knowledge base hierarchy window to open the editor for the entry state Working with the Window Editor 6 27 Building an application window 6 28 User s Guide 6 Inthe Agenda on thefirst line type the following statement ApplicationWindow OpenApp where Applicat ionWindow Is the name of the application window instance 7 Press F8 to check the statement syntax then save and close the entry state Reult This statement is saved as the first linein the entry state agenda and is the first statement executed when the knowledge base is started The O penApp method turns control over to the open application window At this point the application is ready to receive user events such as mouse clicks and menu selections Building ask show and other dialog boxes Building ask show and other dialog boxes W hat to do A dialog box is very similar to a standard window Like a standard window a
341. thefile that contains the information on any conflicts click View 8 14 User s Guide Change Management menu commands Printing change sets Print What to do To print the objects in change sets or save them in a file in text format select FileC hange M anagement Print The information that is printed or the file that is created contains all the properties as well as an entry for each modified object in the change sets For more information See Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level for a complete description of the Print Format and Sort windows You can print more than one change set at atime To print oneor more change sets perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base containing the change sets 2 Select File hange M anagement List A Reminder If you want to print changes in change sets that are not part of this knowledge base copy the change sets from the knowledge base in which they exist to your knowledge base You need not apply them to print them Select the change sets you want to print 4 Select File C hange M anagement Print The Print window displays 5 Toprint the object information enter the name of your printer which in many installations is LPT 1 or PRN For more information Consult your operating system documentation to determine the exact name of your printer 6 Tocreateanew file for the change sets specify the name and directory in the Print window 7 To overwrite an
342. ther products or other names referenced are the trademarks registered trademarks or products of the respective manufacturers Acknowledgements m Writers Qiron Adhikary and Alex Sato m Assisted by M ichael Campbell Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Table of Contents How to Use This Manual Introduction to AionDS Concepts Aion SiconCepis nns nh ee es ee 1 2 Knowledge base structure c ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeeaaaeeeeeeeeteeeaaaaeeeeeeeseteccaaeeeeeeeetneea 1 6 Knowledge base object hierarchy ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 1 7 WindowObject class hierarchy ccccceeecceeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeestennaeeeees 1 11 DDE Object class hierarchy i sssscistusee ended reneieeee a 1 13 Procedure for building knowledge DaASES cccccceeceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeteessaeeeeeees 1 14 Other AionDS features and utilities ccc eeeceeeeeccee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeneeas 1 15 A Tour of AionDS Knowledge base example GROCERY ccccceccteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeeeeetees 2 2 What does GROCERY dO cescccccceeeeeeeeee eee eee eeece sees i a 2 3 Starting AlOND S ceeks Gece ages eeeeesnaedepcbedeves se sndecceeatauetateh debevetatebanehedaaendvlecsseerereedveves 2 5 Quitting AionDS geieesteevracee eve eee el a aaa terete ai 2 8 lmporting GROGERY csiccceecciee sinc ake cues os yeas de E avadaweatenpedfetesscnen
343. thod properties from the Class editor If the method or slot is specialized the current class is the designated owner Working with Objects 5 41 Editing an object Reorganizing the property windows in an object editor Overview You can reorganize the open property windows in an object editor window Select one of the following options from the Property pull down menu Command Action causes all open property windows to Tile appear side by side and top to bottom within the object editor window Cascade be layered one on top of another with only the title bar showing Close All close does not save or discard the contents of any property window Do not confuse these options with similar options in the Window pull down menu In the Property pull down menu these options act on property windows within an object editor In the Window pull down menu these options act on object editor windows O bject List windows and screen editor windows within the AionD S primary window 5 42 User s Guide Cutting and pasting text Cutting and pasting text W hat to do To cut and paste text 1 Select the text to cut or copy with the mouse or keyboard Caution Library objects can own other objects in a knowledge base Cutting and pasting library objects may produce unexpected results in the knowledge bases in which the library objects are included From within a knowledge base you cannot delete or change included library
344. ting 7 42 unit of work 7 15 7 42 compare command 8 14 compatibility with version 6 0 10 46 components and appearance ColumnLB 6 38 multicolumn list boxes 6 38 confirm delete 10 41 conflict resolving 8 23 single resolving 8 24 conflicts apply order 8 24 change sets two or more 8 25 multiple resolving 8 25 contexts defined 4 19 dependent and independent 1 8 control windows 6 5 controls see also push button and objects 6 87 bitmap window 6 66 build 6 7 check box build 6 48 combo box build 6 45 create how to 6 14 group box 6 52 group box build 6 52 group box including in 6 54 hot regions 6 69 icon building 6 79 label window build 6 33 list box build 6 36 logic adding 6 8 menu item 6 55 menu item build 6 55 methods functions adding 6 97 mnemonics adding 6 106 move 6 17 radio button build 6 48 resize 6 17 scroll bar building 6 82 text window build 6 33 toolbar 6 59 6 62 conversations definition 1 13 6 120 modify 6 125 when active 6 122 copy knowledge base 3 28 text 5 43 windows 6 21 create knowledge base 3 2 object 5 4 creating frames 6 93 objects 5 4 objects owned by library objects 5 3 OCXs static 6 89 OLE objects 6 93 O leC ontrol instances static 6 89 creating Client instances using Window editor 6 122 creating data items using Window editor 6 130 creating Link instances using Window editor 6 125 current directo
345. tion command AionD S automatically maps the external data structure to the Class D efinition property For more information See D efining an access method on page 7 6 Working with External Databases 7 23 Properties available in the class Index File Names dBASE only Purpose T he ndex File N ames property is user specified indicating the name of the index file or files in dBASE You can specify any number of index file names separated by commas For example you can specify the following dBASE index file names index file names gt purchase ndx return ndx inventory ndx 7 24 User s Guide Properties available in the class Index File Specification Valid values The Index file specification property appears in AionDS after you select D atabase A ccess M ethod and specify dBASE or SQL Use the Index File Specification property to change the external file name to assign fields of the class definition to index files T he syntax is as follows indexname fieldl field2 fieldn indexname name of index field name of column this column name must exist as a field in the class definition Working with External Databases 7 25 Properties available in the class Interface SQL only Purpose The Interface property is user specified and specifies the default SQ L access method for example D B2 Valid values For the following systems you can specify the listed interface names in the
346. tion criteria property of access method 7 34 selection lists see also ComboBox ListBox separator lines creating 6 58 set relative to bottom depth 0 33 row 0 33 set window template 10 12 setting commits 7 42 rollbacks 7 42 settings windows 10 2 settings pull down display 10 6 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 save settings 10 13 set window template 10 12 show show system displays check box 0 47 windows and displays 0 45 Show D ialog definition 6 29 use of 6 29 simple combo box see combo box size list box in font settings window 10 5 dot creating example of 2 38 dots ColumnLB class 6 38 command 6 13 definition 1 9 multicolumn list boxes 6 38 O CX properties not represented as 6 91 O leO bject class 6 86 6 88 ordering 6 43 represented as columns in ColumnLB 6 42 windows attaching 6 99 dots dialog window used to customize 6 7 Slots debugging 9 21 sort printout 3 24 sorted export profile option 10 45 specialize open property window 5 41 properties 5 40 Slots methods 5 27 specialize object window 5 27 specialized properties 5 35 specialize object window 5 27 specialized open property window 5 35 specializing objects 5 40 SQL data access access string property 7 11 Class definition property 7 14 data integrity check property 7 17 data location property 7 19 database property 7 22 external sourcing property 7 23 key fields property 7 30 Index l 19 load mode property 7 3
347. tion performed on this change set T his Last Action field includes the type of action date and time of the action and the name of the person performing the action Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 7 Change Management menu commands The type of action can be the following Modify change set is the base change set for the current knowledge base Chkin change set was checked into the master Apply change set was applied to the master 8 8 User s Guide Change Management menu commands Editing the knowledge base s change sets Open W hat to do Change M anagement records information about the types of changes you make but it cannot record information about why you are making the changes U pdate the comment property of the change set to indicate the reason for changes To open a change set to view or update the information perform the following steps 1 Open the knowledge base that contains the change set 2 Select File C hange M anagenent List The Change Sets window displays 3 Select the change sets 4 Select File hange M anagement Open The Change Set windows for those change sets display Alternative Double click on the desired change set in the C hange Set List To list properties that are not visible select Property O pen M Tip Customize the display for the C hange Set Editor just like for any AionD S editor Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 9 Change Management menu commands 8 10 Use
348. to save 9 26 User s Guide Saving the knowledge base Saving the knowledge base W hat to do T o save changes made to a knowledge base while it is running 1 Abort or complete the knowledge base execution 2 Select File Save Reult The knowledge base is saved Debugging Knowledge Bases 9 27 Rerunning the knowledge base to verify corrections Rerunning the knowledge base to verify corrections W hat to do gt To verify any corrections made run the knowledge base again by selecting File Run 9 28 User s Guide Chapter 10 Customizing AionDS Introduction In this chapter you ll learn how to customize AionD S windows the development runtime and system environments and database interfaces and how to manage profiles T he commands are available in the Settings pull down menu The Settings pull down menu is divided into three groups of commands separated by horizontal lines Group 1 consists of Fonts Display Set window template and Save settings These settings control how AionD S windows display Group 2 consists of Environment D atabase Run Run files Run programs and System settings T hese settings control the AionD S profile Group 3 consists of commands to save and load the AionD S core profile In this chapter Topic Page Customizing AionD S windows 10 2 Customizing profiles 10 14 Customizing AionDS 10 1 Customizing AionDS windows Customizing AionDS windows Summary Use the comman
349. tring to use when AionD S accepts or displays a false Boolean value during user sourcing This field sets the NO STRING profile option specifies the string to use for disk 1 O when AionD S reads or writes a T RUE Boolean value in textual format T his field sets the FILE YES ST RING profile option specifies the string to use for disk 1 O when AionD S reads or writes a false Boolean value in textual format This field sets the FILE NO ST RING profile option Time FileTime File D ate specifies the default mask applied to dates for user input You can specify any valid date mask The default is blank If the date option is blank AionD S uses the mask d m y AionDS only uses the date option when the base type of an object does not have an associated mask T his field sets the DATE M ASK profile option specifies the default mask applied to times for user input You can specify any valid time mask The default is blank If the time option is blank AionD S uses the mask H M S F AionDS only uses the time option when the base type of an object does not have an associated mask T his field sets the TIME M ASK profile option specifies the mask to use during I O when AionD S reads or writes a time in textual format T his field sets the FILE TIME M ASK profile option specifies the mask to use during I O when AionDS reads or writes a date in textual format T his field sets the FILE DATE M ASK profile option Customizing Aio
350. u 2 14 User s Guide Exploring the Knowledge Base Hierarchy window Looking at the CreateShoppingList state agenda W hat to do gt Doubleclick the CreateShoppingList state to open an object editor for CreateShoppingList The property shown by default is the agenda You will see how to edit different properties later in this tour and in more detail in Chapter 5 Working with O bjects State CreateShoppingList Agenda Execute the rules that create the ShoppingList fforwardchain Touring AionDS 2 15 Running GROCERY Running GROCERY Overview One major advantage of AionD S is that you can run a knowledge base while your editors are still open You can even explore the knowledge base and make changes to it while it is running although you cannot save the changes until the knowledge base terminates The following section shows you how to run a Knowledge base 2 16 User s Guide Run window Running GROCERY W hat to do 3 Select Run in the button bar the green traffic light The Run window displays Execution trace Debugger C Off Disabled On Enabled Explanation only l Running trace Display device Pc25 X Load KB profile In this window specify the characteristics for your knowledge base execution For now use the defaults In Chapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level you ll learn about the options available in this window Click Run Touri
351. u can also create and edit a profile file using a text editor since it is saved in ASCII text format You might need to use a text editor to change a profile because some profile options cannot be changed using the Settings pull down menu For moreinformation See Profile options not available from the Settings pull down menu on page 10 40 1 Create anew text file using a text editor 2 Enter each attribute to set on anew line You need not specify an attribute if you accept the default value M Tip AionDS starts more quickly when you specify only the profile options that override default options 3 Savethe text file A Reminder To load the user profile PROFILE ADS or system profile PROFSYS ADS automatically when you start up AionD S save the user or system profile in a directory in your AION or DPATH path variable To load a knowledge base profile kbnamePRO automatically when you run the koname knowledge base save the profile in the directory where the knowledge base is stored The following is an example of a user profile Auto Export 1 Auto Store File ANS Log File LOG Trace File TRACE Trace Level 4 Customizing AionDS 10 19 Customizing profiles Changing environment settings W hat to do 1 Tochange the environment settings select Settings Environment The Environment Settings window displays E o Environment Settings Comparison Tolerance 0 0000000000 Interface GRAPHICAL D
352. ually loading a 1 Atany time you can load any valid profile file by selecting Settings Load profile core profile The Load Core Profile window displays Load core profile Please specify the name of the core profile to load File name PROFILE ADS Directory is CAADS700 Directories 2 Select the path and enter the filename of the profile to load 3 Click Load Reult The selected profile is loaded and replaces the current profile 10 16 User s Guide When changes take effect D evelopment system and execution system Customizing profiles Changes to profile options in use when AionD S is running do not take effect immediately For example you cannot change the current log file by modifying the LOG FILE option because the file is already open For the change to take effect save the change to a profile file and restart AionD S W hen you run a knowledge base AionD S overrides the current values with values present in the knowledge base profile for the duration of the knowledge base execution W hen the knowledge base execution terminates the profile reverts to the default system and user profile options AionD S uses different resources in the development system than in the execution system For example the trace file is used by the execution system but not by the development system You can change the trace file in the development system and the change takes effect when you run the knowledge b
353. uence a lis the child windows in the desired order Defining tab stops To define a tab stop for a child window 1 Select the windows to define tab stops 2 Select the T ab Stop check box Result Tab stops are defined for the windows Setting the tabbing order ti i lt s To set the order of the child windows listed in the Child Windows field 1 Select one or more child window instances in the list 2 Placethe pointer between the child windows to insert the selected instances W hen you place the pointer between child windows it changes to an insertion pointer 3 When theinsertion pointer displays click the mouse AionD S inserts the selected instances in the new position Reult The child window list is now in the defined tabbing order Once you click O rder and save the object the tabbing order is set Grouping child windows Organizing controls in tabbing sequences and groups W hen the user opens a top level window during an active session the cursor stops at the first child that has the T ab Stop style If no child windows have the T ab Stop style the cursor stops on the first child window To organize child windows in a group include each child window in the group and list the child windows in the desired order Including child windows To include child windows in a group complete the following steps 1 Select the windows to include in the group 2 Check Group Setting the group order To set t
354. ument and control the changes Introduction made to a knowledge base U seit to do the following a facilitate incorporating changes made simultaneously by several people record the objects changed the person who made the change and the reasons for the change control changes made to a knowledge base Topic Page Change M anagement procedures 8 2 Change M anagenent menu commands 8 5 Checking out a working copy with unapplied change sets 8 19 U pdating out of sync working copies with the new master 8 20 Integrating change sets before applying them to the master 8 21 Resolving change set conflicts 8 23 Tracking Changes in a Knowledge Base 8 1 Change Management procedures Change Management procedures 8 2 User s Guide T his section describes the procedures you should use to track document and control the changes made to a knowledge base In Change M anagement use the following knowledge bases master knowledge base This is typically a knowledge base to control changes working copy of the master knowledge base Check out a working copy of the knowledge base and modify the working copy not the master knowledge base To ensure that your changes do not conflict with other s changes you should always start with a fresh copy of the master When you check out a working copy and the master contains unapplied change sets apply those change sets to your working copy before making changes to you
355. use the C reate K nowledge Base window 1 To open the Environment Settings window select Settings Environment The Environment Settings window displays Camgealaon Tole ramet 1 0O000OO000 Inteptaece eRAPHICAL Diaplay Devine Type PLS B Ewinga Masks Input Yes Yea Date CSC h Enesa E m Time m Seleri Eog fever Po FileDate pacing ts s Me Thotisands anal Ee 2 Set the nterface option to Graphical or Character based depending on the interface you are using For more information See Chapter 10 Customizing AionD S to learn about the other fields in the Environment Settings window 3 2 User s Guide Creating a knowledge base 3 Select FileN ew The Create Knowledge Base window displays Create Knowledge Base Please specify the knowledge base to be created im Em Version 0 CHADS T 00 Knowledge Gases in Hradil aioe 4 f necessary change the directory in the D irectories list box Enter the name and version of the new Knowledge base in the N ame and Version fields 6 Click Create Name field Enter the path and knowledge base name in the N ame field To change directories enter the full path name including a backslash after the last directory To go to the root directory enter a backslash Working at the Knowledge Base Level 3 3 Creating a knowledge base Version field Enter the version number of the knowledge base to open If you create a kn
356. ustomize aes Desktop Seethe Building GUI Applications Reference for details about customizing aes Desktop To specify a control specify the window or dialog in which to display the control as the parent M Tip If awindow or dialog currently is selected that window or dialog displays in the Parent field Click New Thenew window dialog or control displays Working with the Window Editor 6 15 Opening windows and dialogs Opening windows and dialogs W hat to do 1 Select Screen O pen Window TheO pen Window dialog displays Open Window Window Instances aes Ask AskDialog aes Show ShowDialog DishDlg DishDialogBox goodfood groceries GrocerySW GroceryStandardWindow MenuDlg MenuDialogBox MenuOpenDlg MenuOpenDialogBox ShopListDlg ShopListDialogBox List Child Windows 2 Select the window to open in the Window Instances list If the window to open isa child window and the parent is unknown check List Child Windows The child windows of each window display 4 Click Open Reult Theselected window opens If the selected window isa child window the parent window and all associated child windows open 6 16 User s Guide Resizing and moving windows dialogs and controls Resizing and moving windows dialogs and controls After you create a window dialog or control you can use the mouse to adjust the size of the window dialog or control You can also use the Position dialog and
357. ustomizing profiles 10 30 User s Guide v5 10 Emulation Environment specifies whether sourcing operations by the inference engine are compatible with Version 5 10 and 5 11 of AionDS SeeAppendix E of the General Reference for more information If you change this option reimport your knowledge base to ensure correct operation T his field sets the 510 COM PATIBILITY profile option specifies the compatibility of AionD S on the PC with AionDS on the mainframe This option can have one of the following values OS AionDS on thePC emulates the operation of AionD S on the mainframe to the extent possible PC AionDS on the PC takes advantage of features unique to the PC This field sets the COMPATIBILITY profile option Customizing profiles Changing file settings W hat to do 1 Tochangethe log trace print store and auto store files written by AionD S select Settings Run Files T he Files Settings window displays File Settings Log Trace ADS TRE Print ian Store Co AutoStore ADSANS 2 Change the desired settings 3 Click Set Reult Thecurrent file settings are replaced Log specifies the name of the system log file For AionD S the default is AD S 4 4 L0G A unique log is written for each instance of AionD S The Log filename is used only when AionD S is started If you change the Log filename you have to restart AionD S for the change to be applied T he value of the Log field is over
358. ut window of the Screen editor When you select any D isplay window or windows the Edit pull down menu becomes active for the D isplay window A 38 User s Guide Building character based applications Moving and resizing windows in the Layout window Selecting a window title Deselecting a window title Moving the title of a window There are a number of ways to move and resize the windows in the Layout window You can also move and resize window titles To move windows in the Layout window first select a window Use the mouse to select and move a window or windows You can resize the windows by moving a window border with the mouse For more information See Chapter 6 Working with the Window Editor To select a window title perform the following steps 1 Deselect the window 2 Placethetip of the mouse over the title and click To deselect a window title gt Place the mouse over any of the following areas and click a An area of the window that is not a part of the title a An area of the Layout window that is not part of a window To move the title of a window perform the following steps D eselect the window Select the title D rag the title to the desired location A O N Release the mouse button Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 39 Building character based applications Resizing a title You can only resize a title by changing thename To resize a title perform the
359. w Displays on page A 11 3 Build the windows for the D isplay object LJ For moreinformation See Creating new windows on page A 18 A 4 User s Guide The Screen editor Building character based applications The Screen editor is used to design the layout of windows in a D isplay object Display objects represent customized screens Windows are areas in a customized screen that you use to display or enter information or use as options that you can activate The Screen editor allows you to see and modify the way that the windows of the D isplay object appear on the screen The following is an example of the Screen editor 8 AionDS CHAR_TST v0 01 o jin File Edit Object Settings Window Screen Help Screen Class Hello x a Window Colors ia Window Position ik Bright backgraumi Region Fol Mol layout j BU ro Window Text Window Attributes 4 Window Properties Type 2 Device P25 4 Outline Nene Link code el Field name Title FH Set relative to bottom Rew Depth ial GEA 5 Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 5 Building character based applications Screen editor and When using a Screen editor you are really making changes to D isplay Display objects objects The Screen editor provides a consolidated pla
360. window or a property window that is a system supplied list such as a U sed By property Select the objects to put into another window Selecting Collect displays the Collect O bjects window The controls in the W indow pull down menu also determine the layout of object lists O bject editors and W indow editor windows within the AionD S primary window 4 2 Users Guide Selecting objects for an Object List window Selecting objects for an Object List window Overview To view collections of related knowledge base objects use an O bject List window From an O bject List window you can organize your work view relations between objects and navigate through the knowledge base T his section explains how to display knowledge base objects O nce you display a collection of objects you can change the O bject List window format and further narrow the list of objects W hat to do gt Toopen an Object List window select O bject List Alternative Select the list button from the button bar The list button looks like the following AionD S displays the Select O bjects window From this window indicate which objects you intend to list and the initial format Work with Object Lists 4 3 Selecting objects for an Object List window Fields on the Select Objects window Overview Use the Select O bjects window to specify characteristics of objects to display in an O bject List window Select Objects List Format Status
361. window to list the objects that match what you know about the object 1 Select an object in an O bject List window 2 Select O bject O pen Reult The object s editor displays Alternatives To open an object editor from an O bject List window you can also a doubleclick an object icon or the name next to the icon elect an object and press ENTER select an object and click the following edit icon from the button bar Alternative To open an object editor from a text window select an object name and double click on it or pressF3 AionD S opens that object s editor If the object name is not unique alist box displays A text window is an object property displayed in T ext Substitution Language T SL in which you can enter text Working with Objects 5 9 Opening object editors O pening more than You can open editors for more than one object by doing the following one object editor 1 Select the objects to open from an O bject List window H old down SHIFT and click each object 2 Select O bject O pen Reult AionDS opens the editors for all selected objects Alternatives To open more than one O bject editor you can select the objects to open and do one of the following m pressENTER m pressF3 a click the edit icon from the button bar The O pen O bject If you don t know the exact name type and owner use the O pen O bject window window to list the objects that match what you know about the object To dis
362. within a knowledge base you cannot cut included library objects As long as you do not copy over current information text objects or windows in the clipboard with new information you can continue to paste the same information into several knowledge bases by using Edit C ut or Edit Copy For more information See C hapter 3 Working at the Knowledge Base Level for information on how to cut and paste attached library objects between knowledge bases The clipboard continues to hold AionD S objects and windows after you close a knowledge base but not after you close AionD S The clipboard continues to hold text even after you close AionD S Working with Objects 5 21 Directly manipulating objects Directly manipulating objects Overview Using an object list and the mouse you can move knowledge base or library objects from one place to another or make identical copies of objects through direct manipulation M oving objects deletes them from their original context and moves them to the new context Cloning objects copies the identical objects to another context in the knowledge base In other words moving is cut and paste in one step while cloning is copy and paste in one step To move graphical instances use the W indow editor W hat to do To move or clone knowledge base objects with direct manipulation 1 Select one or more knowledge base objects from any O bject List window 2 To move hold down the right mouse button
363. wledge base Changing the Recipe class To create a database file that contains the list of new recipes and link it to the Recipe class a F WO N Change the access method to QSAM Reverse generate the Recipe class definition M odify the Recipe class definition Change the U pdate M ode property Export the class definition W hat to do Change the access method to QSAM Doubleclick the Recipe class name in the Knowledge Base H ierarchy window to open the Recipe class editor Select Access M ethod from the D atabase menu bar Select QSAM from Access M ethod TheQSAM Access M ethod dialog displays a QSAM Access Method Data File In the Data File field enter recipe dat which is the database file to which you want to link the Recipe class Reverse generate the Recipe class definition Select D atabase G enerate class This builds the Recipe class definition property Touring AionDS 2 43 Changing the knowledge base 3 Modify the Recipe class definition Select Property O pen TheO pen Property dialog displays Double click the Class D efinition property to display the Class D efinition property Change the first line to file QSAM textual of record By adding the term textual you can view the database file in a more readable format one record per line instead of as a single string 4 Change the U pdate M ode property to automatic Select Propety O pen to display the O pen Property dialog Doubleclick U
364. ws in the current screen on page A 22 To modify a window using the Screen pull down menu commands see following sections For more information M odifying window attributes on page A 24 M odifying the selected window properties on page A 27 M odifying the selected window s text properties on page A 34 M odifying window colors on page A 34 To move resize copy cut and paste windows in the Layout window see following sections M oving and resizing windows in the Layout window on page A 39 Cutting copying pasting and deleting windows on page A 38 Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 21 Building character based applications Listing and selecting windows in the current screen List windows To list windows gt Select Screen W indow List Reult The Windows dialog displays W hat you see The W indows dialog shows the names of the windows belonging to the screen If there is more than one D isplay attached to the object for example if you are looking at the Screen editor for aGroup each display and its windows are listed in this dialog M Tip The title bar of the Screen editor shows an exclamation mark if any windows are invalid T he following example of the W indows dialog is for a G roup called GROUP1 GROUP1 has member parameters PA1 and PA2 and their attached displays The Display object PA1 is attached to parameter PA1 and owns the Prompt fo
365. xplanation facility displays the explain text holds function key assignments A 18 User s Guide Continued Building character based applications Continued Window Function GRAPHIC not currently used INFORMATION used by the Explanation facility INPUT holds a file name for STORE Or PRINTWINDOW commands It is also used to hold certainty values for certainty sets of records KDL holds KD L text for the Explanation facility MESSAGE LINE MESSAGE OBJECTS MENU OPTIONS MENU PROM PT SELECTION SELECTIONIN PUT holds AionD S consultation messages holds the message text holds object names such as the objects you can use with the backup command holds options displays the prompt used by the Explanation facility accepts selection input for constrained strings and constrained string sets It is especially useful on the mainframe because it separates the input from the menu of possible answers this window is used with the SELECT IN PUT profile option This profile option specifies the characters that cause choices to be selected Continued Building and Running Character Based Applications in AionDS A 19 Building character based applications Continued Window Function SUM M ARY used by the Explanation facility TEXT holds text for display T ext windows can contain literal text or TSL text You can also use text windows to create threedimensional effects U se the CREATE command or press
366. xt was found check List 6 To search external library objects check Include External Otherwise AionD S only searches objects you created 7 Click OK AionDS highlights the found object and the Continue Search dialog box displays Working with Objects 5 45 Searching for and replacing text 8 Click one of the following push buttons OK to continue searching for the next occurrence of the text Cancel to end the search Replacing tet To relacetet 5 46 1 Select the property or objects to search 2 Select Edit Replace 3 Enter the text to replace and the new text 4 Select the location to search in the Scope field Scope field Searches ActiveProp only the active property O bject s only selected objects KB the entire knowledge base 5 For alist of objectsin which the text was found check List 6 Click OK Text to be replaced is highlighted and the Confirm Replace dialog box displays 7 Click one of the following push buttons Push button Function Replace to replace the highlighted text with the new text and continue to the next occurrence of the text Ignore to continue to the next occurrence of the text without replacing the highlighted text Cancel to end the search and replace click Cancel User s Guide Exporting objects to external files Exporting objects to external files W hat to do To export an object to an external file use the Export window 1 Select an object to export
367. y Working with External Databases 7 17 Properties available in the class Memory cost 7 18 User s Guide Specifying Y es increases the amount of memory needed by the data To compare each record with its corresponding external record AionD S keeps a copy of the original record in memory in addition to any modifications made during a knowledge base execution The following figure illustrates this concept ORIGINAL MODIFIED AionDS uses COPY COPY Both sets the original copy heat be to check for Ante data integrity anaes If the record in the database matches the copy of the original in AionD S AionD S writes the modified record to the database If the record in the database differs from the copy of the original AionD S updates as many records as it can and writes a message stating that not all records could be updated If you are using SQL AionDS performs all possible updates but does not issue a commit Data Location Valid value On the mainframe Properties available in the class The D ata Location property is AionD S specified or user specified indicating one of the following a the database is located in the same environment as AionD S access to the database is through a data communications link You can set this property to LOCAL the data is in the same environment as AionD S making the data accessible without a data communications link Thisis the default REMOTE the dataisin aCICS IM S
368. y type or by owner from the View pull down menu 4 14 User s Guide Object listing by name Object listing by name Object List names Appetizer Broccoli AppetizerGB MCancelPB AppetizerGBPtr CeasarSalad HAppetizerLB Cheesetake MAppetizerLbl MChickenDijion fiBakedPotatoe ChocolateCake l Beer ClassName Beverage Coffee Beverage 7 ConvertPackayes Beverage MCom Beverage ECreateShoppingList l Beverage6B Day lBeverageGBPtr lDayLB l BeverageLB KDayList BeverageLbl KiDaySelPa EBreakfast Dessert KlBreakfastSlotList Dessert lDesserGB I DesserGBPtr lDesserLB MDessertLbl Dinner KDinnerSlotList MDishCancelPB llishDialogBox i DishDlg i DishOKPB lDishRecipeLB T DishRecipeLBPtr DishSelLB DishSelLbl DishSelLBPtr MJEqgsBenedict TExiM If you select N ames on the Select O bjects window each object displays in an Object List window with a mini icon and the object name iF iletMignon P FormatF orNlewSel lF ormatF orNewSel_ iF renchF ries iF renchToast ilFriedCalamari Fruit pb GetMenuPtr flGetMenuPtr_ GlobalParameters fyGotoMeal_ i GreenSalad lGroceryStandardW GrocerySW Hamburger lHashBrowns MHelpAboutM To sort the O bject List window select a sort characteristic by name by type or by parent from the View pull down menu Work with Object Lists 4 15 Object listing by detail Object listing by detail Overview If you select D et
369. y first selecting the object on which to stop and then selecting Run Set breakpoint You can set a breakpoint on an object a property of an object or a collection of objects On an object To set a breakpoint on an object complete the following steps 1 Select the object for which to set a breakpoint 2 Select Run Set Breakpoint Reult The breakpoint is set on the object On a property To set a breakpoint in a property complete the following steps 1 Open the object property for which to set a breakpoint D eleting break points Listing break points Suspending execution 2 Position the cursor on the statement to set a breakpoint 3 Select Run Set Breakpoint Reult The breakpoint is set on the property s statement On acollection of objects To set breakpoints on a collection of objects complete the following steps 1 Select the objects for which to set breakpoints 2 Select Run Set Breakpoint Reult Breakpoints are set for those objects To delete previously set breakpoints complete the following steps 1 Select the objects that have breakpoints in the object list window or the breakpoints in the Breakpoints window 2 Select Run Clear Breakpoints To quickly clear all breakpoints complete the following steps 1 Select Run List Breakpoints The Breakpoints window displays 2 Select Edit Select All 3 Select Run Clear Breakpoints Reult All breakpoints are deleted gt Tolistall currently set breakpoints
370. y to display an O bject List window is by graph O bject listing by graph shows the relationships between knowledge base objects If you select View Graph AionD S presents an O bject List window by graph of the objects meeting the criteria Possible relationships You can graph relationships between objects with the View pull down menu An O bject List window must be active when you select the object or objects The O bject List window displays the following graphical relationships Property Function N o relation U ses U sed By Owns Owned By resets graph to show no relationship for selected objects displays objects that the selected object uses T hese are the same objects you can observe in an object s U ses property window The selected object uses the graphed objects displays objects the selected object is used by T hese are the same objects you can observe in an object s U sed By property window The graphed objects use the selected object selects a context displaying the objects the selected context owns The selected object owns the graphed objects selects any object and shows the context that owns the selected _ object 4 22 User s Guide continued continued Property Object listing by graph Function W rites Reads Read By Calls Called by selects a function rule state or process When the selected object executes the slots and parameters to which the select

AionDS User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents